Marine Community Monitoring Manual

MARINE COMMUNITY MONITORING MANUAL (2ND EDITION)

“An early warning system for detecting change in the marine environment”

A collaborative project between the Department of Conservation and Land Management (CALM, Marine Conservation Branch); the Australian Marine Conservation Society, Western Australian Branch (AMCS WA); and the Natural Heritage Trust’s (NHT) Coastwest /Coastcare Programme.

Funding provided by Coastwest/ Coastcare. An initiative of NHT (Coastwest/ Coastcare programme) and CALM, Marine Conservation Branch.

August 2003

Marine Conservation Branch Department of Conservation and Land Management 47 Henry St. Fremantle, Western Australia, 6160

Updated 12/05/03 Page i

Marine Community Monitoring Manual

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Direction: • Dr Chris Simpson – Manager, Marine Conservation Branch (MCB), Nature Conservation Division, CALM.

Prepared by: • Karen Wheeler - Department of Conservation and Land Management (CALM).

Marine Community Monitoring Program Steering Committee: • Nick D’Adamo - CALM; • Martin Heller - Natural Heritage Trust (NHT), Coastwest/ Coastcare; • Nick Dunlop - Australian Marine Conservation Society, Western Australian Branch (AMCS WA); and • Tim Grubba, CALM.

Funding and Resources: • Funding has been provided by the NHT, via the Coastwest/ Coastcare Programme. • Resources including scientific and technical assistance, administrative assistance and logistical/ operational support has been provided by CALM.

Community Participation: • Many sectors of the community have been involved in developing the Marine Community Monitoring Manual since the programme inception in 1999 and a special thank you is extended to all groups involved. Participating groups have been listed separately in the Manual (Please refer to Part IV, section 1.3).

Photographs and images: • Cover page: With permission, Department of Planning and Infrastructure (DPI, Perth). Photograph courtesy of Andrew Halsall, Fast Photos Albany. • Source of photographs used in the MCMP Manual: • Photographs used in Section 9.0 (Introduced marine pests) - With permission, Commonwealth Scientific Industrial Research Organisation (CSIRO, Hobart) (http://crimp.marine.csiro.au/nimpis); • Photographs used in Section 3.0 (Marine habitats) - CD-ROM “Marine Life in Western Australia” (CD-ROM produced in collaboration with the Western Australian Museum, CALM and Coastwest/ Coastcare); and • Remaining photographs sourced from CALM (Marine Conservation Branch, archived collection), or otherwise referenced in the MCMP Manual.

Updated 12/05/03 Page ii

Marine Community Monitoring Manual

MARINE COMMUNITY MONITORING MANUAL (2ND EDITION)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART I: ‘STARTING UP” – ESSENTIAL READING 1.0 MANAGING OUR MARINE ENVIRONMENT 2.0 SELECTING A MONITORING PROJECT 2.1 Level 1: General 2.2 Level 2: Impacts, indicators and monitoring methods 3.0 SELECTING A MONITORING SITE 3.1 Control and impact sites 3.2 Re-locatable and opportunistic sites 4.0 COORDINATING A SUCCESSFUL MONITORING PROGRAM 4.1 Developing a framework for your monitoring program 4.2 Putting together a project file 4.3 Seven points to ensure a successful monitoring program 5.0 NETWORKING 5.1 Promoting your project 5.2 Contacting relevant authorities 6.0 HOW TO USE THE MANUAL 6.1 Overview of the manual sections 6.2 Ratings system 6.3 Registration 6.4 Carrying out monitoring 6.5 What happens to your data? 7.0 REGISTRATION FORMS AND RELEVANT DOCUMENTS 7.1 Registration form 7.2 Site registration form 7.3 Framework document (Blank, for you to fill in)

PART II: II (A): METHODS. II (B): INFORMATION AND DATA SHEETS PHYSICAL METHODS 1.0 BEACHES 1.1 Beach width 1.2 Beach structure 1.3 Beach profiles 2.0 WATER QUALITY 2.1 Temperature and clarity 2.2 Temperature logger BIOLOGICAL METHODS 3.0 MARINE HABITATS 3.1 Mapping the seabed 3.2 Monitoring the seabed 4.0 CORAL HEALTH 4.1 Bleaching and coral predators 4.2 Annual coral mass spawning 4.3 Coral spawn slicks 5.0 SEAGRASS HEALTH 5.1 Seagrass regeneration 5.2 Seagrass meadow edge

Updated 12/05/03 Page iii

Marine Community Monitoring Manual

6.0 MONITORING FISH 6.1 Temperate species 7.0 MANGROVE HEALTH 7.1 Mangrove health 8.0 MARINE MAMMALS 8.1 Marine mammals 9.0 INTRODUCED MARINE PESTS 9.1 Introduced marine pests SOICAL METHODS 10.0 LITTER SURVEYS 10.1 Litter surveys 11.0 HUMAN USAGE 11.1 Boat ramp usage 11.2 Recreational boating sites

PART III: METHODS – ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1.0 AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHY 1.1 Background information on aerial photography 1.2 Accessing the DOLA website and viewing images 1.3 Using ER-Viewer to open your image 2.0 SITE DESCRIPTIONS 2.1 The five nautical mile grid system 2.2 Site position (waypoint) 2.3 ‘Mud maps’ 3.0 STANDARD EQUIPMENT USED IN MONITORING 3.1 Waterproof paper or underwater slates 3.2 Tape measures 3.3 Compass 3.4 Tide charts 3.5 Nautical charts 3.6 Photography and video 3.7 Transect lines 3.8 Secchi disc 3.9 Thermometers 3.10 Temperature loggers 3.11 Debenham level

PART IV: GENERAL INFORMATION 1.0 HISTORY OF THE PROGRAM 1.1 Introduction 1.2 Evolution of the manual 1.3 Acknowledgments 1.4 Building partnerships: community, managers and scientists 1.5 Management of our marine environment 2.0 SAFETY ISSUES 3.0 BEING ENVIRONMENTALLY SENSITIVE WHEN MONITORING

PART V: USEFUL REFERENCES

PART VI: APPENDICES FIVE NAUTICAL MILE GRID REFERENCE SHEETS FOR WESTERN AUSTRALIA

Updated 12/05/03 Page iv PART I: “Starting Up”

Marine Community Monitoring Manual

PART I: REGISTRATION AND ESSENTIAL READING

“STARTING UP”

It is essential that you read the following chapter before starting your monitoring program. The chapter provides important information to assist you in Starting up a monitoring program, including the necessary Registration forms.

Updated 12/05/03 Page v

Marine Community Monitoring Manual

PART I: TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 MANAGING OUR MARINE ENVIRONMENT PAGE 1

2.0 SELECTING A MONITORING PROJECT PAGE 2 TO 6 2.1 LEVEL 1: WHAT TO MONITOR AND WHY? 2.2 LEVEL 2: IMPACTS, INDICATORS AND MONITORING METHODS

3.0 SELECTING A MONITORING SITE PAGE 6 TO 8 3.1 CONTROL AND IMPACT SITES 3.2 RE-LOCATABLE AND OPPORTUNISTIC SITES

4.0 COORDINATING A SUCCESSFUL MONITORING PROGRAM PAGE 8 TO 10 4.1 DEVELOPING A FRAMEWORK FOR YOUR MONITORING PROGRAM 4.2 PUTTING TOGETHER A PROJECT FILE 4.3 SEVEN POINTS TO ENSURE A SUCCESSFUL MONITORING PROGRAM

5.0 NETWORKING PAGE 10 5.1 PROMOTING YOUR PROJECT 5.2 CONTACTING RELEVANT AUTHORITIES

6.0 HOW TO USE THE MANUAL PAGE 11 TO 13 6.1 OVERVIEW OF THE MANUAL SECTIONS 6.2 RATINGS SYSTEM 6.3 REGISTRATION 6.4 CARRYING OUT MONITORING 6.5 WHAT HAPPENS TO YOUR DATA?

7.0 REGISTRATION FORMS AND RELEVANT DOCUMENTS PAGE 14 TO 17 7.1 REGISTRATION FORM 7.2 SITE REGISTRATION FORM 7.3 FRAMEWORK DOCUMENT (BLANK)

Photographs: Community monitoring of reef platforms at Garden Island, Western Australia (2003).

Updated 12/05/03 Page vi PART I: “Starting Up”

Marine Community Monitoring Manual

1.0 MANAGING OUR MARINE ENVIRONMENT Management agencies, government organisations and research institutions monitor the health of marine environments to ensure that changes associated with either human usage or natural events do not arise unnoticed before it is too late to make appropriate management decisions. To better understand this, it maybe worthwhile looking at human health and how we measure and protect our own health.

Health in human terms can narrowly be defined as the absence of symptoms of disease or more broadly as the general condition of vitality and well-being. When a person is healthy, or functioning well in mind and body, they can perform all vital functions normally and properly. They are able to recover from normal stresses and require minimal care and maintenance.

To monitor our health we monitor, in various ways, a range of indicators such as the presence of pain, a general feeling of well-being, our pulse rate and/or our body temperature. Changes in these indicators provide us with an early warning system of potential health problems. If we do not leave it too late to address the problem, then there is a good chance that we can rectify it before it becomes too serious. The ability of a person to recover from disease, illness or extreme stress depends on their resilience and strength of health. The way we monitor our own health is comparable to how we might monitor environmental health.

The health of a marine environment can be measured at three levels: a) individual species level, b) community level (different species) and, c) the ecosystem level (consisting of different communities). The health of an individual species can provide a measurable indication of the health of a community, because one is a component of the other. Likewise the health of a community can provide an indication on the health of a marine ecosystem.

As a management tool we need to monitor ‘indicators’ of the health of the marine environment in order to realise changes to the health of the marine ecosystem. This may include monitoring the health of single species (eg. corals or a marine mammal) or monitoring components of a community. If changes from what is considered 'normal' are detected, then something can be done to further investigate the causes of these changes and if necessary, take action to rectify the problem before it is too late.

There are increasing pressures on the health of marine ecosystems as a result of our ever-increasing human population. Direct impacts at the coast and indirect human activities inland all contribute to the health of the coastal environment. Examples include: • nutrient loading from industry, agriculture and urbanisation • oil and chemical pollutants from industry • turbidity from sewage, dredging and storm-water discharge • coastal development impacting dunes, beaches and near shore reef systems. • introduced marine pests from ballast water discharge • over-fishing as a result of poorly managed fisheries • physical damage - anchors and cray pots

Not all impacts in the marine environment are human induced. Others may be attributed to natural disturbances (eg. cyclones and storms) or global effects (eg. increases in oceanic temperatures and El nino and La nina events).

It is essential to understand and manage these impacts where possible, so that irreversible damage is not caused. One means of managing impacts is through monitoring of the marine environment and this is a task that can be shared between universities, research institutions, government agencies, councils and the community – you!

By providing a series of monitoring methods, and a simple and structured way to record information the Marine Community Monitoring Program provides a framework to assist the community monitor the marine environment. Information gathered can then be made available to others in the community including local government, State and Commonwealth environmental management agencies, research institutes and environmental groups. Community groups may choose to monitor the health of the marine environment to: a) measure the impacts of human usage, b) increase awareness over its state / condition and c) study and learn.

Updated 12/05/03 Page 1 PART I: “Starting Up”

Marine Community Monitoring Manual

2.0 SELECTING A MONITORING PROJECT We have identified various pressures on marine ecosystems and the need to monitor the environment, to assist management. The very reason you have a copy of the manual is possibly because you are interested in participating, or even starting a monitoring project. The question is how do you select a project? You could simply scroll through the index of the manual, however, unless you have some idea of what you want to monitor and why, this could prove to be a waste of time.

The following information has been included to assist you in selecting a monitoring project that suits your needs, interests and time schedule. It has been broken into two levels. The first level discusses why you might become involved in marine monitoring and identifies ‘things’ you could monitor in the environment. The second level is more detailed and draws examples specifically from seagrass and coral communities to demonstrate potential threats and indicators in the marine environment and then guides you to appropriate methods you could use from the manual. Diagrams and examples are provided to assist in this process.

2.1 LEVEL 1 – WHAT TO MONITOR AND WHY? Before you begin to monitor you must decide why you want to monitor and what you want to monitor in the marine environment?

There are three broad reasons why you might become involved in monitoring, these include: an increasing awareness of human activities (and impacts) along the coast. an increasing awareness over the state of your local coastal and marine environment. a desire to learn more about your coastal and marine environment.

The question then continues with, ‘what are you interested in monitoring?’ Projects may involve monitoring the biological or physical component of the marine environment or through conducting human usage surveys. Please refer to Figure 1a and 1b, these diagrams will assist in guiding you towards selecting a suitable monitoring project for your group.

Photograph,Courtesy of Bunbu courrtesy Cya ofthedr Charisl Gr Gibbsamma r School, Chris Gibbs 1 2

3 4 4

Community monitoring projects around Western Australia: 1) Bunbury Cathedral Grammar School (Bunbury); 2) Cape Conservation at Oyster Stacks (Ningaloo Marine Park); 3) Friends of Marmion Marine Park (Marmion Marine Park) and 4) Australian Marine Conservation Society (WA) at Garden Island.

Updated 12/05/03 Page 2 PART I: “Starting Up”

ge a ” p xt p g u n i rt a

“St ntinued ne cal e t the o I n u T o

R b ur l a o

mari EY y PA

V n BASIC R and s i Figure 1: Co ts al a 3. t m astal environment i o bi n learn more You can a a h and c us MARINE SU and sh to CONDUCT A

o i s w u ant vari pl marine Yo

D D E E V V L L O O

ur V V T o l y N N N

I I f

ta s your o T T a E E

ate G G

st T O O N and co T T PHYSICAL

Page 3 2. S S r the ENVIRONME N N to increase rine O O ove You can monitor the S S environment ss A A l ma E E ca R R BIOLOGICAL mmunity Monitoring Manual lo ENVIRONME You wish E E arene E E You can monitor the aw R R H H T T

D D N N A Marine Co A

U U O O ? Y Y Y WH

you AND s on t S tal ITIE V and coas TO MONITOR 1. is increasing, about impac T d rine HA a W environment. AT THE COAST –

You can monitor n usage ) ncerne HUMAN ACTI a o the m 1 a

3 Hum are c /05/0 FIGURE 1 (

ted 12 a d p LEVEL U ” p g u , r f n d d i e rt p o a a m ite dive

“St ur rine plants a I uct a SIC EY m T ne plants an i at your sit R BA RV r s e a SCUBA dive a ou favo y

pping the Seabe m PA a at e h You ar als ou can constr DUCT A in habitat a ple: m als present. MARINE SU CON m thod y MAPPING THE SEABED e Exam with an interest in the and anim spot Using the M m the including t ani 3.1 t d n d d

m ve ne ile o and ne. an oy use the nitore oy prof s to pu out the of san nd ha er. o anges i b m thods fr e onitor beach m m ned the gr to wint r tanding

e coast a s of the year s e h ook at ch on your favorite e T ITY thod would all allow students a mm e uction of the gr cture to be act AL su e a school teacher m ea using e concer

p nt tim our

ve on t the council want e y i each width, beach t beaches. You can c ar ar stru m r You can hod to l t om ICAL r e S constr tha aphi m You ar TER QU The b

sandy You l A at diffe PHY

out BEACHES W , ne. You nt in the e ng beach. cs of e ENVIRONMEN i oy nual. i und and after ple 1: ple 2: a 1.0 2.0 m m e m tim m m cesses to get an under o the photogr ove r each profile ust fo Exam j in a gr will negatively i swi p m the or changes in beach over befor Exam want to educate dyna b beach structure f Page 4 . t t f e d n d e n to n h ide e e ing ese s o tho n h w e m m r e o tim m T m ing has nual m ngroves, a such as You ca a

nage nage a a m y mmunity Monitoring Manual m als, m m tain ti ntation. e

. m te to a state i relating to these u ou can initiate a sightings. nd ever At cer gular basis. T ate a

change over

T e Y ovide

ngrove health

? sed

. our a

. ’ ation, R thod in the

m ALS pr for e O y ned that land clear whales in the harbour an M and a gnificent anim m ing y pacts a d m dance.

Marine Co pacting on coastal m NIT al to keep fit. onitor m of the Manual) O m I m pback ecor abun ng y in turn, initi m

i e concer m M using the bour llect can contrib a BIOLOGICAL a vant inform rt I r ed runoff o these in r ar ENVIRONMEN e a a m whales on a r

am f onitor MARINE HABITATS CORAL HEALTH SEAGRASS HEALTH MONITORING FISH MANGROVE HEALTH MARINE MAM MARINE PESTS o ne sted ogr duce these im You i you c e g e r : You live in Albany a nual and ble in P bution and 7.0 6.0 3.0 5.0 4.0 8.0 9.0 a i m ng pr m these i ound the h ation tandin e inter ple 1: ple 2 s m distr availa r o sponse to r onitor onitor ou ar e Exam resulted in increas activities appear to be i which are looking ‘unhealthy m in the Consistent m agencies with rel activities, which m r Exam walk ar the year you see hu y use the m inf under their thods e AT PARAMETERS TO t t r r r r WH y n

m e to ish the ng, o h o tif g i r – c fo you boa m e it is s. A no in a ubb be r site, to g ned tha 1 b) oor

get o to y onitor m a on- m eadows f

ation can be ce wher

sponsible, u m ount of r e

or of user p N

e concer er acts of RES signage FIGURE m 3 b p A a r m ou are a tea m You can ect and weigh ponse m is inform i education pr

1 ( You can and ded s aign. h

e e p T Orange boxes correspond to m h coll HUM /05/0 ings or

et those r ally . : Y g You ar u

adows. PRESSU m LITTER SURVEYS HUMAN USAGE ote: e nt r oor o e N s of t m LEVEL (

the nu ann pacts on seagrass s at the e via an ed vessels. ned at the high am ted 12 ple 1 ple 2 tional boat traffic is increasi m 10.0 11.0 er tising cam pl a a ng fr b i d m nagem m m ovide p a r ubbish, Exam recre with i anchor nu quantify m p boat user seagrass m Exam concer on your beach. students to r co used to tar exa adver U Marine Community Monitoring Manual

2.2 LEVEL 2 – ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS, INDICATORS AND MONITORING METHODS The second level provides additional examples to demonstrate why we might monitor the marine environment, using specifically seagrass and coral reef communities as examples. As with Level 1 this information will assist you in navigating about the manual, as you decide what you would like to monitor.

It is possible you are interested in monitoring the marine and coastal environment because you have seen things happen along the coast that you are not familiar with, or that have become progressively worse over time. We will call these observations, indicators. Table 1a and 1b provide examples to demonstrate indicators you may observe in seagrass and coral communities. In response to these indicators you may wish to monitor for impacts over time. To assist you with identifying methods to use, the table also lists sections of the manual that can assist with collecting this information.

TABLE 1 a: SEAGRASS HABITATS

POTENTIAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS INDICATORS METHODS AVAILABLE Increased nutrients (Eutrophication) Human waste, agricultural run off, industry, river run off etc.

High nutrients encourage epiphytes* (small seaweed) Lots of algae on the seagrass 5.1 Seagrass to grow on the seagrass. This can smother the (green seaweed ) or seagrass regeneration seagrass and reduce light reaching the shoots, which not looking healthy (ie leaves 3.2 Monitoring the could lead to widespread losses not green and healthy). seabed

(*whilst epiphytes are a natural part of seagrass

communities, excess nutrients encourage fast growing green

and brown seaweed to dominate).

High nutrients can also cause excess phytoplankton in Water looks cloudy and dirty the water column. This can reduce light available to with a green tinge. 2.1 Water quality seagrass for photosynthesis and may prevent seagrass (clarity) growing in deeper water. 5.2 Seagrass meadow (edge) Increased sedimentation Dredging activities, run off from land

Increased sediments may smother seagrass by Lots of silt on the seagrass or 2.1 Water quality directly settling on shoots, forming a film and so seagrass not looking healthy (clarity) reducing light available for photosynthesis. Or (ie leaves not green and sedimentation can act by silting up the water column healthy). and reducing light to the seagrass. Water looks cloudy and dirty. 5.1 Seagrass regeneration 3.2 Monitoring the seabed. Boating activity Propellors, moorings, anchors

Can physically damage seagrass meadows. Visible anchor scars in the 5.1 Seagrass seagrass meadow. regeneration 3.2 Monitoring the seabed Storm events

Can rip out seagrass or cause ‘blowouts’ (large ares Blowouts, or holes in the 5.1 Seagrass of bare sand) within a seagrass meadow. seagrass meadow. regeneration 3.2 Monitoring the seabed

Updated 12/05/03 Page 5 PART I “Starting up”

Marine Community Monitoring Manual

TABLE 1 b: CORAL REEF HABITATS

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT INDICATORS METHODS AVAILABLE Increased nutrients (Eutrophication) Human waste, agricultural run off from the land.

Excess seaweed growth can overgrow and kill corals or Seaweed may become 3.2 Monitoring the seabed prevent settlement of new coral larvae. dominant on dying / dead corals.

Phytoplankton blooms in the water column can reduce Water looks cloudy and 2.1 Water quality (clarity) light levels to corals below. dirty with a green tinge. Increased sedimentation Dredging activities, run off from the land. Water becomes cloudy and 2.1 Water quality (clarity) Reduced light through sedimentation can prevent the dirty. growth and survival of corals in deeper waters. Light sediments are re-suspended by wave action effecting light reaching coral communities. Climate change and coral bleaching.

Corals usually recover from bleaching except in extreme Corals appear white, as 4.1 Coral health circumstances. Bleaching is caused by temperature green algae within, begin to (bleaching) extremes, pollution and exposure to air. 1 – 2 degree C die effecting the coral for a few weeks is sufficient for a mass event. health.

Cyclones

Cyclone Vance – Bundegi (Ningaloo Marine Park), Re-colonization is slow but 3.2 Monitoring the seabed widespread damage and destruction of coral habitat. does occur naturally

3.0 SELECTING A MONITORING SITE Site selection will depend on what you are interested in monitoring. With your group discuss the six questions identified in the following section (4.0 Coordinating a successful monitoring program). These questions will provide a framework for your program and guide your monitoring activities. Once you are clear in your minds about what you want to monitor and why, appropriate site selection will follow. The MCMP Project Officer can assist community groups with site selection by offering advice via e-mail or over the phone, or where possible by assisting your community group in the field, on your monitoring day.

3.1 CONTROL AND IMPACT SITES On the site Registration forms there is a check box on whether the monitoring site is classified as a control site or an impact site. Impact sites are sites where there are known human impacts. For example when measuring the parameter water clarity, a site would be classified as an impact site if it was located in the vicinity of a sewage outlet. Control sites are sites where there are no known human activities that will impact on the parameter you are monitoring.

There are opportunities with many of the methods to select and monitor a control site and an impact site. When selecting a control and an impact site for the purpose of comparing results it is important that sites are similar (eg. depth, aspect and habitat type), so that the main difference between the sites is the potential impact at the impact site. However caution must be taken, when using the information you generate to compare the control and impact site/ s.

It is unlikely you will be able to directly compare the information generated unless a number of scientific principles are followed (eg. consistent data collection, at a number of replicate sites over a long period of time).

Updated 12/05/03 Page 6 PART I “Starting up”

Marine Community Monitoring Manual

To effectively compare different sites, scientists develop comprehensive monitoring programs that include various levels of replication (eg. often quite complicated) and encompassing long-term data collection (eg. often seasonally through the year and over a number of successive years). Often the results of these monitoring programs still do not shed light on what is causing the impact or what the effects are. This is because there may be other influences or impacts, or simply because ecosystems are highly variable in time and space, making comparisons between sites extremely difficult – even for the professionals!

The purpose of highlighting this point is to stress that community groups can monitor and collect information that can be used as an ‘early warning system to detect change in the marine environment’. However, caution must be taken when using the information generated to compare between sites.

An example is provided to demonstrate this point:

Community seagrass monitoring program – Your group selects one site to monitor - a control seagrass site with no obvious impacts. You lay one transect line and monitor the seagrass every three months for four years. At the end of this time you notice trends in the information you collect. These trends might reflect seasonal and annual trends in the seagrass meadow - which reflect natural variability along your transect line.

Community results - essentially your group has collected important information on the natural variability along that transect line, which given an absence of any other information, forms a baseline for that section of seagrass meadow. Important information to have!

Scientific seagrass monitoring program - to expand on this information a scientist would have conducted a similar survey. However instead of using one transect line, the scientist would have: a) used at least three transect lines, placed randomly in the seagrass meadow and, b) selected and monitored at least three similar sites (instead of just one).

Scientific results - With this replication the scientist can do a statistical analysis and make inferences about the natural variability present across the entire seagrass meadow, as opposed to just along the one transect line.

Both monitoring programs provide important baseline information and if the site experiences a serious impact in the future, there is every probability that both of these monitoring programs will detect a change in seagrass health, in response to this impact.

3.2 RE-LOCATABLE AND OPPORTUNISTIC SITES The selection of monitoring sites is referred to as ‘Site selection’ in the Method sheets. There are two types of sites, re-locatable sites and opportunistic sites.

If the method requires the selection of re-locatable sites, you will need to fill in the Site registration form, when you have selected your sites. The information recorded on this form includes a description of the site location (eg. ‘mud’ map) to ensure it can be re-located. The form has provisions to record four benchmarks at the site. A benchmark is a relocatable point for which you obtain a waypoint (Latuitude and Longitude), so that the exact spot can be found in the future. Suitable benchmarks may include an obvious rock feature, a distinctive coral bommie, the corner of a car park or a pathway. The option to record four benchmarks allows for replicate sites to be monitored. For example, you may want to measure beach width every 50 metres along South Beach in Fremantle. The Site registration form allows you to record, in detail, a benchmark for each re-locatable transect you do, including the latitude and longitude for each benchmark.

You should send this form to the Department of Conservation and Land Management (CALM), who will provide you with a Site registration number. Use this number when required on all subsequent Data sheets.

Updated 12/05/03 Page 7 PART I “Starting up”

Marine Community Monitoring Manual

If the method is based on carrying out opportunistic monitoring (eg. recording a random sighting) then you do not need to fill in the Site registration form, in these instances the appropriate datasheet for that method will have provisions to record the waypoint (Latitude and Longitude).

4.0 COORDINATING A SUCCESSFUL MONITORING PROGRAM Whilst you can simply select and follow a method from the manual to monitor the marine and coastal environment, we suggest for those groups interested in monitoring in the long term (ie. a number of years), that you follow the following protocol. The protocol is simple and involves developing a framework and putting together a project file. These two simple tools will assist you in coordinating your project. 4.1 DEVELOPING A FRAMEWORK FOR YOUR MONITORING PROGRAM Setting up and coordinating a successful monitoring program can be achieved by answering a series of six questions with your group, the answers will provide a foundation for your monitoring program - to assist with developing your ideas, selecting methods and sites and managing your program. An example has been provided (Table 2), to assist you with developing a framework for your program.

A blank form is available (Section 7.3: Registration forms and essential documents) for you to fill in as a group. The form is entitled ‘Framework for your monitoring program’.

4.2 PUTTING TOGETHER A PROJECT FILE Put together a project file which should contain the following information:

PART A: Contact details of everyone in the group, including the ‘group leader’. PART B: Complete the ‘Framework for your monitoring program’, by answering the six question provided. PART C: A copy of your Registration form and Site registration form (if required). PART D: Data sheets collected for each monitoring date, with the names of all participants listed (this is useful, to acknowledge those involved over the years). PART E: Results. You may compile additional results (graphs etc.) for your own information, to help track changes over time, include these in your project file.

The project file is important and all members should read it. This shared knowledge will empower everyone in the group, so that you all have the same goals and objectives. In addition the information is important for new people joining your group and also in the event that the group leader leaves and someone else takes over, especially if your program has a long-term focus.

Updated 12/05/03 Page 8 PART I “Starting up”

Marine Community Monitoring Manual

TABLE 2: FRAMEWORK FOR YOUR MONITORING PROGRAM (AN EXAMPLE)

The potential problem: An outlet pipe from an aquaculture farm has been installed and wastewater will be discharged into the ocean only fifty metres from your favourite dive bommie.

QUESTIONS ANSWERS / ACTIONS

1. Why do you want to monitor the There is a concern that waste water, rich in nutrients, will be discharged marine and coastal environment?. from the outlet and impact on the general health of the (our) bommie.

2. What do you want to monitor? To monitor the health of the bommie, including the plant and animal communities.

3 methods were identified from the Manual: 1. Mapping the Seabed – to map dominant plant and animal communities in the area. 2. Monitoring the Seabed – to detect changes in communities over time. 3. Monitoring Fish – to determine target species presence / absence around the bommie

3. What information are we going to Information to collect collect and how much time do we want to 1. Mapping the Seabed - we will generate a map of the site with a spend collecting it ? detailed description of the dominant plant and animal communities present. 2. Monitoring the Seabed – we will establish two transects and record the plant and animal communities encountered along the transect line. 3. Monitoring Fish – Using information collected from the Seabed Mapping exercise we will develop a ‘fish swim’ and record target fish species encountered around the different habitats. Time allocated to monitoring We can only monitor twice through the year. We have decided to monitor on the first weekend in Spring and the first weekend in Summer. We plan on monitoring the site for at least five years.

4. Who will analyse and use the 1. Information generated will be housed on the MCMP database and information we collect? analysed to determine trends at the site, overtime. 2. We will also manage our own data, to detect trends between successive monitoring dates. 3. The information generated will be made available to the council, aquaculture farm, marine managers and other interested parties.

Examine Question 1 to 4 logically and ask (If you do not answer yes to these, revise your actions to ensure you address the potential problem)

5. Will the information we collect and the Yes, we believe that if we continue to collect data as described, frequency with which we collect it, deleterious effects on the ‘health’ of the bommie will be detected if they address the potential problem? arise.

6. Will the data we collect be in a form Project File that management can interpret and Data sheets will be filled in methodically and collated in our project file, understand? together with this Framework document. This will enable others to follow the reasoning, progress and data from our project.

Updated 12/05/03 Page 9 PART I “Starting up”

Marine Community Monitoring Manual

4.3 SEVEN POINTS TO ENSURE A SUCCESSFUL MONITORING PROGRAM When you develop the framework for your monitoring program think about the following seven points:

o ENJOYMENT FACTOR: Your monitoring days should be fun! This is important because if activities become tedious volunteers will not be back the next time. Some options to make the day fun could include a social barbecue at the end of the day or staggering a monitoring activity with a fun activity (one monitoring dive followed by a fun dive).

o TIME FRAMES: Base your monitoring program and objectives around how much time YOU want to / can spend monitoring the marine and coastal environment.

o KEEP IT SIMPLE: Do not set yourselves too many objectives and keep within your time frame.

o CONSISTENCY: It is important to follow the same methods and protocols each time as detailed in your Project File.

o REGULAR MONITORING: Once you have decided how much time you can spare to monitor, make sure you stick to your monitoring regime. This could be weekly, monthly, seasonally or annually.

o OBJECTIVE NOT SUBJECTIVE MONITORING: It is important that you monitor exactly as it is, with no bias for how you think it should be. In other words, no cheating!! o SHARED KNOWLEDGE: It is important that everyone in your group knows what you are doing and why. This not only keeps people informed, but in the event that the group leader leaves someone else can take over and your efforts would not have been wasted. o PROJECT FILE: Producing a project file is a simple process and one that will benefit your project in the future. It should contain the framework for your monitoring program, data sheets and any other related information. 5.0 NETWORKING 5.1 PROMOTING YOUR PROJECT Promoting your project to the wider community is important for the following reasons: • It increases community awareness about marine issues in your local area. • It will encourage others to become involved. • It may promote resource sharing (eg. boats, equipment, identification books, expertise etc.) and information sharing (eg. results and outcomes), to the benefit of your project and the wider community.

You might promote your project by: • Putting up a sign at your site on the day you monitor (group name, project name etc.) and / or by wearing t-shirts with your group logo. • Notifying your local community newspaper of your project and the days you anticipate being at the site to monitor. • Or for the more adventurous, developing a webpage.

Don’t underestimate the importance of promoting your project as it might lead to funding opportunities in the future (eg. local businesses or government funding initiatives such as Coastcare). Having a little cash will benefit your group - to purchase identification books, equipment or other items to assist your project outcomes.

5.2 CONTACTING RELEVANT AUTHORITIES Contact relevant authorities and tell them about your group and monitoring project prior to starting and keep them informed of your on-going activities. Authorities may include local councils, management agencies (eg. CALM, Dept. of Environment, Fisheries etc.) or other land managers who frequent the area you are interested in (eg. station owners or caravan park owners).

Updated 12/05/03 Page 10 PART I “Starting up”

Marine Community Monitoring Manual

6.0 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 6.1 OVERVIEW OF THE MANUAL SECTIONS The manual is divided into six parts to facilitate downloading relevant sections, in the form of Pdf files from the web (www.naturebase.net). From the NatureBase home page, follow the prompts to the Marine Community Monitoring Program.

The stars located beside each method provide a rough evaluation of that method. For a simple method, 1 star (1) and for a more complex method, three stars (1 1 1). The rating system is described on the following page (Section 6.2).

PART I: “STARTING UP” – REGISTRATION AND ESSENTIAL READING”

METHODS AND RATINGS SECTIONS TO DOWNLOAD (Pdf)

PART I: “ STARTING UP” – ESSENTIAL READING

PART II: METHODS AND INFORMATION / DATA SHEETS (A) (B) (Methods) (Information and data sheets) PHYSICAL

1 BEACHES 1.1 Beach Width 1 1.2 Beach structure 1 1 1.3 Beach profiles 1 1 1 2 WATER QUALITY 2.1 Water quality (temperature and clarity) 1 2.2 Water temperature (logger) 11

PART II (B) PART II (B) BIOLOGICAL

3 MARINE HABITATS 3.1 Mapping the seabed 1 1 1 3.2 Monitoring the seabed 1 1 1 4 CORAL HEALTH 4.1 Bleaching and coral predators 1 4.2 Annual coral mass spawning 1 4.3 Coral spawn slicks 1

5 SEAGRASS HEALTH 5.1 Seagrass regeneration 1 1 1 5.2 Seagrass meadow edge 1 1 1 6 FISH DIVERSTIY 6.1 Fish diversity 1 1

7 MANGROVE HEALTH 7.1 Mangrove health 1 1

8 MARINE MAMMALS 8.1 Marine mammals 1

9 INTRODUCED MARINE PESTS 9.1 Introduced marine pests 1 1

Updated 12/05/03 Page 11 PART I “Starting up”

Marine Community Monitoring Manual

PART II (B) PART II (B) SOCIAL

10 LITTER SURVEYS 10.1 Litter surveys 1

11 HUMAN USAGE 11.1 Boat ramp usage 1 11.2 Recreational boating sites 1

PART III: METHODS - ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

PART IV: GENERAL INFORMATION - Program history, safety issues and being environmentally friendly

PART V: USEFUL REFERENCES

PART VI: APPENDICES – Five nautical mile grid reference sheets for WA

6.2 RATINGS SYSTEM

1 SIMPLE METHODS. BASIC EQUIPMENT. CAN BE COMPLETED IN LESS THAN TWO HOURS.

(SUITABLE FOR SCHOOL GROUPS)

1 1 METHODS ARE MORE ADVANCED. SPECIALIST EQUIPMENT AND / OR SPECIALIST SKILLS NEEDED. GREATER THAN TWO HOURS DURATION.

1 1 1 MORE ADVANCED METHODS. ACCURRACY AND ATTENTION TO DETAIL REQUIRED. SPECIALIST EQUIPMENT AND / OR SPECIALIST SKILLS NEEDED. GREATER THAN TWO HOURS DURATION.

6.3 REGISTRATION Once you decide to carry out monitoring as an individual or as part of a community group, you will need to: fill in the Registration form (this Chapter, Section 7.1) and send the completed form to CALM, who will supply you with a Registration number. Write the Registration number on all Data sheets, Site registration forms, photographs, videos, or any other materials you produce.

The benefits to your group for registering with the MCMP include; assistance with projects, advice on appropriate site selection and monitoring programs, program updates and information exchange (eg. reporting on the results and data trends within and between sites around Western Australia).

6.4 CARRYING OUT MONITORING Read all the relevant information that relates to your monitoring method including: method sheets; information sheets; and data sheets.

The Method sheet/s also ask you to read up on additional information relevant to that method (eg. equipment and safety). The selection of monitoring sites is referred to in ‘Site selection’ in the Method sheets. There are two types of sites; re-locatable and opportunistic. Please read this chapter (Section 3) for more information on selecting a monitoring site.

Updated 12/05/03 Page 12 PART I “Starting up”

Marine Community Monitoring Manual

If the method requires the selection of a re-locatable site, you will need to identify and select an appropriate site and then fill in a Site registration form (this Chapter, Section 7.2). The information recorded on this form includes a description of the site location (eg. ‘mud’ map) to ensure it can be re-located. If you cannot continue to monitor this site, it can be reassigned to another individual/group. You should send this form to CALM, which will provide you with a Site registration number. Use this number when required on Data sheets.

If the method is based on carrying out opportunistic monitoring (eg. recording a sighting) then you do not need to fill in a Site registration form.

The Information sheet has been designed to be taken into the field and used as a reference. These can be laminated simply and cheaply for on-going use.

All data should be entered into the Data sheets. The Data sheets provided should be photocopied prior to use. Completed Data sheets should be submitted to CALM (via mail or the internet site).

6.5 WHAT HAPPENS TO YOUR DATA ? After we have received your data, it is checked for possible errors and inconsistencies and then entered into a Marine Community Monitoring Database. During this checking process, we may need to contact you to ensure that the information you have submitted is correct or to get additional information. This highlights the importance of participants supplying us with accurate and up-to-date contact details and site information.

Data collated will provide information that can be accessed by community groups, councils, scientists, Government departments and management agencies. As such, the community can play a role in the management of our marine environment, working with other organisations for the benefit of conserving and protecting marine habitats, plants and animals for future generations.

If you are interested in participating in the Marine Community Monitoring Program please fill out the relevant Registration Forms and submit to CALM.

Updated 12/05/03 Page 13 PART I “Starting up”

. ” p MENTS U g u n i DOC rt

a “St

T R DE PA ) ND ESSENTIAL POSTCO ENDS ) YS

FORMS A WEEK , ION T WEEKDA , EVENINGS ( EGISTRA

R AYTIME D 1 R ( 7. ( )

( )

ONE NUMBER O H P CITY

/ N SUBURB NUMBER X

MAIL ADDRE

STREET

PRIMARY ALTERNATIVE PHONE NUMBE FA E ADDRESS

st be u . DCLM mmunity Monitoring Manual ogram are M er m b ion Num at itted to DCL REGISTRATION FORM Marine Co Monitoring Pr

tific YY en

Page 14

/ e Id /

ts.

er. Th ne Community b MM Shee i

a m

Mar /

N BEFORE COMPLETING THE LM. , which should be subm / IO

DATE

tion Nu ION FORM. the

e DC c D s and/or Dat th D y

rm tion Form b

entifi

a o

str i

on F id i ticipating in an Id v DATE o r th strat i p

lete a Reg 3 ROUP REGISTRAT Reg p GROUP NAME (IF FROM A GROUP) ON GROUP IDENTIFICATION NUMBER you wi e G S m R co Sit /05/0 dual/group par er will b * i

all issue UAL/ T PE D mb C I

on en

ted 12 nu VID indiv a d OUP ID p

PLEASE READ THIS SECT INDI Each requested to will th written GR * NAME CONTA U

. : ”

p MENTS

/s) ) U x SITE g u /s o

x n E i G o DOC rt

le b a

le b AT THE ORAG “St licab p I TOURISM PEARLIN licab MO p FISHERIES / T / p E USED R p e a R E GE able box) h t B e a PA O ND ESSENTIAL th

HORA (Tick x)

ACULTU

(Tick

the applic COMMERCIAL ANC

COMMERCIAL le bo AQU FORMS A TUM TE

MANUAL T I )

E SITE 4 3) (Tick D

ION E S

licab

T H H

IC 2) H

e app

W OF FROM THE O

GPS EGISTRA *

E . S NITY OF T CINITY OF T 1 / G

IES I IF N (Tick th UTH 2 R D R V

O 7. UTION ired) E TIVITY MINING H PAGE E VICI

LLUTION LL ( H O O USED LONG DETERMINED requ

M DAMA

G AC / P P L FISHE

N 84 E METHO T od OR RIVER M NA A S

O TH G IMPACTS – HUMAN AND NATURAL ACTS IN T E L

meth T SEWAGE DREDGI TH R t 1 IMP S s YES TUM W INDUSTRIAL RECENT ST A lea CHA

WA RECREATI t W MAN IMPACTS IN T a NAUTICAL

U O ) H WAS D CLEARLY LIST 1) 2 (* H NATURAL

e e y

mmunity Monitoring Manual E SITE . Sites onl H

site e

abl t YY

/ E . This number must b /

Marine Co

gistration form should be ) re-loca

ED e NAM mber R nu MM

Page 15 anent

STE Site r ndices I COMPLETING T

e G / GROUP

MBER AND DATE / Appe

of th monitored. Completed forms should b

y / VI, each perm p DD SITE REGISTRATION FORM DATE RE

sited i Site registration

leted for

y FERENCE b

(Refer to Part

E gistered with the MCMP. be com provide that site. A R . SECTION BEFORE R ed me the site. SITE REGISTERED BY id for na v ce, when first v RM

should r

eets NUMBE er ating

h tive p c N e

SITE DESCRIPTION / DETAILS mb 3 if you are re MILE GRID LM, who will scrip e re-lo

ill b FICATION NUMBER Nu ION FO L e

C Data s gistered on d e

* /05/0 r READ THIS all er w STRATIO o mplet RAT when I SITE REGISTRATION NU l o UTICA gistration form mb be r LM to u P IDENTI re ted 12 n itted to D U a d O is Site e DC Only c p R

Officia PLEASE REGIST A need to subm written on SITE REG Th th G * SITE NAME * FIVE NA Letter referred U

. S S S S E E E E rd

) ” onitor p NG MENTS s at the called 4 m U e OINT g u LO opriate to ght n / rk’. Reco i at is cat i i h a m DOC rt

pl m a . WAYP

ou LAT y be appr ( ch re

y r “St a u en m ent, I fo

T it em d e ‘b elton Jetty R

asur e PA

of th rec m ND ESSENTIAL e using,

) SITE o e C OR I t d ou ar itu ons ES AT THE SITE si FORMS A ’ T thods y e ovi m / Long ION e Pr along the length of Buss

T s MARK e m ark. 2) stead of taking just one ti n I OF ea and what (Latitud BENCH four t nchm EGISTRA ‘ ar OF REPLICA ) ple,

2 i R ity

ey . am be o N v 2 h . ng N OF 7 O ri PAGE

o wayp ( t r eac

and clar e ni fo o tur s l a and i m LOCATIO n a per re tio DESCRIPTI u det the size of sur em t t n than one site. For ex u

e ( f re r scrip o e o m d f . . e quality e t

2 3 4 1 si th onitor NO REP *Depending o m water replicates.

exact fill in e l ur yo g e tab n h i plicate at the site, provid at N mmunity Monitoring Manual oc n of t

-l re o t l a i ed sectio re than one ad o sh

Marine Co m

s e essent h s t s i ere i In Page 16 k/ h r a

P IF t . m h e site. MA th site. f ’ benc o SITE REGISTRATION FORM

D OVIDED (I) ur R o P MU

‘ y pact X cation of O im e lo on i or SITE ) th pt i THE B (C descr

draw in d SITE IN ontrol o p a E go H

a ’ m 3 is a c d : e r OF T P /05/0 mbe site ‘mu A MA e ted 12 her the sit Reme a d p On th DRAW

whet site. Marine Community Monitoring Manual

7 3. REGISTRATION FORMS AND ESSENTIAL DOCUMENTS. (Refer to Section 5.2 for an example)

FRAMEWORK FOR YOUR MONITORING PROGRAM (6 QUESTIONS) The potential problem or monitoring interest:

QUESTIONS ANSWERS / ACTIONS

1. Why do you want to monitor Answer: the marine environment?.

2. What do you want to Answer: monitor?

Actions: List methods from the manual you will use:

3. What information are you Answer (based on the methods selected in Question 2): going to collect and how much time do you want to spend 1) collecting it ? 2)

Time allocated to monitoring: list dates annually and anticipated duration of your

1) 3)

2) 4)

Anticipated duration: years

4. Who will analyse and use the Answer: information we collect?

Examine Question 1 to 4 logically and ask (If you do not answer yes to these, revise your actions to ensure you address the potential problem)

5. Will the information we collect and the Answer: frequency with which we collect it, address the potential problem?

6. Will the data we collect be in a form that Answer: management can interpret and understand?

Updated 12/05/03 Page 17 PART I “Starting up”

Marine Community Monitoring Manual

Updated 12/05/03 Page 18 PART I “Starting up”

PART II (B) DATA AND INFORMATION SHEETS

1.0 BEACHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 DATA SHEET: BEACH WIDTH PAGE 1 1.1 INFORMATION SHEET: BEACH WIDTH PAGE 2 1.2 DATA SHEET: BEACH STRUCTURE (PHOTOGRAPHIC) PAGE 3 1.2 INFORMATION SHEET: BEACH STRUCTURE PAGE 4 AND 5 1.3 DATA SHEET: BEACH PROFILE (DEBENHAM LEVEL) PAGE 6 TO 8

Page i ) O B : A 4 24 hour clock

(metres) A Optional ( Optional to monitor four replicate four monitor to BW (m) / Part II (B): 1.1 Beach width Beach 1.1 (B): II Part MONITORING DATE Site registration form Site registration 1 2 3 4 / (*) OBSERVERS NAME DATEDD / MM / YY TIME REP No. ) O B : A h occasion there are provisions are provisions occasion there h 3 24 hour clock

you must monitor exactly the same section of beach each of beach section the same exactly monitor you must (metres) A - Optional ( Optional . Refer to Information sheet 1.1 for details on the BW measurement BW details on the for 1.1 sheet Information . Refer to BW (m) / IMPORTANT

MONITORING DATE 1 2 3 4 ust be registered with the MCMP. from from MCMP. with the registered ust be / (*) BEACH WIDTH GROUP REGISTRATION NUMBER SITE REGISTRATION NUMBER OBSERVERS NAME DATEDD / MM / YY TIME REP No. Site registration form Site registration m Page 1 ) O 1.1 - B along the same beach). same along the : A 2 metres 24 hour clock

(metres) A Optional ( Optional (eg. seasonally – every 3 months for one year). On eac for one year). 3 months – every (eg. seasonally A

Marine Community Monitoring Program BW (m) / ATA SHEET D MONITORING DATE 1 2 3 4 / (*) OBSERVERS NAME DATEDD / MM / YY TIME REP No. ) O B : (A and B measurements). and (A A O 1 24 hour clock

(metres) A Optional ( Optional BW (m) / MONITORING DATE 1 2 3 4 / (*) sections (REP) of the beach* (eg. you may measure beach width every 50 50 every width beach measure may you (eg. beach* the of (REP) sections The datasheet has been designed to allow for four monitoring dates dates monitoring four for allow to designed been has datasheet The GROUP NAMEOBSERVERS NAME SITE NAME DATEDD / MM / YY TIME Updated 14/04/03 time. To re-monitor the site, refer to the description of each benchmark as described on your your on described as benchmark each of description the to refer site, the To re-monitor time. andOptional the observations REP No. BEACH Beach width Beach from measured the middle of zone the swash int to which water recedes int to which water Part II (B): 1.1 Beach width Beach 1.1 (B): II Part Lowest level wave that (water) recedes SWASH ZONE SWASH ZONE SWASH Highest level that (water) the wave & reaches line wrack Beach IDENTIFYING THE MIDDLE OF SEA Beach width is measured to the middle of the swash of the middle to the width is measured Beach of section is the zone swash The tide. low during zone of limit lower over. The wash waves that beach the po the zone is the swash upper ofThe limit wave. the swasha zone is the after beach. wash up the The waves that point highest zone centre of swash lies half way between the these points.Thetwo centre shoulddetermined after be of couple for a on beach the waves the watching the to (Refer an average estimating and minutes below). diagram CAR PARK A. DUNES Tree (upper benchmark) BEACH WIDTH car parks,car rocky outcrop, 1.1 - e beach (eg. dunes). The e beach (eg. BEACH B. Page 2 Rock outcrop (upper benchmark) SELECTING A BENCH MARK Beach wrack line wrack Beach line) (seaweed SEA

Marine Community Monitoring Program upper established, an beach site is first the When should benchmark The selected. be should benchmark th from inland located be identifiable readily a be should benchmark object/structurewill not that change in position over well- include may benchmarks Suitable time. established trees, corners of below for examples) diagram the to etc. (Refer Sand Dune etation g NFORMATION SHEET Ve I ). metres Rocky outcrop: Rocky Benchmark ure beach width starting width ure beach BEACH DUNES Beach Width Measurement ). Middle of at swash zone low tide. metres The distance from the upper benchmark to the to benchmark upper the from distance The HOW TO MEASURE BEACH WIDTH The distance from the upper benchmark to the to benchmark upper the from distance The Swash Zone SEA avigation Swash Zone REQUIRED OBSERVATION between (BW) are made measurements width Beach zone swash the of middle the and benchmark upper an (at low tide). Always meas below) diagram the to (Refer benchmark. the from OPTIONAL OBSERVATIONS A = B = Updated 14/04/03 transition between the beachdune( and beach wrack line ( line beach wrack Marker Permanent N *

º º

looking along the along looking ( ) )

looking inland from the inland from looking (

beach ompass bearing) ompass C (compass bearing) (compass (

) (cm) (cm) CM CM PHOTOGRAPH THREE PHOTOGRAPH THREE

PHOTOGRAPH TWO PHOTOGRAPH TWO middle of the swash zone CAMERA DIRECTION bearing the of reciprocal be the should bearing * This 1 photograph for CAMERA HEIGHT CAMERA DIRECTION CAMERA HEIGHT Part II (B): 1.2 Beach structure (Photographic method) (Photographic structure 1.2 Beach (B): Part II PHOTOGRAPHIC METHOD ( º . Page 3

(looking seawards from (looking ) (compass bearing) (compass TYPE AND LENS USED cm - ( CM CAMERA DETAILS * BEACH STRUCTURE STRUCTURE BEACH

Marine Community Monitoring Program BEACH NAME * Official or descriptive name CAMERA DETAILS PHOTOGRAPH ONE the benchmark) DESCRIPTION OF THE BENCHMARK CAMERA DIRECTION CAMERA HEIGHT 1.2 - for : ATA SHEET 24 hour clock hour 24 D * * SITE DETAILS / CONTACT DETAILS Marine Monitoring Community Manual / details on the method, safety and being and safety method, the on details friendly. environmentally PLEASE READ THIS SECTION BEFORE READ THIS SECTION PLEASE COMPLETING THE DATA SHEET. datasheet that every a site is monitored. thein time Fill the Refer to DATEDD / MM / YY IDENTIFICATION NUMBER TIME Only* complete if you are registered with the MCMP GROUP NAME NUMBER SITE REGISTRATION form registration Site * from Updated 14/04/04 Camera level Camera tripodCamera Camera pointed in pointed Camera beach of the direction bearing) (Compass . ) BENCHMARK Benchmark: Rock out crop out Rock Benchmark: AMERA ON TRIPOD LOCATED AMERA ON TRIPOD LOCATED ON TOP A OF C Standard Camera Height Part II (B): 1.2 Beach structure (Photographic method) (Photographic structure 1.2 Beach (B): Part II PHOTOGRAPHIC METHOD ( CAR PARK DUNES Rock outcrop car parks,car rocky outcrop, Corner of Car Park from the beach (eg. sand beach (eg. the from Page 4 looking seaward from the seaward from looking ( Established tree BEACH STRUCTURE BEACH STRUCTURE BEACH SELECTING BENCHMARKS SELECTING

) 1.2 - Swash Zone SEA

Marine Community Monitoring Program PHOTOGRAPH ONE benchmark looking view a provide should photograph first The be should photograph The beach seaward. the across (as per Method 1.1 Beach a benchmark from taken This benchmark width measurement). structure – beach be should located inland readily be a should selected benchmark The dunes). identifiableobject will not that change in position over well- include may benchmarks Suitable time. established trees, corners of etc. . : etation Sand Dune g Ve Data Sheet Data Photograph 1 from rocky taken outcrop (benchmark). : e. re-locatable position, e. re-locatable

the beach should be beach should the NFORMATION SHEET

I Photograph 3 the from taken as same position Photograph 2 : PHOTOGRAPHING THE BEACH PHOTOGRAPHING HE OF THE THREE PHOTOGRAPHS HE POSITION T Photograph 2 the from taken middle of swash at low tide. zone Ocean avigation Swash Zone focal length, camera height, and camera direction) need and camera height, camera focal length, first on the documented carefully to be At each monitoring site At each monitoring photographed three from positions.The key to this be replicated can that photographs taking is method order In to achieve over time. this, the details of how each photograph was (i taken Updated 14/04/04 Taking standardphotographs the permits comparison of time. over photographs Marker Permanent N r THE ’ FRAME ‘ avigation Marke avigation N . Dune h c a e B OBJECTS TO / PHOTOGRAPH SING STRUCTURE U Sea Horizon USING STRUCTURES/OBJECTS TO ‘FRAME’ USING STRUCTURES/OBJECTS PHOTOGRAPHS structures/objects use to try photographs taking When shot.thegood This technique is a “frame” to for over photographs standardised are the that ensuring photograph a how shows figure The following time. in is marker navigation the ensuring by ‘framed’ was marker navigation The photograph. of the centre the photograph. scale for the a provides also Part II (B): 1.2 Beach structure (Photographic method) (Photographic structure 1.2 Beach (B): Part II ) BEACH Photograph the from taken the middle of swash zone LOOKING ALONG THE (

ograph includes the swash the ograph includes Page 5 Lowest level wave that (water) recedes Swash Zone Highest level wave the that reaches (water) PHOTOGRAPH THREE BEACH FROM THE MIDDLE OF THE SWASH ZONE OF THE SWASH THE FROM BEACH MIDDLE SEA

Marine Community Monitoring Program looking view a provide should photograph The third from be taken should photograph The beach. the along two). (as per Photograph zone swash the of middle the so inland, slightly be angled should The photograph of phot the that one edge beach. the covers photograph the of bulk the and zone, )

looking inland from the inland from looking ( DENTIFYING THE MIDDLE OF THE SWASH ZONE I DENTIFYING THE MIDDLE OF THE SWASH ZONE

PHOTOGRAPH TWO PHOTOGRAPH TWO middle of the swash zone Photographshouldtwoprovide a view looking across from be taken should photograph The inland. beach the per Method (as 1.1 Beach zone swash of the the middle width measurements). structure – beach I that waves beach section on the is the zone The swash the is zone swash the of part The lower over. wash upper The wave. a after recedes water which to point up washes wave a that point highest the is zone swash lies half way zone swash of the centre The beach. the be should centre The points. two these between for a beach on the waves the watching after determined average. an and estimating of minutes couple be should taken is photograph the which from site The to the compass Refer the benchmark. from seaward the taking When one. photograph of bearing photographs,waves, as you will for watchhave turn ocean. back on the your Updated 14/04/04 : B-T (cm) you must you - 24 hour clock 4 TIME

T (cm) IMPORTANT REPLICATE 3) OF B 1 (cm) PAGE ( Part II (B): 1.3 Beach profile (Debenham level) (Debenham profile 1.3 Beach (B): Part II ng the same beach). beach). ng the same B-T (cm) the first reading will be 30 metres, then 31 etc.) reading30will be metres, first the ibedon your Site registrationform. 3 DD / MM / YY T (cm) REPLICATE B (DEBENHAM LEVEL) (cm)

each profile every 50 metres alo 50 metres profile every each Page 6 B-T (cm) the description of each benchmark as descr benchmark of each the description 2 OBSERVERS NAME DATE T (cm) REPLICATE . beach (eg. you may measure the b the measure (eg. you may beach

Marine Community Monitoring Program B (cm) B-T (cm) = Height of water in tube.water in = Height of each time. To re-locate the site, refer to refer site, the To re-locate each time. 1 T GROUP REGISTRATION NO T (cm) REPLICATE DATA SHEET 1.3 - BEACH PROFILE . (*) B (cm) = Height of water bottle.in B Site registration form Site registration with the MCMP registered be must (metres) DISTANCE * Increments of 1 metre from the upper benchmark (eg. if it is 30 metres from the upper benchmark to the start of your transect transect your of start the to benchmark upper the from metres 30 is it if (eg. benchmark upper the from 1 metre of Increments FROM UPPER BENCHMARK monitor exactly the same section of beach beach section of same exactly the monitor SITE REGISTRATION NO SITE REGISTRATION from(*) There are provisions to monitor four sectionsof the REPLICATE LEGEND: * Updated 14/04/04 B-T (cm) 4 T (cm) REPLICATE 3) OF B 2 (cm) PAGE ( Part II (B): 1.2 Beach profile (Debenham level) (Debenham profile 1.2 Beach (B): Part II B-T (cm) 3 T (cm) REPLICATE B (DEBENHAM LEVEL) (cm)

B-T Page 7 (cm) 2 T (cm) REPLICATE

Marine Community Monitoring Program B (cm) B-T (cm) 1 T (cm) REPLICATE DATA SHEET 1.3 - BEACH PROFILE B (cm) (metres) * (metres) DISTANCE FROM UPPER BENCHMARK Updated 14/04/03 3) OF 3 PAGE ( Part II (B): 1.2 Beach profile (Debenham level) (Debenham profile 1.2 Beach (B): Part II (DEBENHAM LEVEL)

Page 8 Distance along the beach (metres) along the beach Distance

Marine Community Monitoring Program *Sand height (cm): relative to the benchmark. Your beach profile should look something like this. like something look should profile beach Your benchmark. the to relative (cm): height *Sand

DATA SHEET 1.3 - BEACH PROFILE k (cm)* height Sand Benchmar Updated 14/04/03 Marine Community Monitoring Manual

PART II (A): METHODS AND PART II (B): INFORMATION AND DATA SHEETS

PART II: TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 BEACHES 1.1 BEACH WIDTH 1.2 BEACH STRUCTURE (PHOTOGRAPHIC) 1.3 BEACH PROFILE (DEBENHAM LEVEL)

2.0 WATER QUALITY 2.1 WATER (TEMPERATURE AND CLARITY) 2.2 WATER (TEMPERATURE LOGGER)

3.0 MARINE HABITATS 3.1 MAPPING THE SEABED 3.2 MONITORING THE SEABED

4.0 CORAL HEALTH 4.1 BLEACHING AND CORAL PREDATORS 4.2 ANNUAL CORAL MASS SPAWNING 4.3 CORAL SPAWN SLICKS

5.0 SEAGRASS HEALTH 5.1 SEAGRASS PATCH REGENERATION 5.2 SEAGRASS MEADOW EDGE

6.0 MONITORING FISH 6.1 TEMPERATE FISH SPECIES

7.0 MANGROVE HEALTH 7.1 MANGROVE HEALTH

8.0 MARINE MAMMALS 8.1 MARINE MAMMAL SIGHTINGS

9.0 INTRODUCED MARINE PESTS 9.1 INTRODUCED MARINE PESTS

10.0 LITTER SURVEYS 10.1 LITTER SURVEYS

11.0 HUMAN USAGE 11.1 BOAT RAMP USAGE 11.2 RECREATIONAL BOATING SITES

Page i PART II (A) METHODS (PHYSICAL)

1.0 BEACHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 BEACH WIDTH PAGE 1 TO 3 1.2 BEACH STRUCTURE (PHOTOGRAPHIC) PAGE 4 TO 6 1.3 BEACH PROFILE (DEBENHAM LEVEL) PAGE 7 TO 9

Page ii Marine Community Monitoring Manual

1.1 BEACH WIDTH

METHOD RATING 1

OBJECTIVES To monitor beach width at sandy beaches along the Western Australia coast to identify trends in beach form and shoreline position.

By knowing if the shoreline is retreating or BACKGROUND advancing, decisions can be made on appropriate Almost half of Western Australia's 12,500 positioning of development near the shore. kilometres of coastline is made up of sandy beaches. Information is also needed on dune growth and Beaches are an important part of our natural and development, or the likely level of erosion following cultural surroundings, with 80 per cent of a storm to avoid incidents such as car parks Australians living close to the coast. As our overwhelmed with sand. population increases, greater levels of coastal development will affect the way beach systems An effective way to identify trends in shoreline function, changing beach form and shoreline movement is by monitoring beach width. Because position. This can have a detrimental effect on the of the seasonal change in beach width, monthly environment and coastal communities, affecting measurements should be made. At least 10 years of habitats such as turtle nesting sites as well as coastal data (120 measurements) are needed to identify the development and usage. range of seasonal extremes and long term trends. This gives an indication of how far the shoreline Beaches are naturally highly variable, shaped by the moves between seasons, and what allowance needs actions of tides, waves and storm surges. One beach to be made for unusual events such as cyclones. can change dramatically between seasons, during a storm, or over the course of several years. Over longer periods, beaches are affected by changes in LINKS TO OTHER climate, such as El Nino or global warming and by fluctuations in sea level. METHODS/PROGRAMS • METHOD 1.2 BEACH STRUCTURE (PHOTOGRAPHIC Beaches can be classified according to influencing METHOD); AND factors such as tides, waves or storm surges. When • METHOD 1.3 BEACH PROFILES (DEBENHAM LEVEL). beaches are relatively exposed to open ocean waves, as occurs on the southern coast, waves become the dominant force that influences their shape. If the SUMMARY OF METHODOLOGY beach is subject to a broad tidal range, for example, Measure the beach width from a permanent re- Cable Beach at Broome, the tide becomes the locatable feature (survey benchmark) landward of dominant factor. If a large tidal range or strong the beach to the middle of the swash zone. waves do not affect a beach, storm surges are likely to be crucial in its development. This can be seen in Geographe Bay and Shark Bay. EQUIPMENT

NECESSARY RELEVANCE TO MANAGEMENT • tape measure (50 m or 100m in length) (Refer to Beaches need to be carefully managed to ensure that Part III section 3.2); natural communities and human activities dependent • Site registration form; on beaches are protected. This can only be done • Data sheet 1.1; effectively when the natural trends in shoreline • Information sheet 1.1; movement and beach form are known, as well as the • set of five nautical mile grid sheets for WA possible effects of severe storms and human (Refer to Part VI); and structures, such as marinas and groynes. • compass.

Updated 12/05/03 Page 1 Part II(A): 1.1 Beach Width Marine Community Monitoring Manual

width is measured. Use this compass bearing on OPTIONAL subsequent monitoring; • GPS unit (Most effective means of determining • when the swash zone has been reached, site position) (refer to Part III section 2.0). determine the middle of the swash zone; • pull the tape measure tight and record the distance (in metres to the nearest centimetre) to SITE SELECTION middle of the swash zone on Data sheet 1.1; and Beach width can be monitored at any sandy beach • INFORMATION SHEET 1.1. along the Western Australian coast. When selecting sites try to choose sandy beaches that: PTIONAL METHODS • have recently been impacted; O • are currently being impacted; and The following measurements can be made from the • could potentially be impacted. benchmark to: Impacts include both natural events such as cyclones • the transition point between the dune and the and human impacts such as breakwaters. beach; and • beach rack lines. SITE DESCRIPTION HEN TO MONITOR Once a site is established the Site registration form W (PART I: ‘Starting Up’) needs to be completed and Try to measure beach width once a month to detect submitted to CALM to obtain a Site registration possible seasonal trends. Whenever possible, number. This only needs to be done once. This measurements should be taken during: should be recorded, along with the beach name on • the morning; all the Data sheets for the site. • fine sunny weather; and • low tide. The following details should be recorded on the Site Under these conditions, the position of swash zone registration form: will be standardised. During winter months these • five nautical mile grid reference; conditions may not occur, however it is still • name of the beach; worthwhile measuring beach width. • site position in latitude and longitude (degrees, minutes and decimals of a minute); and Additional measurements can be taken if the beach • ‘mud’ map indicating the site location, is subjected to events such as storms. In these cases, benchmark description, location and waypoint. it is a good idea to increase the frequency of monitoring to detect potential changes in the more dynamic beach. For example, monitor once a week HOW TO MONITOR for a couple of months.

ESTABLISHING A MONITORING SITE The following should be carried out when the beach DATA COLLECTION AND DATA is visited/monitored for the first time: • select a permanent re-locatable feature MANAGEMENT (benchmark) landward of the beach (in the The data collected should be entered on Data sheet dunes). Examples of suitable features include a 1.1. The Data sheet provides a table to enable; a) well established tree, corner of a car park or a beach width to be monitored at four locations along rocky outcrop; and the length of the beach and b) to monitor these • describe the benchmark on Data sheet 1.1 and locations four times during the year (seasonal). Data indicate its position on the ‘mud’ map on the submitted to CALM, will be entered in the Marine Site registration form. Community Monitoring Database, to enable changes in beach width to be monitored over time. MEASURING BEACH WIDTH The following should be carried out: • re-locate the benchmark by referring to the ADDITIONAL NOTES original Data sheet 1.1 and the Site registration Please read the following and refer to the relevant form; sections: • anchor the free end of the tape measure to the • when working at the beach always be aware of benchmark; your surrounding, watch for waves, and sharp • walk directly to the swash zone, unwinding the objects. Never work alone; and tape measure along the way. Record a compass • PART IV SECTION 2.: SAFETY ISSUES bearing on Data sheet 1.1 the first time beach

Updated 12/05/03 Page 2 Part II(A): 1.1 Beach Width Marine Community Monitoring Manual

• beaches and dunes are a sensitive environment susceptible to erosion caused by human movements. Where possible remain on paths. • PART IV SECTION 3.0: BE ENVIRONMENTALLY SENITIVE WHEN MONITORING.

Updated 12/05/03 Page 3 Part II(A): 1.1 Beach Width Marine Community Monitoring Manual

1.2 BEACH STRUCTURE (PHOTOGRAPHIC METHOD)

METHOD RATING 1 1

OBJECTIVE To monitor beach width at sandy beaches along the Western Australia coast to identify trends in beach form and shoreline position.

well as the possible effects of severe storms and human structures, such as marinas and groynes. BACKGROUND Almost half of Western Australia's 12,500 By knowing if the shoreline is retreating or kilometres of coastline is made up of sandy advancing, decisions can be made on appropriate beaches. Beaches are an important part of our positioning of any construction or development natural and cultural surroundings, with 80 per cent near the shore. Information also needs to be of Australians living close to the coast. As our gathered about dune growth and development, or population increases, greater levels of coastal the likely level of erosion following a storm to development will affect the way beach systems avoid incidents such as car parks overwhelmed with function, changing beach form and shoreline sand. position. This can have a detrimental effect on the environment and coastal communities, affecting An effective way to identify trends in shoreline habitats such as turtle nesting sites as well as structure is by photographing the beach. Because of coastal development and usage. the seasonal change in beach width, photographs should be taken at least monthly. At least 10 years Beaches are naturally highly variable, with the of data (120 photographs) are needed to identify the shape of the beach depending on the tide, waves range of seasonal extremes and long term trends. and storm surge acting on it. One beach can change This gives the coastal managers an indication of dramatically between seasons, during a storm, or how beach structure changes between seasons, and over the course of several years. Over longer what allowance needs to be made for unusual periods, beaches are affected by changes in climate, events such as cyclones. Coastal managers can then such as El Nino or global warming and by assess the likely extent of changes in the future. fluctuations in sea level.

Beaches can be classified according to influencing LINKS TO OTHER factors such as tides, waves or irregular surge events related to storms. When beaches are METHODS/PROGRAMS relatively exposed to open ocean waves, as occurs This method is linked to: on the southern coast, waves become the dominant • METHOD 1.1 BEACH WIDTH (MEASUREMENTS) force influencing their shape. If the beach is METHOD 1.3 BEACH PROFILE (DEBENHAM LEVEL). subject to a broad tidal range, for example, Cable Beach at Broome, the tide becomes the dominant factor. If a large tidal range or strong waves do not SUMMARY OF METHODOLOGY affect a beach, storm surges are likely to be crucial Take three photographs of the beach from in its development. This can be seen in Geographe relocatable positions once a month: Bay and Shark Bay. • photograph one is taken from a permanent re- locatable feature (survey bench mark) landward of the beach looking seawards across RELEVANCE TO MANAGEMENT the beach; Beaches need to be carefully managed to ensure • photograph two is taken from the middle of the that natural communities and human activities swash zone looking landwards across the dependent on beaches are protected. This can only beach; and be done effectively when the natural trends in • photograph three is taken from the middle of shoreline movement and beach form are known, as the swash zone looking along the beach.

Updated 12/05/03 Page 4 Part II(A): 1.2 Beach Structure (Photographic) Marine Community Monitoring Manual

• describe the benchmark on Data sheet 1.2 and EQUIPMENT indicate its position on a ‘mud’ map on the Site NECESSARY Registration Form. • camera; • Site registration form; TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS • Data sheet 1.2; When the site is first photographed record on Data • Information sheet 1.2; sheet 1.2 details of how the photograph was taken including: • set of five nautical mile grid sheets for WA (refer to Part III section 4.0); and • camera direction (compass bearing); • compass. • camera height (metres); and • list/describe any features used to frame the photograph. OPTIONAL During subsequent monitoring refer back to the • GPS unit (Most effective means of determining original Data sheet 1.2 and replicate the camera site position) (refer to Part III section 2.0); and position. • camera tripod.

PHOTOGRAPH ONE SITE SELECTION • relocate the benchmark from which photograph one will be taken by referring to the original Beach structure can be documented at any sandy Data sheet 1.2 and the Site registration form; beach along the Western Australian coast. When • position the camera by referring to the selecting sites try to select sandy beaches that: descriptions recorded on the initial Data sheet • have recently been impacted; which include: • are currently being impacted; and • camera direction (compass bearing); • could be potentially impacted. • camera height (metres); and Impacts include both natural events such as storms • features used to frame the photograph; and human impacts such as breakwaters. • take a photograph.

SITE DESCRIPTION PHOTOGRAPH TWO • go down to the swash zone directly seawards Once a site is established the Site registration form of the benchmark for photograph one. Record a (Part I: ‘Starting up’) needs to be completed and compass bearing on Data sheet 1.2 the first submitted to CALM to obtain a Site registration time beach width is measured. Use this number. This only needs to be done once. This compass bearing on subsequent monitoring; should be recorded along with the beach name on all Data sheets for the site. • identify the middle of the swash zone; • position the camera by referring to the The following details should be recorded on the descriptions recorded on the initial Data sheet Site registration form: 1.2 which include: • five nautical mile grid reference number; • camera direction (compass bearing); • name of the beach; • camera height (metres); and • site position in latitude and longitude (degrees, • features used to frame the photograph. minutes and decimals of a minute); and • take a photograph. • ‘mud’ map indicating the site location and benchmark location. PHOTOGRAPH THREE • remain in the same position as photograph two (middle of the swash zone); HOW TO MONITOR • position the camera by referring to the descriptions recorded on the initial Data sheet ESTABLISHING A MONITORING SITE 1.2 which include: The following steps should be carried out when a beach is visited/monitored for the first time: • camera direction (compass bearing); • select a permanent re-locatable feature • camera height (metres); (benchmark) landward of the beach. • features used to frame the photograph. Photograph one will be taken from this point. • take a photograph; and The beach/ocean should be able to be viewed • INFORMATION SHEET 1.2. from this point. Suitable benchmarks could include a well-established tree, corner of a car park or a rocky outcrop; and

Updated 12/05/03 Page 5 Part II(A): 1.2 Beach Structure (Photographic) Marine Community Monitoring Manual

WHEN TO MONITOR Try to photograph the beach once a month to detect possible seasonal trends. Whenever possible photographs should be taken during: • the morning; • fine sunny weather; and • low tide.

Under these conditions, the position of swash zone will be standardised. During winter months these conditions may not occur, however it is still worthwhile measuring beach width.

Additional photographs can be taken if the beach is subjected to events such as storms. In these cases, it is a good idea to increase the frequency of monitoring to detect and document potential changes in the more dynamic beach. For example photograph once a week for a couple of months.

DATA COLLECTION AND DATA MANAGEMENT The data collected should be entered on Data sheet 1.2. Data submitted to CALM will be entered in the Marine Community Monitoring Database. Currently there are no mechanisms for the storage of photographic images. In the future, mechanisms will be developed that will permit images to be stored and viewed on the MCMP homepage.

While these mechanisms are being developed, groups are also encouraged to store their own photographs and monitor for changes in beach structure over time.

ADDITIONAL NOTES Please read the following and refer to the relevant sections: • when working at the beach always be aware of your surrounding, watch for waves, and sharp objects. Never work alone; • PART IV SECTION 2: SAFETY ISSUES; • beaches and dunes are a sensitive environment susceptible to erosion caused by human movements. Where possible remain on paths; and • PART IV SECTION 3.0: BE ENVIRONMENTALLY SENITIVE WHEN MONITORING.

Updated 12/05/03 Page 6 Part II(A): 1.2 Beach Structure (Photographic) Marine Community Monitoring Manual

1.3 BEACH PROFILES (DEBENHAM LEVEL)

METHOD RATING 1 1 1

OBJECTIVES To determine the length and profile of the shoreline from the middle of the swash zone (preferably at low tide) to an upper benchmark, using a Debenham Level.

By knowing if the shoreline is retreating or BACKGROUND advancing, decisions can be made on appropriate Almost half of Western Australia's 12,500 positioning of any coastal construction or kilometres of coastline is made up of sandy development. Information also needs to be gathered beaches. Beaches are an important part of our about dune growth and development, or the likely natural and cultural surroundings, with 80 per cent level of erosion following a storm to avoid of Australians living close to the coast. As our incidents such as car parks overwhelmed with sand. population increases, greater levels of coastal development will affect the way beach systems Long-term monitoring of the shoreline provides function, changing beach form and shoreline information on natural beach processes, including position. This can have a detrimental effect on the the erosion and deposition of sand. This data is environment and coastal communities, affecting applicable to management for various reasons, habitats such as turtle nesting sites as well as including: coastal development and usage. • To determine seasonal changes in beach Beaches are naturally highly variable, shaped by the profiles for human usage and safety, coastal actions of tides, waves and storm surges. One planning and dune conservation. beach can change dramatically between seasons, • Local perspective: to monitor the effects of during a storm, or over the course of several years. coastal developments on sand movement. For Over longer periods, beaches are affected by example the influence of groynes and spits on changes in climate, such as El Nino events or global localised beach processes; and warming and by fluctuations in sea level. • The big picture: to monitor ‘where the sand goes’. Longshore drift moves sand up and Beaches can be classified according to influencing down along the coast, by monitoring beach factors such as tides, waves or storm surges. When profiles all along the coast, we can detect beaches are relatively exposed to open ocean where sand has been eroded or deposited. waves, as occurs on the southern coast, waves become the dominant force that influences their shape. If the beach is subject to a broad tidal range, LINKS TO OTHER METHOD/S for example, Cable Beach at Broome, the tide becomes the dominant factor. If a large tidal range & PROGRAM/S or strong waves do not affect a beach, storm surges This method complements the previous 2 methods, are likely to be crucial in its development. This can to monitor beaches. be seen in Geographe Bay and Shark Bay. • BEACH WIDTH; AND • BEACH STRUCTURE. RELEVANCE TO MANAGEMENT Beaches need to be carefully managed to ensure SUMMARY OF METHODOLOGY that ecological communities and human activities, A Debenham level can be used to determine the dependent on beaches, are protected. This can only shape or profile of a beach, from a permanent be done effectively when the natural trends in relocatable feature (survey Benchmark) to the shoreline movement and beach form are known, as swash zone. The methodology also provides information on the width of the beach. well as the possible effects of severe storms and human structures, such as marinas and groynes.

Updated 12/05/03 Page 7 Part II(A): 1.3 Beach Profile (Debenham level) Marine Community Monitoring Manual

EQUIPMENT HOW TO MONITOR

NECESSARY ESTABLISHING A MONITORING SITE • A Debenham level (Refer to Part III section The following steps should be carried out when a 3.11 – How to make a Debenham Level); beach is visited/ monitored for the first time: • Site registration form; • Select a permanent re-locatable feature • Data sheet 1.3; (Benchmark) landward of the beach, that will • Information sheet 1.3; and not be influenced by sand movement. This is • set of five nautical mile grid sheets for WA important as all measurements are calibrated (Refer to Part VI). from this point. The Benchmark is the starting point for your transect, every time you monitor the site. Suitable benchmarks could include a OPTIONAL well-established tree, corner of a car park or • GPS unit (Refer to Part III section 2.2). rocky outcrop. If sand movement will influence your benchmark, it is beneficial to mark (with a SITE DESCRIPTION line) the starting level on the pole - from which the first measurement will be taken. Indicate Once a site is established the Site registration form the presence of such a mark on the mud map; (Part I: ‘Starting Up’) needs to be completed and • Describe the benchmark on Data sheet 1.3 and submitted to CALM to obtain a Site registration indicate its position on a ‘mud’ map on the Site number. This should be recorded on all Data sheets registration form; and for that site. • If you are doing more than one transect, position them evenly to cover the area you The following details will need to be recorded on wish to monitor along the coast and record the Site registration form: each benchmark individually on the Site Registration form. • five nautical mile grid reference number (Refer to Part VI); SETTING UP THE DEBENHAM LEVEL • site name; Fill the plastic bottle, to 3/4 full, with coloured • site position in latitude and longitude (degrees, water (add food colouring). Place the loose end of minutes and decimals of a minute); and the clear tubing (T2) into the plastic bottle and hold • ‘mud’ map indicating the location of this here for the entire transect. From the rod end of measurements and the extent of any impacts. the clear tubing, draw water from the bottle through the tube, until it is visible half way up the rod (like SITE SELECTION a straw, using your mouth). Beach profiles can be monitored at any beaches • It is important there are no air bubbles in the along the Western Australian coast. When selecting plastic tubing, if there are you will have to sites try to choose sandy beaches that: repeat this procedure. • To ensure no water is lost through the top of • have a history of being impacted, with the tubing, place your thumb over the top noticeable erosion or deposition events. between recordings. • could potentially be impacted in the future. • compliment existing Marine Community LAYING THE TRANSECT Monitoring Programs. For example, Trigg Relocate your benchmark. Starting from the Island Surf Club are currently monitoring benchmark, run the tape measure straight down the about 1.7 km’s of coast South of Trigg Point beach to the waters edge. Watch the waves for a towards Observation City. They have couple of minutes and place the end of the tape established numerous transects along the measure in the middle of the swash zone (Refer to beach, which they monitor on a regular basis. Information Sheet 1.1 – Beach width The club utilises the data to assess safe entry measurements). Record the length of the transect on and exit points for club members, with regard the Data sheet. This represents the width of the to sand movement and potential rips. Also, to beach. monitor low relief reef, which becomes exposed as large amounts of sand are moved further off shore, a potential hazard to beach users.

Updated 12/05/03 Page 8 Part II(A): 1.3 Beach Profile (Debenham level) Marine Community Monitoring Manual

Solution 2: Drop the tape measure over the top and USING THE DEBENHAM LEVEL record the height change directly from the tape You are now ready to start monitoring using the measure. If there is a 2 m drop, then note this on the Debenham Level. You will need three people to do data sheet and allow for the drop when plotting one beach profile. One person to hold the plastic your profile. bottle, one to hold the rod and read off the markings on the side of the plastic bottle and clear tubing. A PLOTTING THE BEACH PROFILE third person is required to fill in the data sheet. Plot the sand height (cm) on the vertical axis and the distance along the beach (metres) on the • Data will be recorded every metre along the horizontal axis. length of your Beach Profile. • Your thumb should be on the end of the tubing to prevent water loss. WHEN TO MONITOR • Place the plastic bottle at the start of your As a minimum, try to monitor once every three transect (Benchmark). Place the rod at the 1m months, at the start of each season. Also, where mark of the tape measure. possible, monitor after a big storm event. • Lift your thumb and allow the water in the tube to settle and record the level of the water in the tube, reading along the graduations. Mark this DATA COLLECTION AND number in the tube column. • Reading from the graduations on the side of the MANAGEMENT plastic bottle record the level of the water in The data collected should be entered on Data sheet the bottle. Mark this number in the bottle 1.3. Data submitted to CALM will be entered in the column (NOTE: this should remain constant Marine Community Monitoring Database. throughout the entire Beach Profile). Currently there are no mechanisms for the analysis • Place your thumb back over the top of the tube. of beach profile data. In the future, mechanisms Move the bottle to the 1m mark and the rod to will be developed that will permit: the 2m mark of the tape measure and repeat • Data entry and analysis in the form of a plot this procedure, recording the height of the showing the change in sand height every metre water in the bottle and in the tube. across your beach profile; and • Continue to the end of your transect, and • Access to data for comparison with previous record the final length of the transect (Beach monitoring dates, adjacent transects and other Width) on the data sheet. sites around the State. • To evaluate the change in height between each successive measurement, subtract the value in While these mechanisms are being developed, the tube column from the value in the bottle groups are also encouraged to store their own data column. Refer to the Information Sheet and to monitor changes in the beach profile over provided to further assist with evaluating and time. plotting your data. ADDITIONAL NOTES TROUBLE SHOOTING Problem 1: The Debenham level is designed to Please read the following and refer to the relevant operate effectively down an incline. If you have to sections: record up-hill (ie. over a small dune), you will find • when working at the beach always be aware of that the water in the tube runs back towards the your surrounding, watch for waves, and sharp bottle, preventing a reading from the graduations on objects. Never work alone; the tube. • PART IV SECTION 2: SAFETY ISSUES; Solution 1: For up-hill readings turn the Debenham • beaches and dunes are a sensitive environment level around, so that the rod is first and the bottle susceptible to erosion caused by human second, along your transect. Note this on the data movements. Where possible remain on paths; sheet, to ensure the recording is positive (up-hill) and and not negative (down-hill) when plotted. • PART IV SECTION 3.0: BE ENVIRONMENTALLY SENITIVE WHEN MONITORING. Problem 2: There is a sudden steep incline (common with Winter beach profiles), which the 1 m length of tubing cannot accommodate - preventing a reading.

Updated 12/05/03 Page 9 Part II(A): 1.3 Beach Profile (Debenham level) Marine Community Monitoring Program

PART II (B) DATA AND INFORMATION SHEETS

2.0 WATER QUALITY

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.1 DATA SHEET: WATER (TEMPERATURE AND CLARITY) PAGE 1 AND 2 2.1 INFORMATION SHEET: WATER (TEMPERATURE AND CLARITY) PAGE 3 2.2 DATA SHEET: WATER (TEMPERATURE LOGGER) PAGE 4 2.2 INFORMATION SHEET: WATER (TEMPERATURE LOGGER) PAGE 5

Page i

)

y t

cate

D C) ari ock

° pli ( TEMP A :

d cl 4 the S TIME an n

four re

location each D re H e S u

24 hour cl

DATE

G rat sam

onitor details o

DEPT

p r D 2) ME

fo em to m 1 (t

NA OF YY r 1 2. ents.

actly the NITORIN e SECCHI / ons t RS / D x 1

a E M

MO V

/ M 1 W E . ) provisi S

easure 2. PAGE 1 2 3 4 B ( onitor e (* NO REP ): O DATE DD /

ation sheet m are

m st (B r u fo II there n erature m I u m p n ) o o o Part

– y

ITY

C) T ock R

° Refer t and tem ( TEMP A :

AN 3 T TIME

D D CLA H S

24 hour cl PO

DATE

G r). On each occasi

IM .

DEPT

rm yea D rm ME

pe). fo n fo

NA YY 1 on r one

tio NITORIN SECCHI i / er pi RS / t D

NS fo

a E at r M

MO O V stra w st ERATURE AN i

/ M P E . ) S

onths orm 2 3 4 1 regi B

(* NO REP FICATION NUMBER e

O DATE DD /

t ite reg 3 m TEM S a st

( Si e r om u ery r th o v Page 1 f m y P IDENTI n U

o O fro ED OBSERVATI

) R R

C) G (* ock bed

° ALITY ( TEMP A mmunity Monitoring Manual :

U 2

TIME descri REQUI

D H variable distance S

24 hour cl (eg. seasonally – e

DATE A ark as

e DEPT

Marine Co D ME

dat cations at benc

NA ng o

YY l 1 WATER Q

NITORIN ri SECCHI / RS / ch D 4

t E r M

MO V o

R oni

/ M of ea E .

) S

n oni 1 2 3 4 B o (* NO REP i ur m O DATE DD /

o pt 2.1 – ri r f ght i sc fo e m

w u d SITE NAME o e o

l h

y t

o o

C) t ock

° (eg ( e TEMP fer t : ed A t e n 1 r g ,

TIME e si e

t h

D t H desi S

24 hour cl e si ATA SHEET DATE

h ) at G

t *

r .

D been

DEPT

o o t 3 D ME N

has

oni E EP

NA /04/0 YY -m 1

NITORIN SECCHI / RS / D (R

sheet 14

E a NAM M MO

V ted ons

R i

dat / M . To re E . e ) OUP S

2 3 4 1 cat pda B m (* NO o i REP l The GR O DATE DD / U t

) y t

ari )

(% d cl COVER CLOUD an re u

H rat G e p

em ROU . V (t r e

t a 2)

H 1 W G OF

2. 2 ): ROU (B

II ate box)

PAGE ( Part

appropri MODERATE ) SEACONDITIONS

(please tick

ARITY GHT I L CL D

NS E AN O

R CALM

E Page 2

GAL AL OBSERVATI TEMPERATU ( N O mmunity Monitoring Manual

G OPTI

STRON

WATER ate box) Marine Co

ITIONS D N

O appropri 2.1 – MODERATE WIND C

(please tick

GHT I L

ATA SHEET

D CALM

O EP 4 4 4 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

N R 3

G /04/0

14 .

1 2 3 4 ted NO DATE pda MONITORIN U

) y t ari .

d cl D MPLE an A re u

rat

TER S SULATE e A p em A W TURE AN IN S A (t r N

e t a NTAI DING IN

O 1 W ) A THERMOMETER 2. H C ): TER TEMPER IC R STAN A H (B W W ARITY USING II G L NER Part

THERMOMETE CONTAI MEASURIN

URE AND C

ERAT for

MP E T (

R vey manual

– Sur S WATE ) Page 3 AIM . (

. K

mmunity Monitoring Manual D CORD HI DIS 2.1- AN CC l marine resources I DISK a

Marine Co

USING A SE A SECCH tropic

r e e n at o h d by i

h a ; ) t t d 1 wait r rectly g or the ing i record D m o n

d e ined ch rn ri o h ( e c e record su h t then an

pt , t m n d i by surface rren e de d e o NOT b h m following: ifting d r the surface t rtical lin l e

rd; e d u ears and h r r to o NFORMATION SHEET te; and o is a cu o nd e scal i rate; h I r a e c e a v from at is d p the water, en h d

n ere g t o n st app ts sho gs; s rec y to odera i n n n i e bo en ng i ear d e m If th are affecte p e sk sk ha em SECCHI DISK USE ; h rs usi i r be see A SECCHI DISK rea e if th er. til it ju ngs t

t pth carry out t sap r d o n n sk ; i e abov oon e scale on t a di u s exceed m w

di pth (SD) reading is determ easu m h sk e o i

serv c i k ercast. e t 3 n b s d d d sk th h i o m i tid e

cchi de d ng aftern e h h h readi 2) USING g t an e secch e di e d e t eabe n /04/0 i h i e rd n is low in (D y is ov ept t g str

d dept ; h n NOTES ON 14 ns and til slack nd low th wer th e sk e co e su i e n ted : easure se h itio lo t b u boat whe meters using t raise th dept retriev the secchi de avera if the s SD> th after m w sea conditions th n nd pda To m • • • • • • Secchi co whe • • • • U er g g o l

ure (Tick the

LE at D NO FI mper RDE O ? DATA 2 Te ED R 2. O ):

LY REC ? OF THE G (B UL

II ON FILE ST ESSF

E NAME WR C Part YES THE

IS TH ) S E WENT TA SUC R A E box e l E D WH b WHAT I WHAT H , a , c i O

pl ap WAS T IF YES IF YES IF N

ock ock

: : ur cl NS

YY TIME 24 24 hour cl

TES

U / ASUREMENTS

e E MIN m

MM CORDING DAT

30 na

/ TEMPERATURE LOGGER

Page 4

ve ON /

/ i

YY YY

GIN RE pt

EVERY / /

BE DD scri mmunity Monitoring Manual ADED / / O e 2.2

O ALLED ON d L r N *

MM MM o REQUIRED OBSERVATI

SET T al ME O

/ / ci ER INST

/ / fi NA

Marine Co

SITE * Of LO LOGGER DATE DD DATA D DD TIME INTERVAL BETWEEN M

ATA SHEET ing for red. e D al ito n nu b o e Marine ock d : m th Ma

s g i

with o site t

TIME 24 hour cl

* at a

ILS stered

Moni i m rm y

, safety, an i

* d n CTION BEFORE n fo o u

e reg r

th .

tio

a SE e y Progra

ery time th

MBER u o m dl E DATA SHEET. stra YY i / C H en NU

SITE DETA

THIS e

eet ev ne /

3 itoring fri

ri CONTACT DETAILS n sh y

/ FICATION NUMBER a TION l

l ite reg lete if yo A ta a M E S

/04/0 a r e MM mp

on th ent h STR ity Mo

I e d 14 t

you NAM /

un nm th P IDENTI ted

/ ly co m U ro REG

OUP O mm tails On pda R e fro

PLEASE READ COMPLETING T Fill in Refer t d envi DATE DD G * Co GR SITE * U

er of tic to the ttle g data

u g

ed h o s l e Op th

tic S ure erature at is u at Op p is capable and e h er and activate ttle ce th

i mper

tem N v gg d . T e s . d

2 Te rs f it lo ATIO e tic Shu 2. b gnal g TTLE si ): U Op Tid

H d ) S to program (B e it log h II PTIC . The n t fra re O Tidb n a waterproo ee TIC BASE ST Part rwater P w is 17 OPTIC SHUTTLE O

ogger ng i i l m s t bet o u , as well down loa a

unde r huttle fr dbi n d e a o g i Ti tic S at ge dat n g dat ERATURE LOGGER the be use Op it log n P b ori om st can Tid fr Base St The excha

TEM (

; t s

e e a e e o n : l r er a h be en ity o i f th o

n and at gg i bee and r o . T th , the itab h t fer to eabed a rt g e t o , so tha n e lo e versus Ca e s po su fl can has x on tached t . R h is used t rm Car ram im nnects t n er d er usi g Refer t by passing a o (t Bo on Commun g i o

e gg er Fo on t n a Box atio tervals). Wh be at n of a pr cat

ee ware cel. n ri k) in o rm tion x ft t re w it log dat e ng oc it lo uni o e eye in th ca fo i

Ma t b it logg m wa the seabe s rs idb in

d bl stra rface. in ure b tties). If no tim th i e ft e e u e

h Ti g o h . ed nsi nk bet s r g FTWARE e T i The s com Tid ret o erat device that c j l t h r ad p O d s f d to structures . data to E ets; e e o rou a (eg r details. m h h it log onc fo

h ite Reg e e ck of t lo ers s er ng c i g S h al 4 o s t is a base p g t t u Page 5 idb the r e or t e gg n gg 3. o s i on nu h rm h r i r oori t w tion h (eg. c float at the o n

r fu star p hammered in vice. The le tie th o a port si fo o h t o t ht it lo it lo d x i m and/ n WATER TEMPERATURE g on t b b er t m fo n y Ma ap of the y r

mmunity Monitoring Manual r g l tle ated. n al can be secure o e po t BOX CAR S wi

n or e Tid atio Tid data is u put OPTIC BASE STATION h u t wei

nu sect ri e present T ear h ) S t I e r (eg. pora a n ers a -loc o e a astic cab t s h r u at l m I se i gg h re com can g t ni e als. tic Base S 2.3 r r r M tic S stallatio al o a a bed cl n a star picket Part Mo in a heavy or a t anchoring de attached t re t erature eratu Op it lo t ram ram o Op ctures u p p b d g g tic Ba o o e d sign m m

Marine Co e • • • th r Tid wire or p casing. Ens descri it can be Box C use pr te The pr te Box C pers Op stru structures

. t t f o ld n ed a ent tire d r o ou or t a an water o in 20-ce sh er rm ogge e eir en rs ores these rface e gg t l t u asure g i RS e of a b d p . The only d i it lo

ttle it log batteries that las e t u r. idb er is thrown away. e size h h ry an

RS h greater than 30 º C a R t Tidb n g E e T

e water for th n e h G l GGE e logg tool that m ni are t b ta can be down l t c i a NFORMATION SHEET g s statio rs e s n Optic S e

i I eratures ned intervals and s , g s ON OF LOGGE i p ich th cl po s. I s e u left in th r sm plastic containe e e isting it log by ni TIDBIT LOG d h eterm red i b be installed either at the s erature da d

p ga 3 TIDBIT LO r ex . W Tidb qui m ded water tem o can have a high level of accuracy except e waterproof. They have e are a scientifi can

m g oi 5 to rs n /04/0 ers i e ers ers in av 1 ents. g ed years after wh d gg INSTALLAT e 14 d are of oul n nance r use h fiv e ted

erature at pre t rwater using the it log it lo it logg it logg ne f can pt n p n s b b b b ri i to attach a a m pda p e Tid te measurem piece a u Tid whe Thi specially constructe Tid lifespan, as t unde m m Tid a de b U

Marine Community Monitoring Manual

PART II (A) METHODS (PHYSICAL)

2.0 WATER QUALITY

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.1 WATER (TEMPERATURE AND CLARITY) PAGE 1 TO 3 2.2 WATER (TEMPERATURE LOGGER)...... PAGE 4 TO 5

Page i Marine Community Monitoring Manual

2.1 WATER QUALITY (TEMPERATURE AND CLARITY)

METHOD RATING: 1

OBJECTIVES To monitor water temperature and clarity at ‘impact’ and ‘control’ sites in Western Australia.

When the water is stained or clouded with particles, sunlight is scattered and absorbed as it passes down BACKGROUND the water column. Just like plants on land, marine plants depend on light for their survival as it is TEMPERATURE essential for the process of photosynthesis, which Organisms have a range of temperatures within enables plants to grow. This also applies to corals, which they function most effectively. If this which survive through a symbiotic association with temperature range is exceeded living things can micro algae (called zooxanthellae) which also experience stress. require light for photosynthesis. It is important to observe changes in the amount of light reaching The temperature of marine waters may be affected marine plants to monitor the health of the plants. by industrial activities. For example, hot water from processing plants may be released directly into the Most marine plants in Western Australia are adapted marine environment. Other impacts include natural, to live in clear waters (high water clarity). A small global events. For example, scientists worldwide decline in water clarity can have serious have been measuring seawater temperature for over consequences. In Cockburn Sound a decline in water 100 years. The collective data shows that seawater clarity contributed to significant losses of seagrasses. temperatures in the tropics have increased by almost Nutrient enrichment of the water caused by 1°C over the past century and are currently industrial and domestic wastewater discharges increasing at a rate of approximately 1-2 °C per resulted in a proliferation of planktonic algae and a century - a phenomenon that is having detrimental reduction in water clarity. impacts on coral reefs. It is well known that corals become stressed and may even die when water Water clarity may decline if: temperatures exceed about 30o C, this is known as • there is a significant increase in nutrient ‘coral bleaching’. enrichment of the water from rivers and estuary outflows, and sewage/industrial discharges; WATER CLARITY • there is an increase in sediment loads from Water clarity provides another measure of water clearing in the river catchments; and quality. The waters off the Western Australia coast • restricted water circulation due to a breakwater (except those influenced by large tides) are mainly or marina and where there is some pollution very clear, that is, have good water clarity with low source present. nutrient levels. High water clarity can be attributed to a dry climate and low sediment and nutrient input from rivers. RELEVANCE TO MANAGEMENT Water clarity can be influenced by the amount of Long-term monitoring of water quality provides dissolved or suspended substances in the water, with important information: inputs from natural sources (eg. river run-off) and • on the natural temperature and water clarity anthropogenic sources (eg. dredging, storm water regime of an area, from season to season and drains and sewage outlets). from year to year; • on unusual events, such as the rise in water Dissolved substances include natural tannins in river temperature which occurred worldwide in flows from land-based run off and industrial/ March/ April 1998 or at times when there are domestic contaminants from wastewater discharges notable changes in water clarity due to human from factories or suburban drains. Suspended activities at the coast. substances include sand silt, microscopic plants and • to ground-truth (verify) satellite sea-surface animals and introduced particles such as sewerage temperature maps that assist in monitoring effluent. water movements.

Updated 05/04/03 Page 1 Part II(A): 2.1 Temperature and clarity Marine Community Monitoring Manual

The Datasheet has provisions to record four separate LINKS TO OTHER METHOD/S water quality readings at the same site (eg. replicates). For example, you might want to monitor & PROGRAM/S at 5, 10, 50 and 100 metres intervals from the end of This method can be carried out in conjunction with a a stormwater pipe, which discharges directly into the variety of other methods involved in monitoring the ocean. health of seagrasses, corals and mangroves. SITE DESCRIPTION SUMMARY OF METHODOLOGY Once a site is established the Site registration form TEMPERATURE (PART I: ‘Starting Up’) needs to be completed and Measure the temperature of a water sample using a submitted to CALM to obtain a Site registration scientific thermometer. number. This should be recorded on all Data sheets for that site. WATER CLARITY If you have selected a couple of sites (eg. a control Measure water clarity by lowering a weighted black/ and impact site) you will need to provide white disk (secchi) into the water and recording the information for both on the Site registration form, by depth at which it disappears from sight. referring to the first site as Rep 1 (eg. Replicate 1) and the second site as Rep 2. EQUIPMENT Record all relevant information about the site on the Site registration form, including: NECESSARY • five nautical mile grid reference number; • secchi disk and cord/ line marked with • site name; increments of 0.5 m (Refer to Part III section • site position in latitude and longitude (degrees, 3.8); minutes and decimals of a minute); • thermometer (with an accuracy of better than ± • ‘mud’ map indicating the location of 0.2 oC) (Refer to Part III section 3.9); measurements and the extent of any impacts; • Site registration form; • water depth; and • Data sheet 2.1; • Information sheet 2.1; and • PART III SECTION 2.0: SITE DESCRIPTION (ALL • set of five nautical mile grid sheets for WA SUBSECTIONS) (Refer to Part VI). HOW TO MONITOR OPTIONAL • GPS unit (Most effective means of determining TEMPERATURE site position) (refer to Part III section 2.2). The following steps should be carried out: • fill and empty the insulated container twice by submerging the container in the sea to ensure SITE SELECTION that container’s temperature is similar to the sea Select sites that: temperature; • are impacted by human activities (eg. sewage • fill the insulated container a third time and outfall); replace the cover; • have the potential to be impacted by human • place the thermometer into the water sample in activities; the container and leave a couple of minutes to • can be control sites (ie. not impacted by human allow the temperature to stabilise; activities); • record the water temperature on Data sheet 2.1; • are in the vicinity of other monitoring sites • if you have the time, take two or three samples (such as seagrass health); and (within the general area of your site) and record • have some sort of platform to allow the secchi the average on Data sheet 2.1; and disk to be lowered into the water • INFORMATION SHEET 2.1: USING A THERMOMETER. perpendicularly (eg jetty, breakwaters and boats). WATER CLARITY Record the average depth at which the secchi disk If you are unsure if your site is impacted by human disappears at each site. The Datasheet has provisions activities or is a control site, seek advice from your to record the Secchi depth twice and to record the Coastal facilitator and/or CALM office. average of these readings in the SD column, and • INFORMATION SHEET 2.1: USING A SECCHI DISK.

Updated 05/04/03 Page 2 Part II(A): 2.1 Temperature and clarity Marine Community Monitoring Manual

OPTIONAL METHODS The following information can also be recorded. This optional information records natural conditions, which potentially affect the water quality readings you obtain. These include weather and sea conditions (eg. wind strength and swell conditions) and are recorded on the back of Datasheet 2.1.

WHEN TO MONITOR Secchi disk measurements should be taken only: • between mid morning or mid afternoon as low sun angles can reduce the level that we can see into the water; • with clear skies, as overcast days can reduce the level that we can see into the water; and • when wind strength and swell conditions are less than moderate, as conditions above moderate can reduce the level that we can see into the water. • If conditions are not suitable then secchi disk measurements should not be made. Try to take measurements on a regular basis (eg. once a day, once a week, or once a month). To allow for the collection of seasonal data and to monitor for unusual and / or random events. Alternatively, these parameters can be taken when the data are collected in tandem with other monitoring programs (eg. seasgrass health). Temperatures can be measured at any time of the day as long as the time is recorded. To record the mean daily water temperature, measure between 10am and 11am and to record the maximum daily temperature measure between 3pm and 4pm.

DATA COLLECTION AND MANAGEMENT The data collected should be entered on Data Sheet 2.1. Data submitted to CALM will be entered in the Marine Community Monitoring Database. If data is collected consistently and in the long term, it is possible to make seasonal and annual comparisons at the site and also to compare information generated by other community groups around the State.

Updated 05/04/03 Page 3 Part II(A): 2.1 Temperature and clarity Marine Community Monitoring Manual

2.2 WATER TEMPERATURE (TEMPERATURE LOGGER)

METHOD RATING 1 1

OBJECTIVES To monitor water temperature using a temperature logger at key locations along the Western Australia coast.

• Fisheries WA; • Commercial Scientific Industrial Research BACKGROUND Organisation (CSIRO); and Scientists worldwide have been measuring seawater • Australian Institute of Marine Science (AIMS). temperature for over 100 years. These data show that seawater temperatures in the tropics have increased by almost 1°C over the past century and are SUMMARY OF METHODOLOGY currently increasing at a rate of approximately 1-2 Deploy a temperature logger at the surface or on the °C per century. seabed. The temperature logger should be set to record water temperature at 30-minute intervals. Organisms have a range of temperatures within Download the stored temperature data every three which they function most effectively. If this months. temperature range is exceeded living things can experience stress. It is well known that corals If possible it is also useful to deploy the logger at become stressed and may even die when water least 1 kilometre from the coastline. Data collected temperatures exceed about 30o C, this is known as this distance off the coast can be used to validate sea ‘coral bleaching’. surface temperatures obtained from satellite imagery, this information is useful to various agencies (eg. CSIRO). RELEVANCE TO MANAGEMENT Long-term monitoring of water temperature tells us many things about an area: EQUIPMENT • it documents the natural temperature regime NECESSARY and gives us a typical seasonal pattern; • snorkelling or SCUBA equipment; • unusual temperature events will be recorded, • temperature logger (refer to Part III, section such as the rise in sea temperature which 3.10); occurred worldwide in March/April 1998; • optic base station and optic shuttle (refer to Part • continuous measurements may allow us to III section 3.10); detect trends in the year to year temperature • personal computer capable of running Windows cycle; and and loaded with data logger software (refer to • it can be used to ground-truth satellite sea- Part III section 3.10); surface temperature maps that assist in • existing mooring, to attach the temperature monitoring water movements (when deployed logger. over 1 km from the land). • star picket, weights, floats, electrical cable ties (to attach the logger to a fixed position) – in the LINKS TO OTHER absence of an existing mooring; • Site registration form; METHODS/PROGRAMS • Data sheet 2.2. • Information sheet 2.2; and This method can be carried out in conjunction with a • set of five nautical mile grid sheets for WA variety of other methods of interest to you (eg. (Refer to Part VI). Seagrass health or coral health). This method also links with programs run by: OPTIONAL • Department of Conservation and Land • GPS unit (Most effective means of determining Management (CALM); site position) (refer to Part II section 1.4); and • Fisheries WA; • INFORMATION SHEET 2.2: TIDBIT LOGGERS

Updated 05/04/03 Page 4 Part II(A): 2.2 Temperature logger • re-locate the temperature logger by referring to SITE SELECTION the Site Registration Form; Select sites that are: • retrieve the temperature logger/or data after • any representative site of interest; three months; • part of a statewide network of data loggers (you • download the data from the Tidbit logger using need to liaise with relevant management an Optic Shuttle and then transfer the data into agencies for site selection); and Box Car (logger software) on a computer using • in the vicinity of other monitoring sites. the Optic Base Station; and • If possible at least 1 km from the shore. This • record all relevant details (eg. date, times, and information can then be used to validate sea- file names) on Data Sheet 2.2. surface temperatures obtained with satellite imagery. WHEN TO MONITOR The temperature logger will record and store water SITE DESCRIPTION temperatures at 30-minute intervals for the duration Once a monitoring site is established, the Site of its battery life. The temperature logger should be registration form (PART I: ’Starting Up’) needs to deployed all year round to detect potential seasonal be completed and submitted to CALM to obtain a trends. It is strongly recommended that data are Site registration number. This should be recorded downloaded from loggers every three months to along with the site name on all Data sheets for that minimise data loss if the logger is lost, malfunctions site. or was incorrectly programmed. The following details should be recorded on the Site registration form: DATA COLLECTION AND • five nautical mile grid reference number; • site name; MANAGEMENT • site position in latitude and longitude (degrees, The data collected should be entered on Data sheet minutes and decimals of a minute); 2.2. Data submitted to CALM will be entered in the • ‘mud’ map indicating the location of the Marine Community Monitoring Database. temperature logger; Temperature logger data collected at the site on a • water depth; and seasonal and annual basis can be used to detect • PART III SECTION 2.0: SITE DESCRIPTION (ALL SUB- trends over time and can also be compared to data SECTIONS) generated by other community groups around the State. HOW TO MONITOR In addition, there is the potential for some data to be used to validate sea surface temperature data The following refers to the use of a Tidbit logger. generated through satellite imagery (eg. by CSIRO). ESTABLISHING A MONITORING SITE Although consideration for this use will depend on When a monitoring site is first established: where the loggers are placed and how accurate they • program the temperature logger to record are (eg. were they calibrated). temperatures at 30-minute intervals for a three month period (refer to logger manual); ADDITIONAL NOTES • attach the logger to a suitable permanent structure (eg. mooring, jetty pylon) using plastic Please read the following and refer to the relevant electrical ties; sections: • if a suitable structure is not available, install an • the installation and data retrieval from anchoring structure such as a star picket, temperature loggers requires participants to use weight, or float; either snorkel or SCUBA diving equipment. • position the logger at the surface if the data are Participants should be suitably trained, qualified to be used to ground-truth satellite sea surface and take care in this hazardous environment. It temperature maps; is essential that the safety section is read; • position the logger on the seabed if the data are • this method requires the installation of star to be used for documenting temperature effects pickets and it is essential that the procedure is on benthic communities; and environmentally friendly; • indicate the position of the star picket on the • PART IV SECTION 2.0: SAFETY ISSUES; AND ‘mud’ map on the Site Registration Form 2.3. • PART IV SECTION 3.0: BE ENVIRONMENTALLY SENITIVE WHEN MONITORING. SUBSEQUENT VISITS

Updated 05/04/03 5 Part II(A): 2.2 Temperature logger Updated 05/04/03 6 Part II(A): 2.2 Temperature logger Marine Community Monitoring Program

PART II (B) DATA AND INFORMATION SHEETS

3.0 MARINE HABITATS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.1 DATA SHEETS: MAPPING THE SEABED PAGE 1 TO 4 3.1 INFORMATION SHEET: “SEABED MAPPING CLASSIFICATION SCHEME” PAGE 5 3.2 DATA SHEETS: MONITORING THE SEABED PAGE 6 TO 8 3.2 INFORMATION SHEET: “SEABED MONITORING CLASSIFICATION SCHEME” PAGE 9 3.0 INFORMATION SHEETS: MARINE HABITATS (4 PAGES) PAGE 10 TO 13

Page i

d abe e Se h g t n i p p a 1 M Continued next page. 3.

): (B II T R PA 4) OF 1 PAGE (

SITE NAME

THE SEABED

Page 1

OBSERVATIONS D

MAPPING mmunity Monitoring Program

REQUIRE FICATION NUMBER

: 3.1 ock Marine Co : r cl

P IDENTI

U o

O h

G TIME 24

ATA SHEETS D

rm (*) o f R n

Y NUMBE

Y / N

/ ME

3 M

M STRATIO RS I

/ the Site registratio

E /04/0 / .

R om 01

E fr …… S ) ted B SITE REG (* O DATE DD pda U

e d o h t ce red e t with n abe r t S E thods e 2). e), t i e e si n h e Se Requi t h e m AND d dista d e assist h n 1 g t

bomm om r e n

minant i fr . , an

p s ) ng a t ) fo p 4) do g a th

a t GURE n ed bitat, to n o bari b a bi FI jetty or ( e 1 M h ha i h

3. n ple given in t

e sea a aw e site. h

): ber 1 t n ark. t rent i pass bari h am

h itude of a t x (B r m m g um ffe hm ng o o dr site (eg. a (n 2 II RVATIONS nc di

2: record t ppi

e E T s the E n (c a

h a do R o etres) f e o n of i e M r o

n t o at the g around t OBS i (m bl t PA n .1 ation a ee D . fer t 4) rect t in v : Figu w o .

rect di NG

OF on (3 Latitude / lon feature A a n For Figure bet Di TES i n LAT LO

2 O Obser waypo re-locati NO REQUIRE 1) 2) Scale 3) 4) Please re sect clarification. 5) PAGE (

UR SITE YO AT BITATS A H R THE SEABED MAJO E Page 2 MAPPING mmunity Monitoring Program TIFY AND MAP TH N IDE : 3.1 STAGE 1 – MAPPING THE SEABED 2:

Marine Co RE

FIGU

e o t ATA SHEETS th inant g D

e ‘Mud S ber 1 E SITE I Required th catin e TH h , num NDING F n t of a dom U re-lo O t tical to n m u en N in O col id

e aw r E SURRO b ast CATI e waypoi (l ld assist with h

Site registration form. u 1 d

3 s LO r o

u TO e o to r sh , 1: N y p

/04/0 ation a v ark 01 Figu RE m

d p’ on is m

ted a n Th m FIGU RELATIO O Obser 4), and enter t lan site. pda U

d d

abe

de T OR ME l / vi N e Se A D di na h

tio g t AN een n PRESE i Op S p p rd a SPECIES N has b GENUS e co

e RVATIONS 1 M E 3. ANIMAL hem

) ) ) ) ):

OBS

) sh to r n sc

i r (B

o e E S AND i b

II m cat ONAL T u ANT fi NAM you w R n ….( ….( ….( ….(

OPTI assi PA R PL OUP e. If l 4) e cl GR

h (size or OF OTHE e tab GE . T 3 ………… ………… ………… ………… ble. th f 1) o

eet PAGE

( h of the ta

OR / ME section n S

NT A o D NEXT PA D tion i t E ons i a U AN m at N r v o I ed sec f d DOMINA n a I SPECIES N h GENUS ( e s CONT me

ed Obser

r i he

E SEABED in th qu N me)

n .

e H Re N I on sc s) e atio IO al BOX T

n Sch th m rm S

fo tio sificati ani ts in BLUE d a t is in i 1. DESCRIP

Page 3 E ssifica s an nt t hab RVATIONS

a N E Cla an g

IO (pl n ABED HABITAT in MAPPING T T i BOX , record th IN STAG OBS p m mmunity Monitoring Program D D D o me d NT SE RE e na Map abed mapping clas LIVING IN DESCRIP th Se

e b e abed ecies REQUIRE e p : 3.1

th DOMINA scri N e e S

TS IDENTIFIE d

Marine Co eir s N I

A h ) IO d m th BOX sed on T , to BIT a n A in a (fro H s , E BLUE ent, or t s with H DESCRIP T

itats is b ns (rock N

STAGE 2 – DESCRIBING THE SEABED… s pre O G l tio

a p N ATA SHEET e hab

N I scri th D e LIVIN e IO BASED d n T BOX d anim , fi e n e h NON d

RED ABED Use t e to DESCRIP

s plants a s. E SE r e H x

will u bo othe

in s s s s

o t BER

rked ch as y you RIBING T metre metre metre metre

BLUE u ] ] ] ] ]

e 1) 3

og s d g

l a o [ X ns ts ma ______[ [ [ [ DESC metres o St in i /04/0 ita 1: WATER DEPTH BITAT NUM ______b A (corresponds _ _ _ _ a 01 & H h RED an ervat e term ted to TABLE Th in obs pda

abe

T OR ME / N e Se A D h

g t AN n PRESE i S p p a SPECIES N GENUS

RVATIONS 1 M E 3. ANIMAL

) ) ) ) ) ):

OBS

)

r (B

e E S AND b

II m ONAL T u ANT NAM R n ….( ….( ….( ….( ….( OPTI PA R PL OUP GR . N (size or OTHE O I T ………… ………… ………… ………… …………

OF OR / ME R CLARIFICA NT A O 4 D F AN 1) E PAGE BL ( DOMINA TA SPECIES N GENUS , D E

A E

S N me)

E .

e N I s) TH IO G al BOX T

n Sch m S

tio RIBIN ani BLUE

SC d Page 4 E DESCRIP

ssifica s an nt RVATIONS

a N E Cla g

IO (pl n ABED HABITAT T i BOX OBS p FYING AND D mmunity Monitoring Program D D NT SE RE Map LIVING IN CLASSI DESCRIP

abed REQUIRE e (3.2

DOMINA N N e S

Marine Co I N I T ) C IO d m th BOX E T n S a S (fro s D STAGE 2 – DESCRIBING THE SEABED , BLUE THO DESCRIP

(rock ME

E G

H N T

N I LIVIN IO T BOX ED IN ID NON OV RED R DESCRIP E P

L P M

EXA

in s s s s s

o t BER

THE rked O metre metre metre metre metre

] ] ] ] ] ]

e 1) 3

R T g

E a [ X F ts ma ______[ [ [ [ [ metres E St /04/0 R ita WATER DEPTH BITAT NUM E ______b A (corresponds _ _ _ _ _ a 01 & H h EAS L ted P pda U

d abe e Se h g t n i p p

a S

1 M E 3.

SS ): ARSH (B MUD II MUDFLAT T SEAGRA LOOSE SAND ALGAL MAT R MANGROVES GRAVEL/ RUBBLE SALT M PA

HS SE

T CATION SCHEME R

OL COA FINE SILT VE / OD BBLE

ELL O

D USTERS PEBBLE SH RUBBLE CO RH N 2) 1) A

S ASSIFI 4) 1) 2) 3) 5) E AF CL LEAVES VE V

OSE O E O LE ITE MANGR R K H G LEVEL 2 CLASSIFICATION

W S: g ON L PY LEA /

E Y ivin g e 1) for clarification. STRAP STEM WITH PADDLE LI RED MAN GRE L

a) a) c) b) b) livin BLUE BOX

MAPPING CL LOOSE SEABED

Page 5 IFF

L NT

RM Non -

O OR

D ATF AVEME HORE C SEABE mmunity Monitoring Program MMIE NEARS REEF PL BOULDERS REEF P BO Mapping the Seabed, Tabl

1) 4) 3) 5) 2) S SOLID SEABE

: 3.1

A G

ion (3.

G Marine Co R T

) CO HIN sect

UIRTS E OSE MASSIVE TATE N RD

ANS - I T Q I A LEVEL 1 CLASSIFICATION I R W

N H EEN S: BRANC DIG ENCRUSTIN FOLI MASSIVE SUB TABULAR HE R thods E SHEE ASCID

SPONGES CNIDARIA SEA S RED BRO G (

LIMESTO GRA OT a)

N c) f) e) a) b) d) g)

d) c) b) b) c) a) 1) 2) 3) RED BOX e provided in the me

REEF ampl NFORMATIO x ANIMALS I SEAWEED CORAL REEF FILTER FEEDING

3 /04/0 01 ted

pda Please refer to the e U

d abe e Se h g t n i p p a 1 M Continued next page. 3.

): (B II T R 3) PA OF 1 PAGE (

ED B

E SEA SITE NAME H

RING T

Page 6

OBSERVATIONS D

mmunity Monitoring Program MONITO

REQUIRE FICATION NUMBER

ock

Marine Co : 3.2 : r cl

P IDENTI

U o

O h

G TIME 24

ATA SHEETS

D rm (*) o f R n

Y NUMBE

Y / N

/ ME

3 M

M STRATIO RS I

/ the Site registratio

E /04/0 / .

R om 01

E fr …… S ) ted B SITE REG (* O DATE DD pda U

d OR de

ME / Seabe vi A rd D di

the AN g en e. l be to reco s SPECIES N GENUS has e tab al wish

RVATIONS m th on E f i o

) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) cat

eed) OBS 3.2 Monitorin fi ion

w i nd ani

a e. If you

E l a . s ass ) (B): (se

sect * ONAL

( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ony ant ed e cl e tab NAM

tes 3) ber h pl ad

OPTI col . T sity, size

OUP of th er ) a OF

n num 2 n

PART II n i GR 2 oth

s io 3. (de the sh n

epiphy

sm i eet n a) b) h sect ni io PAGE ga ( at on S or i

t r a

o OR of ME / r NT A ED D orm B is inf

nf mbe AN (I th ’ nu rd e DOMINA co quired observations SPECIES N th GENUS e r Re

o E SEA e ), h 2 H me) t m e esent, r c ” 0

e pr n sch

N itats in S b

(eg. 3 tio a LIVING

NS I OXE t h

IO – “ ism B

RING T

T S an iphytes ar ssifica in gan EEN r ep m cla Page 7 R

RVATIONS o o g G E d nitoring classification scheme eed n DESCRIP o e an ri f h o t OBS

ito e D ze r seaw

bed m e si mmunity Monitoring Program ABED HABITAT MONITO a mon e

scrib

eth h e N

‘Se t d ,

t e NT SE N I abed wh n REQUIRE r e th IO o in to T n

BOXES t, e S o

prese s : 3.2 with DOMINA sed e m th Marine Co esen r a BLUE ns ro DESCRIP o F

i s p phyt ( l a pt

epi im N itats is b

of b an descri a N I e IO h e h and T nsity

BOXES e e t ts d s r th

an l U ito ATA SHEET RED p

n r DESCRIP o e D xes.

h m t bo

fers to the N e to ) s

– re EE m ch as o ( DEPTH WATER su GR will u

d ns n

tio number y you or UE a og

L l serva

3 o

to to to to to to to to to to to in l ob D, B /04/0 (metres) E E TRANSECT R 01 tiona TH e term o t density, size DISTANCE ALONG n ted i Op Th * pda U

OR ME / Seabe A D

the AN g s SPECIES N GENUS al

RVATIONS m E ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) )

OBS 3.2 Monitorin

nd ani

aweed

or E a s ) se (B): (

* ONAL

( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ant NAM

3) ber pl

OPTI sity, size

OUP er OF n num

PART II GR 3 oth

(de

a) b) epiphytes PAGE (

OR ME / NT A ED D B

AN DOMINA SPECIES N GENUS

E SEA ) H me e ” sch

n N S

tio LIVING NS I OXE

IO – “ B

RING T

T S ssifica EEN Page 8 R cla RVATIONS g G E n DESCRIP ri OBS ito D

mmunity Monitoring Program ABED HABITAT MONITO

mon

NT SE N I abed REQUIRE e IO S T

BOXES the : 3.2 Marine Co DOMINA BLUE rom DESCRIP

N I IO T

BOXES ATA SHEET RED DESCRIP D

)

m ( DEPTH WATER

to to to to to to to to to to to to to /04/0 (metres) E TRANSECT 01 TH DISTANCE ALONG ted pda U

d Seabe the g

R VE VER O O SS (*) C ). 3.2 Monitorin Y PTIVE INFORMATION T I MUD (B): MUDFLAT SPARSE MEDIUM COVE DENSE C ALGAL MAT DENSI SALT MARSH MANGROVES SEAGRA LOOSE SAND

GRAVEL/ RUBBLE c) b) a) AL DESCR PART II ON I COLOUR AND

EG ( SILT

ADDIT

LITHS / E

COARSE FINE S:

USTERS E N 2) 1) A

PEBBLE SHELL RUBBLE COBBL RHODO S S

E NS COLUMN AF CL LEAVES 5) 3) 4) 1) 2) V O

OSE E O LE K GREEN BOX ON L PY LEA

STRAP STEM WITH PADDLE LI g

g b) a) c) ivin L livin THE OPTIONAL OBSERVATI N

LOOSE SEABED D R

R E

T M

LIFF Page 9

VE VER OR O MEN FOR Non -

ED O E ED MONITORING CLASSIFICATION SCHEME RE C T S

D T BLEACH DEAD ALIVE mmunity Monitoring Program NARSHO REF PLA BULDER REF PAV BMMIE BLEACH NO SPARSE MEDIUM COVE DENSE C

SEAB

2) 1) 3) 5) 4)

G ON THE SURFACE a) b) LEVEL 2 CLASSIFICATION a) b) IN c) b) a) S: W E SOLID SEABE GRO

) S

Marine Co L NE

G S G A E : 3.2 O N EED

)

BLUE BOX

HIN UIRTS E

G ANS N CO Q V I G SEA OSE MASSIVE N I TATE

LIMEST GRANIT OTHER (

W I

- I S

E RD R EEN T S E E T A HIN S

A R A S V ASCID A U C BRANC DIG ENCRUSTIN FOLI MASSIVE SUB TABULAR H SPONGES CNIDARIA SEA S L I 3) 1) 2) ( RED BRO G O M T S R N U - I HYTES S

B C A B P SHEE G

A I A N R c) f) e) d) a) a) b) b) d) c) g) U B D E FOLI M S T c) a) b) N

REEF LEVEL 1 CLASSIFICATION

N ON THE PRESENCE OF EPI S:

O E NFORMATIO ANIMALS SEAWEED I

3 FILTER FEEDING CORAL REEF (*) FORMATI N /04/0 RED BOX 01 ted RECORD I pda (*) U

Seabe

ze). )

ally eciph , if no d si the d ( d

n g ing i o are a

t your

) t actu m ey e rd e san . ( 4) a ound h s e m een l rr 5 o no b w b ).

loo OF e e su m <0. ). m v bet ru 1 ey ‘d y o e: m l tto , th ). 3.2 Monitorin m bl 2 m d

i nt size: it is h m . s n e o s when alive t a g y bo vi 64 m h PAGE (B): 5 t es coral b will o ( s, but th ent

rain t d e 0. ns t

n u (g ck e Sand m gm cl d ru e ze: ro m n l grai to 25.6 c i

I o

ith on an fra si le

h l 2 m

e. n d PART II e el bb n dual d w h ze: e sed h i rai lly algae and a i bbl ru h v o (g e s

c mu particle size: k s s t n s ndi bl el / d ose s oc Actua si (i o l of an (r ski n

l r i l k size: 6.4 cm fu vi s grav acro ately fill t u k d of t y e i el

l l e o n n s fined by h e b r a e (roc s y u , lik s m o s ection!’. a h on k e s de mpl peb inant e

p y t v a s immed n o ve n om as o bbl sized d t a s lasse m h o ed e n d . rasi r on ou c i r fi n ect p g – l

and oser i a oot e h lou s ab b e of pe

spo ed

assi r . col t but u u ubtidal o - s sm ap co e ick l feel on cl n ns) xt S yo n

i sh s o en cl qu all and large roc

ai w (c) – e m r b h fee en d – o A t – h g

rocks Sm d – hs nt t d

W t - e sa As a

: – A i n

e dual – ol – se sa ish / bro ers

m vi i g dd ovem in e ndi coar fine sed i LOOSE SAND f MUD GRAVEL / RUBBLE pebbles m shell cobble rubble rhod look like r Page 10 r

ARINE HABITAT DEFINITIONS ve m (3

) mmunity Monitoring Program reef. astal ntertidal b reef . Neve ( I erous at m ation flat l u al co fl d n rm al o e. d of f i terti in size). tertida ck on i ubt in o : 3.0 M in w tid s

Marine Co r n ect an T l a l –

rge – a at lo o f rked on diagram

25.6 cm – er). f a w tide. i et o sed A la (> cl - a c m s

am – k po

s (a) di ore d at l atform

nd. SHEE ex roc n TIDE MARK i a to e N us – expose boulder large bommie pl nearsh headla reef pl Often reef pavement LOW

d) e) REEF a) b) c)

HIGH TIDE MARK ” G VIN NFORMATIO I I

3 – L /04/0 ON 01 ted “N pda U

d 0 e 4.

Seabe th

f eet, o h the s g aph r s. ation S 4) tog rm rm o OF fo f pho n r 2 I ral , I o 3.2 Monitorin . Fo DCLM c rt I d r PAGE (B): ( Pa ha o ous ral Health Refer t Co vari PART II

scidians) a

EDING corals LS R FE A Sea squirts ( c) Hard d) FILTE ANIM

Page 11 to . e fer - n e o r ai t swim

–

obt surfac no . to o ) , mmunity Monitoring Program o MARINE HABITAT DEFINITIONS x rd s t o a b ng page h e

s lo is u i

e s h e seawater. nerally d Bl DCLM ( e h ce) up fixed to the t te ro al /s b s on t : 3.0 g als g

Marine Co ua al t surfa q im T

n im ey are a h filtering ere e an to anim y l ff th l i b is ade , if t

ese an s s A ched th oup e. sses SHEE a at rm tta eeder r f N a at gr d g – bst

lt fo u aphs are taken from the CD-ROM, tween the d wh ilter ”. e , s an f e s t

filter feeder e b h o

g t sur eir adu trien h om t r tion t n e un sessile uishin ica g

f tial nu as u ar ove f o at is, i m ones istin y f Th or essen I them D classi em ds, NFORMATIO i

I a an dro with e y

, s 3 ING ANIMALS (SESSILE g. h ns ns – e e D (

ia . ) a p r /04/0 e FEE , s 01 cells ls anthids ng Cnida ted “LIVING” i ft cora pda a) Sponges b) o

Unless otherwise stated, all photogr “Marine Life in Western Australia FILTER sting U

s and zo

d . a dium e Seabe y cover e l of

. s sib i the wood g v ns) dium ave ; b) m e size 0%) e h

5 in, : > n y l sand

, th f g. finitio out t . g

e e b atio d s o own, me criptive) 4) rapp

e e ( t .) rass p s g agrass grass. ) a lon sp eed tch - br (des OF a

3.2 Monitorin a sca w a x p : d : se l Observ 3 o ass. n x ll a r oni a of sea ple above: a es, on

l (B): d

rass. g r sea n b box m e si e ke lawn tion a fo h d bo wn e t PAGE s y sm a Po seag l t leav e ( R Blu ( Ex Op Epiphytes Gree cover

eaves rounded, a r n y

o nat ke l i . Not li PART II tch ver (a m a Li . o p h d dt ss co t stem o ters of sho t or s wi rass, with g with

h n d e l b seagra . seag nni a san leaf – clu

ss gi on a s h ; a e tly all, discreet plant. L tly r vari ns -

grass. : b

f sp.) an wit an n sm o

lis a seag rass

initio em – . atio lawn g s – f

s of ibo omin ne . criptive)

e st piece and o ) sea n ave ant agrass e nt b Predomin (des pred

t lik – se over Amph – – y l leaves - ( n pl RASS l Observ x - a ee . No pp ple above: nse c a n box w box m m e or 10 ce escriptiveDe tion a d bo Dense bet Sparse Medium SEAG Str Stem with leaf clusters ste Paddle D 5 e Gree c) de Ex Op Epiphytes - R Blu clusters

Page 12 . ed se ct drat r MARINE HABITAT DEFINITIONS pi

mmunity Monitoring Program qua spa de 2 m d as ), as d within each 25 ne . (D ee 0 w e. : 3.0 v defi nse in a o y T

b de

Marine Co dl ith r a e

oa ed: w

y ) o s) , d br phs i ver of sea e

n scap o x tch ra

ov (M eed a o ee be t c b ll og p w n a M land SHEE um

d or e pr e hot can di e bet h N p pl e at n seaw r e t r e perce ly sm e m d n, bl h (Green , ow t on xam si

nat n ow i Br E The qua (S) i vi ver r

y reef, with m f o B with ck co - , d ree ro o

y r e!) k g t o c n d o ga i n r n san or d al

gi e d l tly seaweed tly l n NFORMATIO ns - seaweed be a a an an I o c eed of s s

initio l w ) f a omin (

sea 3 D any ). f pred E – – Predomin (i d. -

/04/0 . 50% s hes > S D . c AWE 01 ant escriptive de SE green. D Sparse seawee Medium (eg Dense pat pl ted pda U

d e

s s n ral rd: m de Seabe , u ation a co e , reco n rface of h n o u

serv the s

m g

rd t brown o lu Ob the l co a e. rd: ss:

l n s at all. ra g ). sib brown, medi tio i

4) % , reco tes growing e: ation

i Op 0 ple above: n y . ble, if 5 e m m

tes v m si OF present. Rec on sea i

3.2 Monitorin y a iph serv ss shoots or lu h g. > ed: 4 p ra In th co Ep bom cover Ex i d ly v g Ob i (e (B): e l r a st ep a ov sea f n b o ho PAGE tio s ( st or green). e e pr e iphytes are h

g. on ho

Op t pl . : e tch PART II e e a h if e ace. t nat f xam i host ly p n In th E Epiphytes growing cover host (e ith m e o sur o h on

e d t

ati record (red, brown o n th t living n s on g o e serv t with n a atio t i b hytes n iphytes, w o an tes p yh

n i y in serv ip al gi h m p i o e ep on be tly ep ep l ob f d s a an ep e n t s u of th tio st is r - Opti phy

nsity o op e S lou edomin e ho epi E obvio an e d th o – t co n – Pr all algae that grow on th – an rd in sm IPHYT ne – m ral). As P o No Sparse Medium Dense E Are Reco co d

Page 13

a ite. ched MARINE HABITAT DEFINITIONS

ected OR

r j o t mmunity Monitoring Program o e

f s ral ral i o o 1 th ctly wh c c 4. ral e. Sub h n on o t definition of ple: Blea stin e used o i r a d - c wi

at low tide w tid ). d d ural : 3.0 – t e d lo are ation r

iphytes T

Marine Co y nant at rm Dea n i ep ove

ation Sheet o e: fo l m se etc. d struc sed o pl rm n d lio

with fo er), c

s t fo et health. For exam In

n expo , a SHEE exam tional in r am color a ral to pl ten (rarely) expose o r o , often N r r di ddi of F re fe c the coral co . f ve h r a is with t o lou e

phi 2 m s fo s. 1 scribe (> is n heal

sam h on t ral reef ral i reef l. Please re o eet 4. tate, encrusting at brown co a i s healthy, r – to de /

or section o rm be c c coral form o

dig (eg wi ey pear , n Coral r d f

ral, p r o g ched

ation sh water. Co ck ns a n ES . o descri le,

io w coral. rm NFORMATIO ral a H r ching te co ble o gy o of ha at n fo water. le I

er initio rge p allo f In – t F rm – c n a

ce.

e o bra o v porites Sh f tly rubb i rfa A l e Deep

ve e – u al h an – 3 e com l inform

– fer t

rm: a h in al wa t fo idal be t m – v’s l t gh /04/0 d RAL REE ition SALTMARS ra d ral edo hi escriptive De r 01 o surface. Alive the coral s Bleached v’s not co Please re bleaching. Co descri ad Dea p CO Subtid Inter t Bommie single large D ted pda U Marine Community Monitoring Manual

PART II (A) METHODS (BIOLOGICAL)

3.0 MARINE HABITATS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.1 MAPPING THE SEABED ...... PAGE 1 TO 6 3.2 MONITORING THE SEABED ...... PAGE 7 TO 9

Page i Marine Community Monitoring Manual

3.1 MAPPING THE SEABED

METHOD RATING 1 1 1

OBJECTIVE To map the seabed and record relevant information about the seabed habitats and marine plants and animals. This method can be applied to any area of the seabed, examples include: • Tropical communities with hard corals and other marine animals (eg. zoanthids and soft corals etc.); and • Temperate rocky reefs with limestone platforms and mixed seaweed and seagrass communities.

example, different habitats may include; seagrass communities, coral reef, seaweed meadows, bare BACKGROUND sand habitat, rocky reef or a single, large porites The seabed constitutes the basic ‘make up’ of the bommie. marine coastal environment. Including the underlying structure or ‘building blocks’ (ie. coral, sandy substrate and limestone or granite reef) and RELEVANCE TO MANAGEMENT the main marine plants and animals that live on these The Western Australian coastline is 12,500 surfaces. kilometres long. That is a very large area. Whilst attempts are being made to map our coastline, with a The process of classifying the seabed is simple, if view to increasing our knowledge of existing you have a basic knowledge of what is there. Marine habitats. There is still a lot we do not know. There managers use various classification schemes to are still vast stretches of the coast we know very define the seabed, as an aid to managing marine little about and whilst an aerial photograph may environments. This relies on using standard identify areas of interest, there are still not the terminology to describe the marine environment, resources to ground truth each of these areas to find including the substrate type, rock formations and out what is there and describe the habitat in detail. marine plant and animal communities. This kind of baseline information is very important The process of mapping the seabed provides to the management of our coastal waters After all, important information about our coast. There are you can only manage something properly if you various methods that can be used to map the seabed, know what is there in the first place. The community depending on the level of accuracy you require. For can play an important part in gathering information large scale mapping, aerial photography is the most about our coastline, filling in the gaps where our common method, using high resolution, geo– existing knowledge is scarce. referenced images. Features are identified from the image and then clarified by divers or underwater cameras, this is called ground truthing. Ground LINKS TO OTHER truthing involves investigating these habitats further to describe the substrate and plants and animals METHODS/PROGRAMS present. Once we have mapped the seabed and have an understanding of what is there, we can begin to There is a simpler method for community groups monitor the environment for natural and human wishing to map smaller areas as described in the induced changes and methods section. • METHOD 3.2 MONITORING THE SEABED. Guidelines are provided to assist you with describing the seabed, using a simple classification scheme. SUMMARY OF METHODOLOGY You will be able to name and describe different This method can be used to map seabed habitats and habitats and begin to appreciate that within a to describe these habitats using appropriate relatively small area there may be four or five terminology. The terminology to define the habitats different habitats. With each, having completely is based on the classification scheme provided different marine plants and animals living there. For

Updated 31/01/03 Page 1 PART II (A): 3.1 Mapping the Seabed Marine Community Monitoring Manual

(Information sheet 3.1: Seabed mapping and once a number is obtained, it should be recorded classification scheme). on all subsequent Data sheets. The following details should be recorded on the Site registration form:

EQUIPMENT • 5 nautical mile grid reference (Refer to the Appendices PART VI); NECESSARY • Data sheet 3.1: Mapping the Seabed (3 pages) • site position in latitude and longitude (degrees, minutes and decimals of a minute); • Information sheet 3: Seabed Mapping Classification Scheme; • name of site; • Slate, compass and depth gauge; • ‘mud’ map indicating the site location and any benchmarks that you have selected to help with • Tape measure; re-locating the site. • Set of five nautical mile grid sheets for WA (refer to Appendices Part VI); and • Snorkel or SCUBA equipment. HOW TO MONITOR OPTIONAL STAGE 1: MAPPING THE SEABED • An aerial photograph of your site may be The following is a simple method you can use to available on-line, refer to PART III section 1.0 map the seabed, using snorkel or SCUBA to identify for information on how to search for a location the main habitats at the site. It may be possible to and how to purchase an aerial photograph; map shallow sites using snorkel. Deeper sites can • GPS unit (Most effective means of determining only be done on SCUBA, although this method suits site position) (refer to Part III section 2.2); and depths of less than 10 metres. • Video camera or still camera. • Define the boundary of the area you wish to map, the area should be no larger than 2500 m2 MARINE PLANT AND ANIMAL (eg. 50 m x 50 m); IDENTIFICATION • Using snorkel or SCUBA, survey the site to identify different habitats (eg. the boundary of The following are excellent sources to assist in a seagrass meadow, a limestone bommie or identifying plants and animals. areas of bare sand); • You will need a bag containing a few weighted • INFORMATION SHEET 3.0 MARINE HABITATS (4 peanut buoys (floats); PAGES); • It helps if the buoys are different colours; • PART IV USEFUL REFERENCES; AND • As you swim over different habitats mark the • CD-ROM MARINE LIFE IN WESTERN AUSTRALIA. centre of the area with a float; • Drop the weight at the site and gently release SITE SELECTION the float, which attached to a rope should extend to the surface to mark the site. Tie the Select a coastal area of interest to you. If you are float off, as you do not want excess rope interested to find out what the underwater world is floating on the surface; like at a particular location, then that is where you • Keep a record as you go of what each float should start and create your own seabed map of the represents, using the Seabed Mapping area. This method requires the selection of Classification Scheme (Information sheet 3.1) permanent re-locatable sites, in less than 10 metres as a guide to identify different habitats; of water. • Once a habitat is identified and marked with a buoy, use your compass to record the direction Site selection will also depend on the expertise and and a tape measure to record the distance to the equipment available to your group. For example, a next habitat/s. For example, you have two high school group could map the benthic habitats floats, representing a limestone bommie and a along a nearshore reef platform (shallow water), small patch of seagrass. The seagrass patch is whilst a SCUBA club might select an area of about 20 metres north of the limestone subtidal reef to map, in 10 metres of water. bommie. Record this information on your map; • If there is a seagrass meadow, or other large ITE DESCRIPTION feature, it might be appropriate to mark the S boundary at a couple of locations, to assist with Once a site is established, fill in the Site registration drawing your seabed map; form (PART I – “Starting up”). This needs to be submitted to CALM to obtain a Site registration number. The form only needs to be filled out once

Updated 31/01/03 Page 2 PART II (A): 3.1 Mapping the Seabed Marine Community Monitoring Manual

• Once completed return to the shore (or boat) HOW TO RECORD INFORMATION ON THE SEABED and you should clearly see the coloured buoys DATA SHEET marking the various habitats; • Use the buoys to help draw a map of your site • Unshaded columns – to describe the major on the Data Sheet (Datasheet 3.1 – Mapping habitats using the Seabed Mapping the Seabed). Remember to fill in details of Classification Scheme. The scheme has been what is between the buoys (ie. bare sand, divided into a living and non- living component seagrass etc.); and colour coded to represent the two levels of • Finally, if you have a GPS, the buoys are also classification: useful as you can get a waypoint for each • RED boxes - Level 1 classification: habitat by returning to the buoy and obtaining a • BLUE boxes - Level 2 classification: latitude and longitude reading, this information will also help when drawing your habitat map; • Shaded columns – to describe other plants and • Once completed you should have a rough map animals at the site. There is an optional of your site showing the location of the main observation column to record additional habitats. Ensure you add: information on other plants and animals − a scale (metres); observed at the site. If genus or species names − North compass baring; are known there are provisions to record these − Waypoint (Latitude / longitude); and names in the relevant column. − Appropriate compass barings with distances (metres), between the habitats (eg. buoys). EXAMPLES OF OUTPUTS NOTE: Suitable aerial photographs can be used to STAGE 1: MAPPING THE SEABED assist with site selection and also with a preliminary An example of the type of information you will survey of the site, to define major habitat collect when drawing your seabed map (this section, boundaries. Much of the coastline has been page 4, Figure 1 and 2). photographed and, if available, images can be STAGE 2: DESCRIBING THE SEABED obtained from DOLA by navigating around the site An example of the type of information you will and purchasing images on-line. Please refer to Part collect when describing the habitats at the site using III section 1.0 (Aerial photography), for basic the Seabed Mapping Classification Scheme (this instructions on how to navigate around the website, section, page 5 and 6, Table 1). or contact the Marine Community Monitoring Officer at the Marine Conservation Branch (CALM) for further assistance. WHEN TO MONITOR The ideal time to map the seabed is when conditions STAGE 2: DESCRIBING THE are favourable and visibility is high. We recommend SEABED Summer and Autumn, although any time of the year would be suitable. SEABED MAPPING CLASSIFICATION SCHEME • The classifications you use to describe the major habitats will be based on the DATA COLLECTION AND DATA classification scheme provided (Information sheet 3.1 - Seabed Mapping Classification MANAGEMENT Scheme). You should laminate this page, to Data collected as part of this mapping exercise will waterproof it for use underwater. The provide important information about our coastline, information you collect will be recorded on the often about areas where our existing knowledge is seabed data sheet (Datasheet 3.1 – Describing scarce. Datasheets submitted to the MCMP will be the Seabed). See Table 1 (methods section) for available to the MCMP database. The information an example of the type of information you will collected will also be in a form compatible with record; habitat classification information being collected • You will record information about each habitat around the State, for example by the Marine identified during Stage 1, using the terminology Conservation Branch (CALM). in the Seabed Mapping Classification Scheme; and • You will record information on the non-living (eg. rock formations and sand type) and living (eg. seagrass, seaweed and marine animals) components present at the site.

Updated 31/01/03 Page 3 PART II (A): 3.1 Mapping the Seabed Marine Community Monitoring Program

DATA SHEETS: 3.1 MAPPING THE SEABED (PAGE 1 OF 3) (Example provided) STAGE 1 – MAPPING THE SEABED

The following two pages (Figure 1 and 2 and FIGURE 2: TO IDENTIFY AND MAP THE MAJOR HABITATS Table 1) have been included as an example to You should record the following information demonstrate the information you will collect N From habitat [3] 45 metres directly on Figure 1 and Figure 2: when habitat mapping (Stage 1 and Stage 2). east to the end of the jetty. Firstly, how to identify different habitats and 1) Direction of north; record them on a map of your site (Figure 1 2) Scale (metres); and 2). Secondly, how to describe the seabed 3) Latitude / longitude of a dominant using the Seabed datasheet (Table 1) and the feature/s at the site (eg. for Figure 1, the Seabed mapping classification scheme. [2] [1] jetty and for Figure 2, the limestone bommie or habitat [3]); FIGURE 1: LOCATION OF THE SITE IN 4) Appropriate compass barings to assist with RELATION TO THE SURROUNDINGS re-locating the site; and [3] 5) For Figure 2, you should also record the Scale, increments = 30 metres baring and distance between the different habitats, to assist with drawing your [4] habitat map. N NOTE: Figure 2 - [1] to [7] represent the different habitats identified at the site. [6] [3] [5] At the end of Stage 1 you will have drawn two maps. Figure 1 (location map) and Figure 2 (habitat map).

Progress to Stage 2 (next page) to describe the Coastline Area to be mapped. [3] [7] seven habitats using the Seabed Mapping shows location of the bommie at the site in Classification Scheme. relation to the jetty. Jetty

This map should be identical to the ‘Mud Scale; increments = 5 metres. map’ on your Site registration form.

Updated 31/01/03 Page 4 PART II (B): 3.1 Mapping the Seabed Marine Community Monitoring Program

DATA SHEET: 3.1 MAPPING THE SEABED (PAGE 2 OF 3) (Example provided)

STAGE 2 – DESCRIBING THE SEABED: CONTINUED NEXT PAGE TABLE 1: DESCRIBING THE SEABED, BASED ON THE HABITATS IDENTIFIED IN STAGE 1. The terminology you will use to define the habitats is based on the classification scheme provided, which contains a living and non-living component (Information sheet 3.1). The classification scheme has been divided into RED and BLUE boxes. Use the descriptions within, to describe the dominant habitats in the Required observations section. If you wish to record Optional observations, such as other plants and animals present, this information should be recorded in the shaded section of the data sheet.

HABITAT NUMBER REQUIRED OBSERVATIONS OPTIONAL OBSERVATIONS [ X ] & SEABED HABITATS OTHER PLANTS AND ANIMALS WATER DEPTH (from the Seabed Mapping Classification Scheme) PRESENT (corresponds to LIVING DOMINANT habitats marked NON LIVING (rock, sand) DOMINANT plants and animals GROUP NAME GENUS AND /OR with floats, Stage 1) DESCRIPTION IN DESCRIPTION IN DESCRIPTION IN DESCRIPTION IN GENUS AND /OR (size or number) SPECIES NAME RED BOX BLUE BOX RED BOX BLUE BOX SPECIES NAME [1] WATER DEPTH loose sand coarse seagrass strappy leaves Posidonia none 3.0 metres

[2]

loose sand coarse seagrass strappy leaves Posidonia none 3.5 metres

[3] green seaweed Caulerpa brownii (patch, 2m2) 1.0 metres reef Limestone bommie seaweed brown Sargassum seastar (x1) species unknown [4]

3.0 metres gravel/ rubble

Updated 31/01/03 Page 5 PART II (B): 3.1 Mapping the Seabed OR / SPECIES NAME GENUS AND Luidia australiae robustus Zoanthus

PRESENT Mapping the Seabed the Mapping ) 2 OPTIONAL OBSERVATIONS OTHERPLANTS AND ANIMALS GROUP NAME (size or number) Seastar (X2) Zoanthid colony 2 m (patch, PART II(A): 3.1 PART II(A): OR / DOMINANT SPECIES NAME GENUS AND (Example provided) Halophyla ovalis Sargassum 3) OF 3 BOX BLUE PAGE ( DESCRIPTION IN sponges paddle leaves brown Page 6 LIVING plants and animals BOX RED DOMINANT SEABED HABITATS DESCRIPTION IN filter feeders seagrass seaweed REQUIRED OBSERVATIONS

Marine Community Monitoring Manual BOX (from the Seabed Mapping Classification Scheme) BLUE DESCRIPTION IN coarse coarse limestone pavement (rock, sand) (rock, BOX NON LIVING STAGE 2 – DESCRIBING THE SEABED STAGE 2 – DESCRIBING THE RED DESCRIPTION IN loose sand loose sand loose reef metres metres [5] [6] [7] metres metres metres [ ] [ ] [

[ X ] & 2.8 3.0 3.5 WATER DEPTH WATER DEPTH (corresponds to (corresponds ______habitats marked HABITAT NUMBER HABITAT with floats, Stage 1) Stage floats, with Updated 31/01/03 Marine Community Monitoring Manual

3.2 MONITORING THE SEABED

METHOD RATING 1 1 1

OBJECTIVES To monitor changes in the seabed over time, including the marine plants and animals present. The method can be applied to most environments. For example: • Tropical communities with hard corals and other marine animals (eg. zoanthids and soft corals etc.); and • Temperate rocky reefs with limestone platforms and mixed seaweed and seagrass communities. detected through on-going and long-term monitoring initiatives. The information collected BACKGROUND from such a monitoring program may initiate a There are increasing pressures on marine management response. This could be in the form of ecosystems as a result of our ever-increasing on-ground action (eg. to stop dredging activities) or population. Direct human impacts at the coast and to initiate further research and monitoring if there is indirect human activities inland – all contribute to not enough information to base such a decision. the health of the coastal environment. Examples of human impacts include: nutrient loading from agriculture, industry and sewage and dredging LINKS TO OTHER METHODS/ activities. Not all impacts in the marine environment are human induced. Others can be PROGRAMS attributed to natural events (eg. cyclones and Whilst not compulsory, it is advisable to do a storms) and global effects (eg. El Nino / La Nina seabed survey prior to establishing your seabed events and global warming). monitoring program. Mapping method (3.1 Mapping the seabed). This will enable you to It is important to understand these impacts and identify the different habitats in your area and assist where possible, manage them, so that irreversible with selecting a site for seabed monitoring. damage is not caused. One means of managing impacts is through monitoring of the marine environment and in particular monitoring the SUMMARY OF METHODOLOGY seabed. This method can be used to monitor the major marine habitats at a site. The information generated The seabed is highly variable and can loosely be will enable changes in plant and animal defined by the living and non-living components. communities along a transect line to be detected Including rock formations, sand and shell and over time. associated marine plants and animals. By monitoring marine plants and animals at a site, on a regular basis, you may begin to detect changes in EQUIPMENT the communities. The changes may be due to natural causes or human impacts. This information NECESSARY could act as an early warning system for detecting • Data Sheet 3.2; change in the marine environment, whilst also • Information Sheets 3.0 (4 pages); and providing a ‘baseline’ for on-going monitoring. • Set of five nautical mile grid sheets for WA (refer to Part VI). RELEVANCE TO MANAGEMENT OPTIONAL • Aerial photograph (Refer to Part III section 1.0 Monitoring the seabed is important as it provides for information on how to obtain an aerial management with information on the marine photograph); environment. If an area has not been previously • GPS unit to record benchmarks (Refer to Part surveyed or monitored, then such a program would III section 2.2); and provide baseline information on that environment. • Video camera or still camera. From here environmental changes could be

Updated 31/01/03 Page 7 PART II(A): 3.2 Monitoring the Seabed Marine Community Monitoring Manual

variation) or human impacts at that particular site. MARINE PLANT AND ANIMAL By collecting and recording information along a permanent transect line, there will be a record of IDENTIFICATION the marine plants and animals present and their The following are excellent sources to assist in abundance. Long term monitoring will also enable identifying seaweed. changes to be detected over time.

• INFORMATION SHEET 3.0 MARINE HABITATS (4 LOCATING AND LAYING THE TRANSECT LINE PAGES); • If you have completed the seabed mapping • PART V USEFUL REFERENCES; AND then you will have a good idea of the marine • CD-ROM MARINE LIFE IN WESTERN AUSTRALIA. habitats present at the site; • With this knowledge you can select the location to place your transect line, to SITE SELECTION encompass as many of these habitats as This method requires the selection of permanent re- possible. The transect line must be straight, so locatable sites. Once you have defined the habitats if the dominant habitats are not contained at your site, you can establish a permanent transect within a single transect line, you could run 2 or and begin to monitor. Site selection will depend on 3 to accommodate the different habitats; the expertise and equipment available to your • When laying the transect line it should follow group. For example, a high school group could the contours of the substrate. (Please refer to establish a transect along an intertidal reef platform Part III section 3.7 of the manual for and monitor at low tide. Alternately, your group information on how to make and lay a transect may select a site offshore, in which case you will line); need SCUBA equipment /qualifications and • You will need to define a ‘benchmark’ so that possibly a boat. you can re-locate the start of the transect line for on-going monitoring; • A benchmark is a structure that is easy to SITE DESCRIPTION identify and permanent (eg. a large tree, the This method requires the selection of permanent re- corner of a carpark or pathway, or underwater, locatable sites. Once a site is established, fill in the a limestone bommie or reef platform); Site Registration Form (PART I – “Starting up”). • Once a benchmark is established a compass This needs to be submitted to CALM for you to can be used to obtain a baring for the direction obtain a site registration number. The form only of your transect (eg. from the limestone needs to be filled out once and once a number is bommie the transect runs exactly north); and obtained, it should be recorded on all subsequent • Details of the benchmark /s should be recorded Data sheets. The following details should be on your Site registration form, and referred to recorded on the Site Registration Form: every time you re-visit your site to monitor. • 5 nautical mile grid reference (Refer to PART VI); MONITORING ALONG THE TRANSECT LINE • name of site; • Once the transect line has been laid return to • ‘mud’ map indicating the site location and the the start of the line (the benchmark); presence and orientation of the transect line/ s • Record information using the classification (Refer to PART III section 2.3); and provided on the information sheet (3.2 Seabed • There are provisions to record four Monitoring Classification Scheme); benchmarks, with way-points, on the mud map • You will monitor along the transect line, (eg. four possible transect lines). concentrating ONLY on the area one metre either side of the transect (eg. if you see a starfish 2 metres from the transect line, do not HOW TO MONITOR record it); Record information on to Datasheet 3.2, about By selecting a specific route for the transect line, • the plants and animals present, including where based on the habitats in the area, the focus is on communities start and finish, by reading the biodiversity at the site (eg. the composition of distance in metres off the transect line; different plants and animals present). It is anticipated that significant changes in these plant • Refer to the Information sheet 3.0 (4 pages) and animal communities may occur in response to and other references (Part V Useful references) natural trends (eg. due to seasonal and annual to assist in this process; and

Updated 31/01/03 Page 8 PART II(A): 3.2 Monitoring the Seabed Marine Community Monitoring Manual

• The information you collect on the data sheet is divided into two sections (Optional and WHEN TO MONITOR Required observations). As a minimum we suggest monitoring annually (in Summer or Autumn). REQUIRED OBSERVATIONS Fill in all details relating to Required Observations, However, if possible, you should monitor such as the dominant plants and animals seasonally, every 3 months to obtain a good data encountered along the transect line. A dominant set. Obviously the more visits to the site, the better. habitat is one that occupies significant area at the It is also useful to monitor after a large storm event. site. For example a patch of seagrass, would be a dominant habitat, or a patch of seaweed on a reef platform or a large area of gravel / rubble. DATE COLLECTION AND DATA Refer to the Seabed monitoring classification MANAGEMENT scheme (Information sheet 3.2) to assist in this Data should be entered onto Datasheet 3.2: process. Monitoring the seabed. The Datasheet has three OPTIONAL OBSERVATIONS pages, however additional pages can be added if 1. Other species along the transect line, can also required. Data submitted to the MCMP will be be recorded. Other species encompass plants or entered in to the MCMP database. animals that are NOT dominant at the site, but do occur within 1 metre either side of the By collecting data in the long term you may notice transect line. For example you notice a small trends occurring along your transect line. These group of 20 sea urchins within a large patch of trends will be reported on the MCMP webpage, as brown seaweed. Your transect line crosses the data updates, for your group and other groups urchins, therefore using the Seabed monitoring around the State to view. classification scheme you can record: • Required observations: seaweed (Red box), brown (Blue box); and • Optional observations column you could record Sea urchins (20). 2. Epiphytes can also be recorded. Epiphytes include organisms that grow on other plants and animals (eg. epiphytes growing on seagrass shoots or on the surface of corals). • Record only seaweed epiphytes. Information on epiphytes can be found on Information sheet 3.0: Marine habitats (4 pages). • For example you might record Required observations: seagrass (Red box), strappy leaves (blue box); and • Optional observation: epiphytes (dense cover). 3. Video footage. In addition to recording written information you can video the transect line to keep as a permanent record of your site. • Swim slowly and remain at the same depth as you travel along the transect line; • Keep the line in the middle of the view and ensure it encompasses 1 metre either side of the transect line; and • Do not shift attention off the transect line (eg. to film something interesting nearby).

Updated 31/01/03 Page 9 PART II(A): 3.2 Monitoring the Seabed Monitoring the Seabed PART II(A): 3.2 PART II(A): Page 10

Marine Community Monitoring Manual Updated 31/01/03 Marine Community Monitoring Manual

PART II (B) DATA AND INFORMATION SHEETS (BIOLOGICAL)

4.0 CORAL HEALTH

TABLE OF CONTENTS

4.1 DATA SHEET: BLEACHING AND CORAL PREDATORS PAGE 1 & 2 4.2 DATA SHEET: ANNUAL CORAL MASS SPAWNING PAGE 3 4.3 DATA SHEET: CORAL SPAWN SLICKS PAGE 4 4.0 INFORMATION SHEETS: CORAL HEALTH PAGE 5 TO 7

Page i

) E ators d .

HT METRES PORITES BOMMI (

coral pre

>60 HIGH ”

PORITES ED ing and E / H

h MED

21-60

BLEAC 2) “

NG CORAL 4.1 Bleac

OF : VI ESTIMATE TH 1-20 LOW

1 ox) (B) THAT IS OF LI

0 %

PAGE (

licable b

PART II

) ES NS – CORAL BLEACHING

e app O th le box NUMBER k COLONI BLEACHED c

(Ti licab

” E >60

e app HIGH

E LIV th OBSERVATI “ GPS tum wa SSUE

TERMINED da (Tick t MED 21-60

CORAL TI ESTIMATE TH COVER OF

wha USED LONG DE % / no <20 84 LOW T REQUIRED

If used?

A S

G FERENCE er. 1 2 3

E L e

T th mb Page 1 r TH R

e S

TUM W

A ent LS CHA WA e A

W MMIES G AND CORAL PREDATORS RITES NAUTICAL NM GRID RE O YES Letter / Nu

H WAS D 5 Pleas number, or tick the appropriate box. COR PO BO N mmunity Monitoring Manual

. e * red th (eg. e * Marine Co ito

BLEACHI

n abl o at m

NUMBER E S oc . NUMBER G

. 4.1 ite is e t RE u MPLETING THE n a s

and re-l k c mi OUP CO i m c MP) sites. Refer to o st

: a ti i

GR SITE REG f C n o

u r cl s ery l

rt e M ILS

a ou o p m th op TIME 24 h eet ev

deci ng d with ION BEFORE ri ATA SHEET

o an t

MCMP gistered with the MCMP. *

CT on. D

es e

e data sh oni SITE DETA stered h i ati

th nut

r m rm

ITUDE o o reg

mi YY f

i Fill in

een / 3 ws f

re CONTACT DETAILS AND DATE o b / l grees, o T. e

AD THIS SE

v E m /03/0 de a gistered with t r

MM n RE ITUDE

o i mplete if you are re

10 G f hod al d o t at h

NAM / r e LATITUDE o ted

/ A SHEE LON

hods t OUP e Only if re pda

PLEASE DAT The m sites th m GR *Only c DATE DD SITE NAME * LATITUDE AND LO * Rec U

ators d

coral pre

RAL FORM 5 HIN TATE 1 I

- 1 ing and 1 h DIG meters BRANC NS

) O x itor each

2) o n H AND CO b

4.1 Bleac T mo

OF :

n 2

(B) * DEP a

licab x IE

NO NO OSE 0 M 1 M e bo PAGE e app 6- NS – ( le box) FOLI MASSIVE PART II - O metres BO applicable box)

licab SUB p t, tick th (Tick th icable box) RITES

ap N e PO esen (Tick the r appl

KE th OPTIONAL OBSERVATI p

e below.

e l RM ick r OBSERVATI O T

a 5 ( YES YES 0- PHS TA

(Tick the

KEN meters RAL F

ED AT O G R O PTH lly in the tab OTOGRA NT C a H DEO TA u REQUIRED rites bommies ES ST MASSIVE vid TABULATE po i f

ENCRUSTIN I WATER DE DOMINA * ind WERE P WAS VI IMAG Page 2

G AND CORAL PREDATORS

NO LA N

mmunity Monitoring Manual

DRUPEL S YES R

Marine Co

BLEACHI NO

) ) ) COTS D M

4.1 YES

HAND ED AN PAL ] S T x N o CH THAN HAN

ENT

100 : S E NS -CORAL PREDATO IMAL Z N SERVED O TRET A B SI S S O T (1) T LTIPLY

U LARGER O SMALLER TH MINUTE SWIM H

( O MU WITH F

ATA SHEET 10 G SCARS PRESE O GE C

(1) E MUC ANIMALS PRE E N

( D NIES Z H

O SMALL T SI tick the appropriate b s. OBSERVATI ( G ie : WITH AVERA c FEEDI ) DIVIDE LARGE ) (2

ARE DURIN st spe 3 E OF COL LONIES . [(2 MEDIUM pe number, or G

e d e CO /03/0 v F r REQUIRED

TAL NUMBER OF ANIMALS 10 TO PRESENT KED ted PERCENTA pda Please enter th for the obse NUMBER O CHEC U ning e

th paw

s G

s licab OSE NO NO NO (Tick NS HIN D (Tick the O E l mas e app FOLI a N MASSIVE le box) NG - r o BRANC AW P SUB licab S p

L (Tick th

SPAWNI ap N

e RA

Annual c

KE th CO

4.2 ick : O T

S (

YES YES YES E PHS TA

P II (B) G AT

KEN

TY D T TATE I A OPTIONAL OBSERVATI PART H OTOGRA LYCHAETE WORMS NG RAPHS STORED AT MASSIVE le boxes) le box) DIG H W DEO TA TABULATE , OG

ENCRUSTIN T NI licab licab O p p ox) H W ap b IF YES WERE PO WERE P P WAS VI VIDEO STORE

. e t

) u S E n

le SS SPA

le box

a licab f T RS o R

NO E s NS (Tick the l licab

a O e app

m MET METERS

th 5 5

NG STA e app RAL MA 1

deci - 0-

k th O d c GPS ED (Tick 11

AWNI icable box) an TERMINED R

IF N P US *

: U (Tick Page 3 es

appl

nut

WAS OCC

24 hour clo ITUDE USED G

mi LONG DE /

YES NG

84 T WHAT

A S

(Tick the

mmunity Monitoring Manual G grees, AT TIME DID S AWNIN E L H ANNUAL CO

de T SP PTH n REQUIRED OBSERVATI LAND TH ITUDE R i S G le box) TUM W d AT W METERS RAL

A , LATITUDE o CHA O 0 WA

1 LON licab 4.2 W x) p 6- NAUTICAL Marine Co O YES LATITUDE AND LO * Rec H WAS D WATER DE DID C IF YES ap Bo

. n

o i red at ito

n rm k o o c f

m n ATA SHEET :

nd I D TIME 24 hour clo a site is

er e ILS *

m R FERENCE mb ti E T II A) a E

gistered with the MCMP. CTION BEFORE Nu R

AR ery

na SE

NUMB 2 (P E DATA SHEET. B). YY tive

4. H eet ev

SITE DETA

THIS Letter

/ 3 if you are re sh MILE GRID

scrip RATION e / a L e t

hods

t a ART E d e /03/0 * r GIST MM o

mplet e d

l M 10 o UTICA CONTACT DETAILS AND DATE o

RE NAM / th ted

OUP OUP fer t Only c pda e Officia PLEASE READ COMPLETING T Fill in R sheets 4.0 (P GR GR * DATE DD SITE NAME * FIVE NA

U le x) bo

le e licab n slicks

cabl

licab i paw e app

pl l s NS NS p a th

O NO NO NO O r ) e app t o e a r le box) h th (Tick k t

c licab s cou 4.3 C i p : (Tick n

urt)

EEN (Ti ap S

nnis court) K II (B) is co C KE th I L 2 of ten /

N SLICK ick 1

T N S

( PART a tenn

an W PHS TA A an YES YES YES P AT

r th th E SPAW KEN e size as a te S

D r H L lle e a A REQUIRED OBSERVATI OPTIONAL OBSERVATI R OTOGRA (sam RAPHS STORED AT OF T H DEO TA (sm (larg OG

A CO T

S O TENT A ox) ox) H b b W EX SMALL MEDIUM LARGE WERE P P WAS VI VIDEO STORE

KS C

e t u

) n

S E

N SLI a le box W of s l (Tick the licab

a METERS METERS

m 0 0

2 1

e app 6- deci

16 th O d GPS ED

an icable box) TERMINED

IF N US s *

(Tick

e Page 4 t

appl u

n CORAL SPA

WAS

mi ITUDE USED

LONG DE

84 T WHAT RS A S

(Tick the E

mmunity Monitoring Manual G grees, 4.3 E L

de T places) MET METERS METERS PTH n

TH ITUDE R 5 5 S G le box) 1 TUM W - 0-

rd i mal >21 A LATITUDE o CHA WA 11

LON licab W p NAUTICAL Marine Co O YES LATITUDE AND LO * Rec (3 deci H WAS D WATER DE ap

. n ATA SHEET

o i red D at

ito n rm

o o ock f m n r cl : u

o nd I h 24 TIME a site is

e * er ILS

m R FERENCE ti mb E T II A) a E

gistered with the MCMP CTION BEFORE R

me AR ery

NUMB 3 (P E DATA SHEET. B). YY tive

4. H eet ev

SITE DETA

THIS Letter Nu

/ 3

if you are re sh MILE GRID scrip RATION e / a L e t

hods

t a ART E d e /03/0 r

GIST MM o

mplet e d

l M 10 o UTICA CONTACT DETAILS AND DATE o

RE NAM / th ted

OUP OUP fer t Only c pda e Officia PLEASE READ COMPLETING T Fill in R sheets 4.0 (P GR GR * DATE DD SITE NAME * FIVE NA

. . t. of n ral sed o ella ars n w sc cau o crescent r eratures Drup p be ing r can also around the ll C s of c o d ation sheets e es but their are not the r s a s m k are prese al a oni h (sm n a ella c col chec ng sca rine snail, a colonies s suc ot fish fee 4.0 Infor hes r

Drup m c rites o :

at r rites Po feedi cause d (B) o pat

e e e

Parr e r n Po h h t . loads in the wat o e

p g d nt whi rals ral e not t lar o an elevated water tem o at c PART II h h r t

d are very distinctive are e bleach. can be t 3) (COTS) and the t y of c also fee ched

weve n a ey other t see if COTS gh sedim to hes OF c the

pr ble ca ts be no re h rals s. Ho 1 n d r u o l to lly s pat red u y a n e ng scars ed). Hi ato o t otfis er p f d lon sh

PAGE ( It by eve Whi pre pre thorns starfish To e co Parr feedi sha cause c Parti

. r

e e d 0 e as n ny h 1 th d o g et or o i r a ation, m t col up fro

s entifie ae becom ral form l mage leads d recove w

i ht at h o sm ) BOMMIES i r white patches,

n n e co lig nthel g a of the colony is y n g ol n be r ite. lting da ca b o u

e t wh d ca g e wh ny a e die, they can recover if h tan

r lo m tifiable as e res an es are typically helm s algae. t algae withi the zooxa PORITES the top i o s n r h

distinctive coral r n p n

co CORAL HEALTH u o Page 5 da l , o o ng events f l o cases biotic gree rites o e e co le to n c ese im i rs when Po m e coral tissu u

o part eratures. T rent 4.0 erab TION OF p g th . Larg of th do not alway ln s, are a very t mmunity Monitoring Manual A ffe In s s n m e large i der bleachi coated . di ellae (sym BLEACHING IN CORALS igh

d h l te hing occ lsion e y vu a mmi l y cover flat. h a be st turn bleaching is easily ide ho h m e expu e shape can c rites bo ral th creasing ey

Marine Co IDENTIFIC h Po t meters in dom dead and Coral whi Bleached coral the zooxant proliferate. Ol white patches Coral bleac in than norm to co Diver next to

r o de f gui

form NFORMATION SHEET

SE owth

r O MASSIVE I - ITATE des a use i TH FORMS IG v OL UB ral g o W S D F co pr t ABULAR n T a n res i

m gu

3 fi e do g

n CORAL GRO /03/0 G t NG wi

o 10 l l HIN o ted tifying ASSIVE en pda RANC NCRUSTI B E M The f id U

. s o 16 ral gae. e t y Less o l . . The u tified e t es d a en n s ed c rals. m sand es typically spi ation sheets h i ect green al t on f c oxi co

m f p r pr in en l. e a d pat a s on h e ap e on pla ev e sha t r t i r o h cor o are tch l S 4.0 Infor of t a h

e a a y : at’s is easily id r scars t p er are coat g ni por ed w co th of s i (B)

n o Th r ite c i rv r e d c vi d ng se A n b G SCAR ort. e u e h

as wh o t n en PART II n e starfish e l ite sh

dd s coveri bulat d i i ’ e ctiv t iab t e patches that 3) her a t e qu c i l, h tif abulate). Fee r a ta s u

a n stin r . a i i OF whi s y nd c t i o t whet 2 s ni e co ry d m h e r ci eri i t e arm THEIR FEEDIN be c f vi corals (T eding on d a e PAGE p of ( ose e easily ide ile th o con oul entified as is a v l r por sh f t o d i charact f a e c sh s r h r e wh cal d on Acro t TS i

sta n s n be i ges. T O

y e starfish on d oun s d i h COTS AND f n

n p rg r C r is larg e o b fo la

feed h) a ned e scars ca ous t A h o c t

r r ng of th nea i n defi TS feeding sca d obvi er e starfish TS can l w d O st n a sea o wel u of th . CO h C

k s TS, e Cro o sk m O o i Th The m d ar Fres recent fee COTS prefe have C (l CORAL HEALTH Page 6

n g st ar to e n by l as e nd

h u n itate di a 4.0 white w ) ig d t e b mmunity Monitoring Manual no ang of hi corals, .

r n ve shells e (k u i areas lt. Th cars an o pear as ons ga i p s o vi corals (d ell with e at g s hite

fficu g for l n . s a g al i h r tch n sh i a pora d beha t (w ges o c

Marine Co ick feedi ust i t aggre r sca ed l ella p ite p , searc Acr

iden SCARS y al .

r v esh encr la a th ned r Olde on el d sm

Drup gae p r f as wh defi re ed

fo rm ars e f l e e ng o Dru o h) with

t g ng n f g ndi g sc n wel e to to f vicinity. n ri e so have a c er u e ooki oft f len

s in green al edi al e l have ke fi

in y

d a y pr is d l ella

b ella a cove s e clo e. Fe NFORMATION SHEET cal tch mm by ella a 5 overe bl pi I ce i Drup 4 y Drup si - n can m easily identifiabl in th ged s m ite p a Drup vi es t AND THEIR FEEDING m

at 0 Thi l e and c coral. s are prese ella oufl p r d r .

ed wh s iphytes. n LLA ei o h ail (2 ral visibl cam s n algae. ep Drup r s serv g sca r e coral and ffecte n i e ng t l l sn co i h are ob t al o

g sca gst DRUPE th 3

ect m i 3 feedi n d i

eath th on w e shel d a det

l rn y an r e /03/0 ether an n ated in gree t) d . Th fo o o . Fee d am upel are a s en e un 10 g around the a ared areas c e) wh

ons , u n i Dr at q ted l col ella r an ing h a ect cem pl j de nfirm o ok pda eef echni Fres older sc co and Cor un t searchi lo patches Drup pr r U

a 10 in f - are can 7 s

ks c nd i ility o ition d ab ation sheets n sl arou m y aw late in shallow typically red p u d call e prob i s sea con an th

ral d o 4.0 Infor n en

89 : and TION d . C 19 n accum

A ) rou a

l (B) re th ) April; typ m win d i m en m es Apri offsho y during wh d PART II

g and tim

all (>1 n e an i m 3) rch m ild o coral spawn c

awn . s m Ma OF t d are s d o n i l. phs 3 n a ich ra m ral sp (a og slick in Bills Ba are rch s n a gs wh PAGE n hot e conditions ( w s p M itio g n n rs between nd l spa r the ng are minim wi

cu ra o c oon i l

after mass co l o g o Co m g f l in tless coral eg Unde sea co l n e . occurri i d u CORAL SPAWN SLICK IDENTIFIC h rn un o t an e f o

m awn h d r t n e r t n slick als co fe e e e th w a p . R aft rev s s t ur h o g ccur on

4 Mass coral sp ni o mild and onshore water. If wi coral s slick col ORAL HEALTH Page 7

f d o ’. ss o 10 p

a - s r t u 7 an h o

4.0 C t m et u s nd mmunity Monitoring Manual pri o ck so bundles. hi sun coral

arou g y n a ‘t hours ri een o t u in the m call w n i g the i t . D and sperm bet

Marine Co ur g g i ) l o g n i ri hs. n p r col ap u April; typ r n d ackets sittin r t s A surface. In i e e tog p m m i red i t e y erm pho l e wat and g to releasing e h rds the n ENTIFICATION t cal r d sp rch o D o wi t som pi wa n y an llo nd i s Ma d l pri d t d i a n NG I (a NFORMATION SHEET e fo h m ease e egg I th float to rc Cor a nd a o m th u r e M fer t m bundles. n erv e n be rel s er m) ro b p . R rs between o s

oon i o and spe gs ca cu c lyp e t m o l ggs l (>1m l po g l g and s of eg CORAL SPAWNI al n u sib

g i s 3 ral o e f sm p the e co ions h awn d ll i al /03/0 r t e it is du t gs are i 10 f g . v ng m n i i a eg ted l releasing e release ni s t a 0pm h ral awn e ind 3 g pda o sp th Cor Mass coral sp ni 9: C spaw Once

U Marine Community Monitoring Manual

PART II (A)

METHODS (BIOLOGICAL)

4.0 CORAL HEALTH

TABLE OF CONTENTS

4.1 BLEACHING AND CORAL PREDATORS PAGE 1 TO 3 4.2 ANNUAL CORAL MASS SPAWNING PAGE 4 TO 6 4.3 CORAL SPAWN SLICKS PAGE 7 TO 8

Page i Marine Community Monitoring Manual

4.1 BLEACHING AND CORAL PREDATORS

METHOD RATING 1

OBJECTIVE To evaluate the health of corals, by monitoring the: a) effects of global warming on coral reefs (bleaching); and b) impact of coral predators on coral health.

polyps in excess. For example, extensive damage to the Great Barrier Reef resulted from BACKGROUND an outbreak, where COTS densities exceed Coral reefs are among the most spectacular and 1000 per kilometre of reef; and diverse natural communities on earth. They are e) Global warming and mass bleaching events. rivalled only by tropical rainforests in the diversity Sea temperatures in the tropics have increased and abundance of plants and animals present. by almost 1 ºC over the past 100 years and are currently increasing at the rate of Coral reefs occur in tropical seas, where approximately 1-2 ºC per century. These temperatures generally remain higher than 18 ºC increases are enough to cause coral bleaching. most of the time. In Western Australia, extensive Coral bleaching occurs when the zooxanthellae, coral reefs occur from the northernmost tropical susceptible to higher temperatures, are expelled regions in the State (latitude 12 º S) to temperate from their host, turning the coral tissue white. reefs at the Houtman Abrolhos Islands (latitude 28- 29 º S). This method enables participants to record information on two of these impacts, namely The architect of the coral reef is the tiny coral polyp, bleaching and the presence and abundance of coral which builds a skeleton of calcium carbonate. Each predators. polyp contains numerous tiny, single-celled plants called zooxanthellae (algae). These algae give the corals their colour and through photosynthesis, RELEVANCE TO MANAGEMENT produce most of the food consumed by the corals. A Outbreaks of coral bleaching on many coral reefs single coral colony may consist of thousands of throughout the tropical oceans over the past two these polyps and together these colonies form the decades have been attributed to elevated seawater basis of a complex three dimensional structure, the temperatures caused by the greenhouse effect – coral reef. global warming. Impacts on coral reefs around the world are significant, with between 50 and 70 per cent of all Many corals that have died as a result of bleaching coral reefs under direct threat from human activities are short-lived, fast growing species (eg. Acropora and natural impacts. Causes include: and Pocillopora corals) However the recent a) Eutrophication (eg. increased nutrients from bleaching and deaths of large porites colonies has agriculture) and sedimentation (eg. from also occurred in recent times. Porites bommies are dredging, mining and construction activities); extremely slow growing (approximately 10 b) Physical disturbance by reef users (eg. millimetres a year) and may reach up to 10 metres in fisherman and reef walkers); height. A 10 metre high porites bommie is about c) Over harvesting of marine species for the 1000 years old and has probably never been aquarium industry and commercial and subjected to elevated seawater temperatures during recreational fisheries; this time. If such a healthy bommie begins to bleach d) Coral predators, including Drupella (predatory and /or die, then this is further evidence to support snails) and Crown of thorns starfish (COTS). the hypothesis that increased temperature rises will Both of these predators are natural predators, have serious impacts on coral reefs in the future. however under certain conditions, their numbers may proliferate resulting in There are still many questions that management widespread damage, as they devour coral agencies need answers for. For example, is coral

Updated 10/03/03 Page 1 PART II(A): 4.1 Bleaching and coral predators Marine Community Monitoring Manual

bleaching a natural signal that has been • CD-ROM - MARINE LIFE IN WESTERN AUSTRALIA. misinterpreted as a sign of climate change? Are INFORMATION SHEET 4.1, AND coral bleaching events increasing or decreasing in • PART IV SECTION 4: USEFUL REFERENCES. intensity? To help answer these questions more data needs to be gathered on the frequency of coral bleaching events, which may effect both fast SITE SELECTION growing species and slow growing species (porites bommies). Monitoring sites can be on any coral reefs, ideally where there is a significant amount of live coral Monitoring the reef for natural predators, such as cover, however, areas where there are individual Drupella and COTS, will provide management with coral colonies (such as porites bommies) are information on the current condition of corals on the suitable. reef and in the long term, provide a better understanding of natural and human induced • You can monitor sites on an opportunistic basis, influences on coral reef ecosystems. or you can visit the same site on a regular basis (eg. annually). • If regular visits are made to the same site LINKS TO OTHER register the site by filling in the Site registration form (PART 1 – “Starting Up”). This is not METHODS/PROGRAMS necessary if you are visiting sites on an opportunistic basis. This method is linked to: • METHOD 2.1 WATER QUALITY (TEMPERATURE/ CLARITY); • METHOD 2.2 WATER QUALITY (TEMPERATURE LOGGER); SITE DESCRIPTION AND • Eye on the Reef monitoring program of the OPPORTUNISTIC SITES Great Barrier Reef Marine Park. For monitoring opportunistic sites, fill in the following information on Data sheet 4.1: • five nautical mile grid reference number; SUMMARY OF METHODOLOGY • site name; and 1. This method enables participants to record • site position in latitude and longitude (degrees, information on coral bleaching and the presence minutes and decimals of a minute). and abundance of coral predators; and 2. Monitor in pairs. One person to record RE-LOCATABLE SITES information on bleaching and the other to record If you monitor the same site over time, you will also the presence/absence and abundance of need to fill in the Site registration form (PART I: Drupella or COTS. ‘Starting Up’). Once submitted to CALM you will receive a number for that site, this should be recorded, along with the site name, on all Data EQUIPMENT REQUIRED Sheets for the site. This is essential if you are NECESSARY monitoring porites bommies, to monitor for change • snorkelling/SCUBA equipment; over time. • underwater slate; The following details should be recorded on the Site • Site registration form; registration form: • Data sheet 4.1; • site name; • Information sheets 4.0; and • GPS waypoint for the site (Refer to Part III • set of five nautical mile grid sheets for WA section 2.2); and (Refer to Part VI). • ‘mud’ map indicating the position of each porites colony monitored (refer to Part III OPTIONAL section 2.3). • GPS unit (most effective means of determining site position) (refer to Part III section 2.2); and • underwater video camera or underwater camera. HOW TO MONITOR Work in groups of two and designate one person to monitor coral bleaching and one to monitor coral ADDITIONAL INFORMATION predators. Swim for 10 minutes and record: The following are excellent sources to assist in identifying corals and porites corals: CORAL BLEACHING Estimate the percent cover of live corals, the number of bleached corals (either wholly or partially

Updated 10/03/03 Page 2 PART II(A): 4.1 Bleaching and coral predators Marine Community Monitoring Manual bleached) and the percent of living corals that are bleached. If there are porites bommies at the site, ADDITIONAL NOTES record information on each one individually in the Please read the following and refer to the relevant appropriate columns. sections: • this method requires participants to use either CORAL PREDATORS snorkel or SCUBA diving equipment. During the swim check individual coral colonies and Participants should be suitably trained, qualified record the number of colonies checked, the number and take care in this hazardous environment; with a coral predator present (ie. Drupella or • coral reefs are susceptible to human impacts COTS), the total number of animals observed and such as diver and anchor damage; the presence / absence of visible feeding scars. • PART IV SECTION 2.0: SAFETY ISSUES; AND • PART IV SECTION 3.0: BE ENVIRONMENTALLY SENITIVE OPTIONAL METHODS WHEN MONITORING. If an underwater camera or video camera is available, it is a good idea to photograph or video each of the numbered porites colonies. If photographs or video footage are taken the details should be recorded on Data sheet 4.1.

Draw a sketch of each porites colony showing the shape and any identification features such as dead spots. A sketch of the colony from the N, S, E, W would be useful. These sketches can assist in the re- location and identification of individual porites colonies and should be stapled to the Site registration form.

WHEN TO MONITOR Sites should be monitored at least once a year and specifically after periods of maximal temperatures (ie. late summer/ autumn).

DATA COLLECTION AND DATA MANAGEMENT The data collected should be entered on to Data sheet 4.1. Data submitted to CALM will be entered in the Marine Community Monitoring Database. Data updates will be available on the MCMP home page, comparing information generated within and between sites.

Long- term monitoring of re-locatable porites bommies is encouraged for each registered site, this will enable comparisons with previous monitoring events and also comparisons with other projects looking at coral health around the State.

In addition, the collection of coral health data, on an opportunistic basis from various locations around the State can also be used to compare between sites and regions.

Updated 10/03/03 Page 3 PART II(A): 4.1 Bleaching and coral predators Marine Community Monitoring Manual

4.2 ANNUAL CORAL MASS SPAWNING

METHOD RATING 1

OBJECTIVE To monitor the location and timing of coral mass spawning on coral reefs in Western Australia.

exploration or drilling during the known periods of coral mass spawning. BACKGROUND Until recently, most corals were thought to release Documenting annual coral mass spawning: planulae (coral larvae) intermittently throughout the • adds to long-term information on the timing of year. Studies during the 1980s have shown this is mass coral spawning in Western Australia; incorrect and now more coral species are known to • provides information on reproductive health of spawn at the same time during a brief, predictable the corals; and period each year. This occurs in spring on the Great • provides a better understanding of the Barrier Reef and in autumn on Western Australian recruitment of coral reefs by coral larvae. coral reefs.

This mass spawning of corals between mid-March LINKS TO OTHER and mid-April is one of the most spectacular events in the yearly calendar of a coral reef. Other reef METHODS/PROGRAMS invertebrate species such as polychaete worms also This method links to: reproduce at the same time as corals. • Method 4.2 Coral spawn slicks.

Mass spawning ensures successful reproduction. By spawning at the same time, colonies of one species SUMMARY OF METHODOLOGY maximise fertilisation while the simultaneous The date, time, location and type of coral spawning spawning of many different species will ensure in March/ April are recorded annually. enough planulae survive by swamping predators with an excess of food over a short period. Similarly, spawning at night may be a clever way to minimise EQUIPMENT predation by animals, which need light to see their prey. NECESSARY • snorkelling or SCUBA equipment; Coral mass spawning in Western Australia coincides • underwater dive lights; approximately with the beginning of the flow of the • underwater slate; Leeuwin Current, and planulae may be swept • Data sheet 4.2; southward to supply reefs further south with new • Information sheet 4.0; and corals. Many coral reefs along the Western • set of five nautical mile grid sheets for WA Australian coastline are biologically connected and (refer to Part VI). the long-term survival of southern coral reefs, such as the Abrolhos Islands, may depend on the health of OPTIONAL reefs further north, for example, the Ningaloo Reef. • GPS unit (Most effective means of determining site position) (refer to Part II Section 1.4); and RELEVANCE TO MANAGEMENT • underwater video camera or underwater camera (refer to Part III Section 3.6). Most of Western Australia’s coral reefs reproduce over such a small time period that it is vital that the coral larvae are protected from any human activities that could potentially kill them. Currently management agencies do not allow petroleum

Updated 10/03/03 Page 4 PART II(A):4.2 Annual coral mass spawning Marine Community Monitoring Manual

CORAL SPAWN OPTIONAL METHODS If an underwater camera or video camera is available IDENTIFICATION it is a good idea to photograph or video some of the The following are excellent sources to assist in spawning corals. Refer to the information sheet for identifying corals, coral spawn and polychaete standard methods. If photographs or video footage worms. are taken the details should be recorded on the Data • CD-ROM - MARINE LIFE IN WESTERN AUSTRALIA; sheet 4.2. • INFORMATION SHEET 4.0; AND • INFORMATION SHEET 4.0: UNDERWATER PHOTOGRAPHY • PART IV SECTION 4.0: REFERENCES. AND VIDEO. WHEN TO MONITOR ITE SELECTION S This method only needs to be carried out during the Select sites: known mass coral spawning periods between mid- • where there is a significant amount of live coral March and mid-April. In Western Australia it occurs cover; mainly around 7-10 nights after the full moon in • that are easily accessible and in protected areas March (and sometimes April) on tropical reefs. At for safe night boating and diving; and Rottnest some corals have been recorded spawning • in less than five metres of water for safe diving. 14-15 nights after the full moon in March. Monitoring should be carried out between sunset and SITE DESCRIPTION 9:30pm when the majority of corals are most likely to spawn. The actual spawning times vary between This method does not require a Site registration different coral types. Coral reefs at the Abrolhos form to be completed, as observations are made on Islands tend to spawn an hour later. an opportunistic basis. Site details can be recorded on the Data sheet 4.2: It is important to note that the actual nights that • site name (reef name); corals on a particular reef spawn are dependent on a • site position in latitude and longitude (degrees, number of factors including: minutes and decimals of a minute); • height of reef in relation to chart datum (ie. • water depth; and intertidal or subtidal reef); and • coral species present. • PART III SECTION 2.0: SITE DESCRIPTION (ALL SUB- SECTIONS). A further complication is that spawning can be split over consecutive full moons ie. in both March and April. It appears that a split spawning only occurs HOW TO MONITOR once every three years. There is not much The following should be carried out: information on split spawning events. • select and arrive at the site while it is still light to become familiar with the site; • when the sun sets, divers should enter the water DATA COLLECTION AND and check the corals in the vicinity of the site to see whether they are about to spawn or are MANAGEMENT spawning; The data collected should be entered on Data Sheet • observers should re-enter the water and check 4.2. Data submitted to CALM will be entered in the the corals at 20 minute intervals up to 9:30pm Marine Community Monitoring Database. This or until spawning occurs; information can be compared to other observations • if spawning occurs record the following on around the State and in the long term will increase Data sheet 4.2: our understanding of spawning, such as the • time; variability at a site and between sites. • types of corals spawning (eg. digitate etc.); and • record the presence or absence of spawning ADDITIONAL NOTES polychaete worms (mainly very active red Please read the following and refer to the relevant worms from one to 15 cm long) or other sections: animals (eg. starfish, sea cucumbers). • this method requires participants to use either snorkel or SCUBA diving equipment. Participants should be suitably trained, qualified and take care in this hazardous environment; and

Updated 10/03/03 Page 5 PART II(A):4.2 Annual coral mass spawning Marine Community Monitoring Manual

• this method also requires participants to dive at night and participants should have suitable lighting, and experience. • coral reefs are susceptible to human impacts such as diver and anchor damage. • PART IV SECTION 2.0: SAFETY ISSUES • PART IV SECTION 3.0: BE ENVIRONMENTALLY SENITIVE WHEN MONITORING.

Updated 10/03/03 Page 6 PART II(A):4.2 Annual coral mass spawning Marine Community Monitoring Manual

4.3 CORAL SPAWN SLICKS

METHOD RATING 1

OBJECTIVE To monitor the location, extent, and frequency of coral spawn slicks in Western Australia.

BACKGROUND RELEVANCE TO MANAGEMENT Mass spawning of corals is one of the most Anecdotal reports of corals and other reef animals spectacular events in the yearly calendar of a coral dying in the vicinity of coral spawn slicks in reef and occurs between mid-March and mid-April. Western Australia suggest that this may be a A number of other reef invertebrate species also relatively common event on shallow coral reefs reproduce at the same time as corals. One of the where coral mass spawning occurs. Recording most common groups is polychaete worms. sightings of coral spawn slicks will help to: • better understand the vulnerability of coral reefs Mass spawning ensures successful reproduction. By to this natural event; spawning at the same time, colonies of one species • explain the community structure of vulnerable will maximise fertilisation while the simultaneous reefs; and spawning of many different species will ensure • identify areas vulnerable to deoxygenation and enough planulae survive by swamping predators which could effect fishing and aquaculture with an excess of food over a short period. Similarly, operations. spawning at night rather than during the day may be a clever way to minimise predation by animals, which need light to see their prey. LINKS TO OTHER The timing of the coral mass spawning in Western METHODS/PROGRAMS Australia coincides approximately with the This method is linked to: beginning of the flow of the Leeuwin Current, and • Method 4.2 Mass coral spawning. planulae may be swept southward to supply reefs further south with new corals. As a result, many coral reefs along the Western Australian coastline SUMMARY OF METHODOLOGY are biologically connected and the long-term survival of southern coral reefs, such as the Record the date, location and extent of coral spawn Abrolhos Islands, may depend on the health of reefs slicks observed after mass coral spawning. further north, for example, the Ningaloo Reef.

In most cases the spawn slick is carried out to sea by EQUIPMENT the ebbing current on the neap tide and the slick is NECESSARY not seen in areas close to the coast. Under certain • Data sheet 4.3; wind, wave and tidal conditions, this natural flushing • Information sheet 4.0; and is restricted, resulting in the retention of ‘slicks’ of • set of five nautical mile grid sheets for WA coral spawn in shallow waters near the coast. This (Refer to Part III section 3.0). happened in 1989 in Coral Bay and resulted in the death of over one million fish and extensive mortality of corals and other reef animals. OPTIONAL • GPS unit (Most effective means of determining In 1988 coral slicks at the Abrolhos Island drifted site position) (refer to Part III section 2.2); and into the shallow waters resulting in extensive • video camera or terrestrial camera (refer to Part mortality of lobsters in holding cages, and caused III section 3.6). major economic loss for the lobster fishers.

Updated 10/03/03 Page 7 PART II(A):4.3 Coral spawn slicks Marine Community Monitoring Manual

CORAL SPAWN SLICK OPTIONAL METHODS If a camera or video camera is available it is a good IDENTIFICATION idea to photograph or video the coral spawn slick. The following are excellent sources to assist in Refer to the information sheet for standard methods. identifying coral spawn slicks. It is important to note If photographs or video footage are taken, the details that the red algae Trichodesmium can form surface should be recorded on the Data sheet 4.3. blooms and may be confused with coral spawn • INFORMATION SHEET 3.4: UNDERWATER slicks. PHOTOGRAPHY AND VIDEO. • CD-ROM - MARINE LIFE IN WESTERN AUSTRALIA; • INFORMATION SHEET 4.0; AND WHEN TO MONITOR • PART IV SECTION 4.0: USEFUL REFERENCES. Coral spawn slicks can occur on the morning following mass coral spawning when wind and sea SITE SELECTION conditions are mild and onshore. Under these Coral spawn slicks occur near coral reefs conditions, coral spawn can be pushed towards the predominantly in shallow water following mass shore where it can accumulate in shallow water. coral spawning. Significant coral reefs are found from the Abrolhos Islands northward. Coral mass spawning occurs between mid-March and mid-April. In Western Australia it occurs mainly The following areas have been listed as priority around 10 nights after the full moon in March (and areas by management agencies for reporting the sometimes April) on tropical reefs, and two nights sightings of coral spawn slick: later on temperate reefs at the Abrolhos Islands. At • Abrolhos Islands; Rottnest some corals have been recorded spawning 14-15 nights after the full moon in March. • Ningaloo Reef; • Lowendal Islands; A further complication is that on some years • Barrow Island; spawning is split over consecutive full moons (ie. in • Monte Bello Islands; both March and April). It appears that split spawning • Rowley Shoals; and only occurs once every three years and little is • reefs off the Kimberley coast. known about split spawning events.

Coral spawn slicks can be sighted from the land, air or sea. DATA COLLECTION AND DATA MANAGEMENT ITE DESCRIPTION S The data collected should be entered on to Data This method does not require the selection of Sheet 4.3. Data submitted to CALM will be entered permanent re-locatable sites. Instead observations in the Marine Community Monitoring Database. are recorded whenever coral spawn slicks are observed. The following details should be recorded on the Data sheet 4.3: • five nautical mile grid reference; • site name (if known); • position in latitude and longitude (degrees, minutes and decimals of a minute); • ‘mud’ map indicating the location and extent of the coral spawn slick; • water depth; and • PART III SECTION 2.0 (ALL SUBSECTIONS)

HOW TO MONITOR If a coral spawn slick is observed from the land, air or sea, the following details should be recorded on Data Sheet 4.3: • the extent of the coral spawn slick (eg. small, medium or large).

Updated 10/03/03 Page 8 PART II(A):4.3 Coral spawn slicks Updated 10/03/03 Page 9 PART II(A):4.3 Coral spawn slicks Marine Community Monitoring Manual

PART II (A) DATA AND INFORMATION SHEETS (BIOLOGICAL)

5.0 SEAGRASS HEALTH

TABLE OF CONTENTS

5.1 DATA SHEET: SEAGRASS (PATCH REGENERATION) PAGE 1 5.2 DATA SHEET: SEAGRASS (MEADOW EDGE) PAGE 2 5.0 INFORMATION SHEET: SEAGRASS PAGE 3 AND 4

Page i 4 / / / (Please list)

OTHER (if no obvious epiphytes). 3 epiphytes). obvious no (if 3 ‘none’ ‘none’ / / / . E PART II (B): 5.1 Seagrass patch regeneration patch (B): 5.1 Seagrass PART II ense). 3 replicates. 3 ense).

ense); or ense); D reen) D POSIDONIA (eg. seasonally – every three months for a year). months – every three (eg. seasonally G B edium or edium rown or or rown edium or edium M B M 2 ed, / / / R parse, parse, parse, parse, S S ( ( C D

AMPHIBOLIS 1 inant colour epiphyte ( Page 1 / / /

SEAGRASS PATCH REGENERATION PATCH SEAGRASS ) C D E YY B

/ A A A A A A A A MM S E N W SE NE / SW NW DATE DATE 5.1 DENSITY DENSITY DD COLOUR EPIPHYTE EPIPHYTE SEAGRASS The datasheet has been designed to allow four monitoring dates monitoring four allow to designed been has datasheet The Record the density of seagrass in the quadrat Record the density of epiphytesseagrass on replicates. Record the dom replicates. Record the Marine Community Monitoring Manual ( MONITORING

OBSERVERS NAME • • • DOMINANT SEAGRASS SPECIES box) (Please tick ATA SHEET for details for D * * . A MCMP manual MCMP SITE DETAILS CONTACT DETAILS * REQUIRED OBSERVATIONS Record the distance (meters) from the centre from (meters) distance Record the of the for each patch of the the edge marker to bearings compass eight

PLEASE READ THIS SECTION BEFORE READ THIS SECTION PLEASE COMPLETING THE DATA SHEET. indata theFill sheet that every a site is time monitored. Refer to the GROUP NAME IDENTIFICATIONGROUP NUMBER Only* complete if you are registered with the MCMP. SITE NAME *Official or descriptive name. NUMBER SITE REGISTRATION form. registration Site * from • Updated 14/04/03 on the method. 4 / (Please list)

OTHER (if no obvious epiphytes). obvious no (if . The marker defines the initialdefines the . The marker A 3 ‘none’ ‘none’ / . E PART II (B): 5.2 Seagrass meadow edge meadow (B): 5.2 Seagrass PART II

ense). 3 replicates. 3 ense). reen) ense); or ense); D G D (eg. seasonally – every three months for a year). months – every three (eg. seasonally ) B POSIDONIA rown or or rown EDGE edium or edium B ( edium or edium 2 M M ed, / R parse, parse, parse, parse, S

S ( ( C D AMPHIBOLIS 1 / Page 2 decrease of seagrass meadow edge (cm) from the the marker from (cm) edge meadow seagrass of decrease

or SEAGRASS MEADOW A A ) ) A ) C D E CM YY CM B ( (

/ MM 5.2 / DATE DATE DENSITY DENSITY DD COLOUR EPIPHYTE SEAGRASS EPIPHYTE ( NO CHANGE MONITORING (please tick box) (please tick INCREASE Record the increase Record the dates monitoring four allow to designed been has datasheet The Record the density of seagrass in the quadrat Record the density of epiphytesseagrass on colour ( epiphyte dominant the replicates. Record 3 edge of the seagrass meadow. seagrass of the edge DECREASE OBSERVERS NAME DOMINANT SEAGRASS SPECIES box) (Please tick

Marine Community Monitoring Manual • • • • ATA SHEET D “_” decrease * * for detailson the method. SITE DETAILS CONTACT DETAILS MCMP manual * “+” increase PLEASE READ THIS SECTION BEFORE READ THIS SECTION PLEASE COMPLETING THE DATA SHEET. datasheet that every a site is monitored. thein time Fill the Refer to GROUP NAME IDENTIFICATIONGROUP NUMBER Only* complete if registeredMCMP. with the SITE NAME * Official or descriptive name NUMBER SITE REGISTRATION form registration Site * from Updated 14/04/03 ,

Red depending on the dominant the on depending epiphytes are beginning to beginning are epiphytes PART II (B): 5.0 Information sheet Information 5.0 (B): PART II the seagrass is dominant, seagrass is with onlythe the seagrass meadow is beginning to beginning is meadow seagrass the – Predominantly epiphytes, with the Brown the sandy substratedominant,with is – record as sparse, medium or dense. medium sparse, as – record - record the dominant colour of the colour dominant - record the – Predominantly seagrass meadow, with meadow, seagrass – Predominantly or or . 2) – no obvious epiphytes on the surface. on the no obvious epiphytes – – record as sparse, medium or dense. medium sparse, as – record RECORDING SEAGRASS DENSITY SEAGRASS RECORDING OF COLOUR DENSITY epiphytes present on seagrass. Select either on seagrass. epiphytes present Green colour None – (S) Sparse visible. epiphytes of patches (M) – Medium cover). 50% > (eg.becoming seagrass the dominate Dense (D) visible, if at all. barely seagrass 1 RECORDING EPIPHYTES ON SEAGRASS EPIPHYTES RECORDING

DENSITY (S) – Sparse seagrass. patchy only (M) – Medium > becoming (eg. substrate sandy the over dominate cover). 50% Dense (D) all. at if visible, sand of patches small only Epiphytes grow on seagrass, whereuse they the dominant most The a substrate. as shoots seagrass the You can record seaweed. are epiphytes on seagrass epiphytes seaweed of DENSITY and COLOUR on seagrass. growing 1. 2. PAGE ( E E ) E N S N S SEAGRASS is has been achieved the been achieved is has MEADOW EDGE ( NW SW Page 3 W MEADOW 5.0 SEAGRASS 5.2 DEFINING THE EDGE OF SEAGRASS picket. The angular profileangularThepicket. of the picket should preventdisk the turning. from other compass bearing directions can be read off the be read off can directions bearing compass other are disk’. When completed measurements ‘compass removed. simply is disk’ ‘compass the Each time that thethat ‘compass disk’ used has is first time to it Each north it’s that so compass real a using orientated be Once th north. arrow points disk place Hole to picket star over Compass disk edge the identify to able being on relies method This be sometimes This can meadow. of the seagrass In edge. defined not be a clearly may as there difficult, will becase therebeyond scattered seagrasses most be should edge The bed. seagrass the of bulk the defined as the point at which the last of these scattered figure. the following to Refer occur. seagrasses Marine Community Monitoring Manual NFORMATION SHEET I e eight compass directions eight compass e PATCH ‘COMPASS DISK’ SEAGRASS PATCH REGENERATION 5.1 Edge of Seagrass Bed of Seagrass Edge DEFINING THE EDGE OF SEAGRASS This method relies on being able to identify the edge the identify to able being on relies method This of the seagrass patch. This can sometimes be difficult, defined edge. In a clearly most not be may as there willthere be scattered case beyond seagrasses the bulk as the defined be should edge The bed. seagrass the of whichpointat the last of these scattered seagrasses figure. following to the Refer occur. disk’ is an A ‘compass effective way determine to the A ‘compass bearings. compass eight of the direction plastic (eg. icecream of a round piece basically it disk’ th has that lid) container onwritten it like a dial.compass The centre of the diskout is cut so that it slips over the top of a star Updated 14/04/03 . , CSIRO, Division of Division , CSIRO, , CSIRO, Division of Division , CSIRO, Seagrasses: Information Seagrasses: Seagrasses: Information on Information Seagrasses: Ephemeral seagrass Ephemeral Perennial seagrass. Perennial PART II (B): 5.0 Information sheet Information 5.0 (B): PART II sp. (Figure from: from: (Figure sp. sp. (Figure from: from: (Figure sp. Fisheries brochure). brochure). Fisheries Zostera of the environment part a key Posidonia environment part of the on a key Fisheries brochure). brochure). Fisheries . . , CSIRO, Division of Division , CSIRO, Seagrasses: Information Seagrasses: , CSIRO, Division of Division , CSIRO, Seagrasses: Information on Information Seagrasses: Page 4 Perennial seagrass Perennial seagrass Perennial sp. (Figure from: from: (Figure sp. from: . (Figure

Marine Community Monitoring Manual Amphibolis environment part of the on a key brochure). Fisheries Amphibolis a key part of the environment part a key brochure). Fisheries , CSIRO, Division of Division , CSIRO, Seagrasses: Information Seagrasses: epiphytes on seagrass.Epiphyte Ephemeral seagrass. Ephemeral 2) brown . OF COMMON SEAGRASSES 2 sp. (Figure from: from: (Figure sp. dense (D) Photograph DCLM (MCB) PAGE ( density is Photograph showing Halophila environment part of the on a key Updated 14/04/03 Fisheries brochure). brochure). Fisheries PART II (B): 5.0 Information sheet Information 5.0 (B): PART II Page 5

Marine Community Monitoring Manual Updated 14/04/03 Marine Community Monitoring Manual

PART II (A) METHODS (BIOLOGICAL)

5.0 SEAGRASS HEALTH

TABLE OF CONTENTS

5.1 SEAGRASS PATCH REGENERATION PAGE 1 TO 3 5.2 SEAGRASS MEADOW (EDGE) PAGE 4 TO 6

Page i Marine Community Monitoring Manual

5.1 SEAGRASS PATCH REGENERATION

METHOD RATING 0 0 0

OBJECTIVE To monitor the recovery of remanent seagrass patches in areas where seagrass loss has occurred.

The density and composition of algal epiphytes may vary in response to seasonal, annual and human BACKGROUND influences. The Western Australian coastline supports about 20,000 square kilometres of some of the most diverse assemblages of seagrasses in the world. RELEVANCE TO MANAGEMENT More seagrass species are found off the southern Seagrasses around Western Australia are generally Western Australian coastline than anywhere else in in good condition except for Albany’s harbours, Australia. These seagrasses have adapted to the Cockburn Sound and parts of Geographe Bay. clear, nutrient-poor waters along our south west Cockburn Sound is the most degraded marine coast, the result of a dry climate and low sediment environment in Western Australia, having and nutrient input from our few rivers. experienced the second largest loss of seagrass in Australia (80 per cent). Albany’s Princess Royal and Healthy seagrasses are highly productive. Each year, Oyster harbours have lost only slightly less they can produce as much organic matter, or seagrasses than Cockburn Sound. In Western potential food, as a similar area of tropical Australia seagrasses have died from nutrient rainforest. Seagrass meadows are also important enrichment (nitrogen) from industrial discharge, nurseries for many animals such as fish and crabs. domestic sewage and agricultural discharges. Many of the fish species in temperate waters of Western Australia depend on seagrass meadows at Seagrass meadows: some stage of their life cycle. If these meadows are • are a critical part of the ecosystem in temporal destroyed, fish populations are likely to suffer. Western Australia because they are primary producers and are extensive; As well as their biological role, the roots and rhizomes of seagrass plants protect sediments from • are vulnerable to nutrient enrichment and erosion by waves and currents in much the same seagrass loss can occur very quickly; and way as plants on land protect soil from erosion. But • once lost, do not return for many years. as seagrass meadows decline, waves and currents Long-term monitoring of remanent seagrass more readily stir up sediments, often resulting in meadows will help to determine: changes to the shoreline and beaches. The water • rates of recovery of seagrass meadows; and becomes murky, reducing the light available to the • rates of recovery of different species of surviving seagrasses. perennial seagrasses such as Amphibolis spp., Seagrass death may be caused by light starvation Posidonia spp., Zostera spp. due to excessive amounts of algae (often epiphytic) In addition, monitoring the epiphytic component will shading the seagrass. If the water becomes enriched provide useful information on the presence or with nutrients, such as nitrogen, algae can grow absence of epiphytes at particular sites. If the rapidly and starve other plants of light. This is what seagrass is monitored regularly natural seasonal and happened in Cockburn Sound and Albany’s harbours annual variations may be recorded. where large areas of seagrasses died. In addition to these natural variations epiphyte Epiphytes form a natural part of seagrass densities may also vary in response to increased ecosystems. Epiphytes include any living organisms nutrients. Some species of green and brown algae that grow on the surface of seagrass. Algal are opportunistic and fast growing and may (seaweed) epiphytes are generally the most abundant dominate seagrass meadows in areas of increased and diverse organism on seagrass. Other epiphytes nutrient inputs. Seaweed epiphytes on seagrass may may include small filter feeding animals, such as vary from filamentous brown algae that appear as a hydroids or ‘sea tulips’. fuzzy layer over the seagrass, to large, fleshy red algae, to small calcareous algae.

Updated 23/04/03 Page 1 Part II (A): 5.1 Seagrass Patch Regeneration Marine Community Monitoring Manual

LINKS TO OTHER METHOD/S SITE DESCRIPTION Once a site is established the Site registration form & PROGRAM/S should be completed and submitted to CALM to This method is linked to: obtain a Site registration number. This should be • METHOD 2.1 WATER CLARITY; recorded along with the site name on all Data sheets. • METHOD 4.2 SEAGRASS MEADOW (EDGE); AND The following details need to be recorded on Site • METHOD 3.0 MARINE HABITATS registration form: • five nautical mile grid reference number; SUMMARY OF METHODOLOGY • site name; • Measure the dimensions of a seagrass patch • site position in latitude and longitude (degrees, from a fixed central point; and minutes and decimals of a minute); • Record the presence/absence of seaweed • ‘mud’ map indicating location and shape of the epiphytes growing on the seagrass shoots. seagrass patch; • water depth; and QUIPMENT • PART III SECTION 2.0: SITE DESCRIPTION (ALL E SUBSECTION). NECESSARY • snorkelling or SCUBA equipment; HOW TO MONITOR • underwater slate; • Site registration form; ESTABLISHING A MONITORING SITE The following should be carried out when the site is • Data sheet 5.1; visited/monitored for the first time: • Information sheet 5.1; • select a discreet seagrass patch that is less than • set of five nautical mile grid sheets (refer to Part five metres in diameter; VI); • indicate the seagrass patch location and shape • heavy weight with attached buoy (eg. approx. on the mud map on the Site registration form; 15 kg railway iron); • determine the centre of the seagrass patch; and • 50 metre fibreglass measuring tape (refer to Part • permanently mark the centre of the seagrass III section 3.2); and 2 patch by using a heavy weight (eg. a railway • 0.25 m quadrat. iron, about 15 kg) with a buoy attached. Use a strong rope and shackles (to minimise fraying in OPTIONAL the rope) to attach the buoy to the weight. • AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHS (REFER TO PART III SECTION 1.0); AND MEASURING SEAGRASS PATCH SIZE AND • GPS unit (Most effective means of determining DENSITY site position) (refer to Part III section 2.2). The following should be carried out during subsequent visits/ monitoring of the seagrass patch: SEAGRASS IDENTIFICATION • re-locate the seagrass patch (weighted marker with buoy attached) by referring to the Site This method requires the identification of perennial Registration form; seagrasses. Perennial seagrasses are large, meadow • measure and record on Data sheet 5.1 the forming seagrass (eg. Posidonia spp and Amphibolis distance (in metres to the nearest centimetre) spp). The following are excellent sources to assist in between the star picket and the edge of the identifying seagrasses. seagrass patch along eight compass bearings (N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, and NW); • CD-ROM - MARINE LIFE IN WESTERN AUSTRALIA; • record the density of the seagrass. Randomly • INFORMATION SHEET 5.0; AND drop the quadrat on the seagrass patch and • PART III SECTION 4.0: USEFUL REFERENCES. record the density within the quadrat as sparse, medium or dense. Repeat three times. Seagrass SITE SELECTION density definitions are provided on Information Select sites that have discrete remanent seagrass sheet 5.0. Epiphytes growing on seagrass can be patches (up to five metres in diameter) in water monitored at the same time (Please refer to the bodies such as Cockburn Sound, Albany’s harbours next section). and Geographe Bay. • INFORMATION SHEET 5.0: DEFINING THE EDGE OF THE SEAGRASS PATCH. • INFORMATION SHEET 5.0; AND • AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHS (PART III SECTION 1.0 AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHS).

Updated 23/04/03 Page 2 Part II (A): 5.1 Seagrass Patch Regeneration Marine Community Monitoring Manual

EPIPHYTES ON SEAGRASS ADDITIONAL NOTES Record the presence (including density and colour) Please read the following and refer to the relevant or absence of seaweed epiphytes growing on the sections: seagrass. • this method requires participants to use either snorkel or SCUBA diving equipment. Randomly drop the quadrat on the seagrass patch Participants should be suitably trained, qualified and record the density of epiphytes on the seagrass and take care in this hazardous environment; (and within the quadrat) as sparse, medium or dense. • this method involves the installation of a star Repeat three times. Epiphyte density definitions are picket. Star pickets can pose a safety hazard and provided on Information sheet 5.0. Epiphytes on prior to their installation it is essential that seagrass can be monitored at the same time as observers read the safety section; seagrass density (Please refer to the previous section). • PART III SECTION 2.0 SAFETY ISSUES; AND • PART III SECTION 3.0: BE ENVIRONMENTALLY SENITIVE The most dominant epiphytes on seagrass are WHEN MONITORING. usually seaweed and they can be red, green or brown in colour. Animals (invertebrates) can also be epiphytic on seagrass (eg. sea tulips and bryozoans), although these will NOT be monitored as part of the epiphytic component. • INFORMATION SHEET 5.0.

OPTIONAL METHODS If an underwater camera or video camera is available it is a good idea to photograph or video the seagrass patch and central marker, in addition to the surface of the seagrass (ie. as a record of epiphyte biomass, if present). Refer to the information sheet for standard methods. If photographs or video footage are taken the details should be recorded on the Data sheet 5.1.

WHEN TO MONITOR Ideally try and monitor the seagrass seasonally. Data sheet 5.1 has provisions for four monitoring dates. As a minimum monitor once a year, in which case the data sheet will contain four years data.

DATA COLLECTION AND DATA MANAGEMENT The data collected should be entered on to Data sheet 5.1. Data submitted to CALM will be entered in the Marine Community Monitoring Database. Data updates will be available on the MCMP home page, comparing information generated within and between sites.

Long- term monitoring of re-locatable seagrass meadows is encouraged for each registered site, this will enable comparisons with previous monitoring events and also comparisons with other projects looking at seagrass health around the State.

Updated 23/04/03 Page 3 Part II (A): 5.1 Seagrass Patch Regeneration Marine Community Monitoring Manual

5.2 SEAGRASS MEADOW (EDGE)

METHOD RATING 0 0 0

OBJECTIVE To monitor the health of seagrass meadows at 'impact' and 'control' sites in WA.

The density and composition of algal epiphytes may vary in response to seasonal, annual and BACKGROUND human influences. The Western Australian coastline supports about 20,000 square kilometres of some of the most diverse assemblages of seagrasses in the world. RELEVANCE TO MANAGEMENT More seagrass species are found off the southern Seagrasses around Western Australia are generally Western Australian coastline than anywhere else in in good condition except for Albany’s harbours, Australia. These seagrasses have adapted to the Cockburn Sound and parts of Geographe Bay. clear, nutrient-poor waters along our south west Cockburn Sound is the most degraded marine coast, the result of a dry climate and low sediment environment in Western Australia, having and nutrient input from our few rivers. experienced the second largest loss of seagrass in Australia (80 per cent). Albany’s Princess Royal Healthy seagrasses are highly productive. Each and Oyster harbours have lost only slightly less year, they can produce as much organic matter, or seagrasses than Cockburn Sound. In Western potential food, as a similar area of tropical Australia seagrasses have died from nutrient rainforest. Seagrass meadows are also important enrichment (nitrogen) from industrial discharge, nurseries for many animals such as fish and crabs. domestic sewage and agricultural discharges. Many of the fish species in temperate waters of Western Australia depend on seagrass meadows at Seagrass meadows: some stage of their life cycle. If these meadows are • are a critical part of the ecosystem in temporal destroyed, fish populations are likely to suffer. Western Australia because they are primary producers and are extensive; As well as their biological role, the roots and rhizomes of seagrass plants protect sediments from • are vulnerable to nutrient enrichment and erosion by waves and currents in much the same seagrass loss can occur very quickly; and way as plants on land protect soil from erosion. But • once lost, do not return for many years. as seagrass meadows decline, waves and currents more readily stir up sediments, often resulting in Long-term monitoring of remanent seagrass changes to the shoreline and beaches. The water meadows will help to determine: becomes murky, reducing the light available to the • rates of recovery of seagrass meadows; and surviving seagrasses. • rates of recovery of different species of perennial seagrasses such as Amphibolis spp., Seagrass death may be caused by light starvation Posidonia spp., Zostera spp. due to excessive amounts of algae (often epiphytic) shading the seagrass. If the water becomes enriched In addition, monitoring the epiphytic component with nutrients, such as nitrogen, algae can grow will provide useful information on the presence or rapidly and starve other plants of light. This is what absence of epiphytes at particular sites. If the happened in Cockburn Sound and Albany’s seagrass is monitored regularly natural seasonal and harbours where large areas of seagrasses died. annual variations may be recorded. Epiphytes form a natural part of seagrass In addition to these natural variations epiphyte ecosystems. Epiphytes include any living densities may also vary in response to increased organisms that grow on the surface of seagrass. nutrients. Some species of green and brown algae Algal (seaweed) epiphytes are generally the most are opportunistic and fast growing and may abundant and diverse organism on seagrass. Other dominate seagrass meadows in areas of increased epiphytes may include small filter feeding animals, nutrient inputs. Seaweed epiphytes on seagrass may such as hydroids or ‘sea tulips’. vary from filamentous brown algae that appear as a

Updated 23/04/03 Page 4 Part II (A): 5.2 Seagrass meadow (edge) fuzzy layer over the seagrass, to large, fleshy red algae, to small calcareous algae. SITE SELECTION Select perennial seagrass meadows that have a distinct edge, whether it is on the shallowest or LINKS TO OTHER METHOD/S deepest edge of the meadow. Remember that seagrasses growing at their greatest depth are the & PROGRAM/S most vulnerable to a reduction in light. This method is linked to: • METHOD 2.1 WATER QUALITY; Select 'impact' sites (i.e. in close proximity to a pollution source or boat channel) or 'control' site • METHOD 5.1 SEAGRASS PATCH REGENERATION; AND (away from any human disturbance). • METHOD 3.0 MARINE HABITATS. If individuals/groups do not know of any such sites, SUMMARY OF METHODOLOGY they should: • liase with local users (eg. dive operators) to • Measure from a fixed point the movement of identify sites; the edge of seagrass meadow at ‘impact’ and • use aerial photographs to identify sites (Part III ‘control’ sites; and section 1.0 Aerial Photographs). • Record the presence/absence of seaweed • visit and dive a variety of areas with the epiphytes growing on the seagrass shoots. objective of identifying sites.

EQUIPMENT SITE DESCRIPTION NECESSARY Once a site is established the Site registration form • snorkelling or SCUBA equipment; (Part I: ‘Starting Up’) should be completed and • heavy weight with attached buoy (eg. approx. submitted to obtain a Site registration number. This 15 kg railway iron); should be recorded, along with the site name, on all • 50 metre fibreglass tape (refer to Part III Data sheets for that site. section 3.2); The following details need to be recorded on Site • water proof paper or underwater slate; registration form 5.2: • Site registration form; • the five nautical mile grid reference; • Data Sheet 5.2; • the site name; • Information sheet 5.2; • the site position in latitude and longitude • 0.25 m2 quadrat; and (degrees and decimals of a minute); • set of five nautical mile grid sheets for WA • detailed ‘mud’ map indicating position of the (refer to Part VI). seagrass edge; • water depth; and • PART III SECTION 2.0 SITE DESCRIPTION (ALL OPTIONAL • GPS unit (Most effective means of determining SUBSECTIONS). site position) (refer to Part III section 2.2); • underwater camera; and HOW TO MONITOR • AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHS, PART III sECTION 1.0. ESTABLISHING A MONITORING SITE The following should be carried out when the site is SEAGRASS IDENTIFICATION visited/ monitored for the first time: This method requires the identification of perennial • identify the dominant perennial seagrass (eg. seagrasses. Perennial seagrasses are large, meadow Posidonia sp, Amphiblois sp ); forming seagrass (eg. Posidonia spp and • determine the deepest edge of the meadow; Amphibolis spp). The following are excellent • permanently mark the edge of the seagrass sources to assist in identifying seagrasses. meadow using a heavy weight, with a buoy attached. • CD-ROM - MARINE LIFE IN WESTERN AUSTRALIA; • indicate the location of the marker on a ‘mud’ • INFORMATION SHEET 5.0; AND map on the Site registration form. • PART III SECTION 4.0: USEFUL REFERENCES. • INFORMATION SHEET 5.0: DEFINING THE EDGE OF THE SEAGRASS MEADOW.

Updated 23/04/03 Page 5 Part II (A): 5.2 Seagrass meadow (edge) MONITORING SEAGRASS MEADOW EDGE AND WHEN TO MONITOR DENSITY Ideally try and monitor the seagrass seasonally. The following should be carried out: Data sheet 5.2 has provisions for four Monitoring • re-locate the site (marked with a weight and Dates. As a minimum monitor once a year, in attached buoy or a star picket) by referring to which case the data sheet will contain four years the Site registration form; data. • determine the edge of the seagrass meadow; and ATA COLLECTION AND • measure the distance from the marker to the D edge of the seagrass meadow. Record the DATA MANAGEMENT measurement to the nearest centimetre and indicate whether it is a positive or negative The data collected should be entered on to Data change. sheet 5.2. Data submitted to CALM will be entered • Record the density of the seagrass. Randomly in the Marine Community Monitoring Database. drop the quadrat in the area between the star Data updates will be available on the MCMP home picket (marker) and the shallow end of the page, comparing information generated within and seagrass meadow edge and record the density between sites. within the quadrat as sparse, medium or dense. Repeat three times. Seagrass density Long- term monitoring of re-locatable seagrass definitions are provided on Information sheet meadows is encouraged for each registered site, this 5.0. Epiphytes growing on seagrass can be will enable comparisons with previous monitoring monitored at the same time (Please refer to the events and also comparisons with other projects next section). looking at seagrass health around the State.

EPIPHYTES ON SEAGRASS Record the presence (including density and colour) ADDITIONAL NOTES or absence of seaweed epiphytes growing on the Please read the following and refer to the relevant seagrass. sections: Randomly drop the quadrat in the area between the • this method requires participants to use either star picket (marker) and the shallow end of the snorkel or SCUBA diving equipment. seagrass meadow edge and record the density of Participants should be suitably trained, epiphytes on the seagrass (and within the quadrat) qualified and take care in this hazardous as sparse, medium or dense. Repeat three times. environment; and Epiphyte density definitions are provided on • this method involves the installation of a star Information sheet 5.0. Epiphytes on seagrass can be picket. Star pickets can pose a safety hazard monitored at the same time as seagrass density and prior to their installation it is essential that (Please refer to the previous section). observers read the safety section. • PART III SECTION 2.0: SAFETY ISSUES; AND The most dominant epiphytes on seagrass are • PART III SECTION 3.0: BE ENVIRONMENTALLY usually seaweed and they can be red, green or SENITIVE WHEN MONITORING. brown in colour. Animals (invertebrates) can also be epiphytic on seagrass (eg. sea tulips and bryozoans), although these will NOT be monitored as part of the epiphytic component. • INFORMATION SHEET 5.0: SEAGRASS EPIPHYTES.

OPTIONAL METHODS If an underwater camera or video camera is available it is a good idea to photograph or video the edge of the seagrass meadow, in addition to the surface of the seagrass (ie. as a record of epiphyte biomass, if present). Refer to the information sheet for standard methods. If photographs or video footage are taken the details should be recorded on the Data sheet 5.2.

Updated 23/04/03 Page 6 Part II (A): 5.2 Seagrass meadow (edge) PART II (B) DATA AND INFORMATION SHEETS (BIOLOGICAL)

6.0 FISH MONITORING

TABLE OF CONTENTS

6.1 DATA SHEET: TEMPERATE FISH SPECIES PAGE 1 AND 2

Page i > 20 ) 11 - 20 s the species was not sighted. species s the 6 - 10 NUMBER OF INDIVIDUALS 2) ( PART II (B): 6.1 Temperate fish species fish (B): 6.1 Temperate PART II TARGET SPECIES OF 1 2 - 5 ABUNDANCE PAGE ( categories. A blank space mean categories. 1 ) REQUIRED OBSERVATIONS – REQUIRED OBSERVATIONS SEADRAGON ) WESTERN ( Page 1 COMMON ( LINED HULA FISH - LIPPED MOORWONG - COMMON NAME COMMON BLUE GROPER BALD CHIN GROPER KING GEORGEWHITING WESTERN ROCK BLACKFISH MCCOLLOUGHS SCALY FIN HORSESHOE LEATHERJACKET WESTERN BLUE DEVIL RED WESTERN BUFFALO BREAM WRASSE WESTERN KING RED STRIPED CARDINAL FISH PULLER HEADED BLACK BLUE WESTERN WIRRAH WEEDY SHARK JACKSON PORT TEMPERATE FISH SPECIES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Marine Community Monitoring Program Marine Community Record the abundance of each species sighted using the given the given using sighted each species of the abundance Record 6.1 . S E . NO . * NO . GPS : (Tick ATA SHEET D 24 hour clock 24 hour clock

* If GPS, use DATUM WGS 84* WGS use DATUM If GPS, Marine Community Monitoring LONG DETERMINED LONG / SITE DETAILS CHART CONTACT DETAILS AND DATE AND CONTACT DETAILS for details on the method. the on details for NAUTICAL PLEASE READ THIS SECTION BEFORE READ THIS SECTION PLEASE COMPLETING THE DATA SHEET. datasheet that every a divethein time site is Fill visited. Refer to the Manual GROUP NAMEOnly* complete if you are registered with the MCMP DATE GROUP REG DD / MM / YY SITE NAME form registration Site * from TIME LATITUDE AND LONGITUDE REG SITE WASHOW THE LAT Updated 14/04/03 applicable box) applicable DATA SHEET 6.1 TEMPERATE FISH SPECIES (PAGE 2 OF 2)

List additional species at the site observed during your fish swim, recording the common name. OPTIONAL OBSERVATIONS

OPTIONAL OBSERVATIONS – SPECIES LIST

WATER VISABILITY (metres) COMMON NAME COMMON NAME COMMON NAME DID YOU USE THE: YES NO TARGET SPECIES ID CARD?

Please tick the appropriate box.

COMMENTS Eg. habitat type (seagrass, reef, bare sand etc.) or other comments.

Updated 14/04/03 Page 2 PART II (B): 6.1 Temperate fish species Updated 14/04/03 Page 3 PART II (B): 6.1 Temperate fish species Marine Community Monitoring Manual

PART II (A) METHODS (BIOLOGICAL)

6.0 MONITORING FISH

TABLE OF CONTENTS

6.1 TEMPERATE FISH SPECIES ...... PAGE 1 TO 4

Updated 14/04/03 Page i PART II (A): 6.1 Temperate Fish Species Marine Community Monitoring Manual

6.1 TEMPERATE FISH SPECIES

METHOD RATING 0 0

OBJECTIVES To monitor temperate locations between Kalbarri and Esperence and record target fish species: • on a regular basis throughout the year and for successive years; and • at two sites (preferably).

recording all species observed at the site. These optional observations are intended for divers with BACKGROUND extensive knowledge of temperate fish species and The purpose of this monitoring program is to an ability to identify and correctly name the various identify and record target fish species at relocatable species. sites between Kalbarri and Esperence, recording their presence (and abundance) or absence. The When monitoring fish, it is important to remember target species were carefully selected and represent that the species recorded on successive visits to a fish that are: site may vary for numerous reasons. These variables may be due to natural or human influences and will • prized by recreational fishers, or are species be described in greater detail below. It is important targeted by commercial aquarium collectors, to understand these factors as they may influence and / or. how you monitor and therefore the species that you • common to either the south coast or west coast see and ultimately record: of Western Australia and / or • endemic to Western Australia, which means NATURAL INFLUENCES they are found no where else in the world. a) Daily fish movements – many fish exhibit daily movements, onshore and offshore, or vertically The species selected for monitoring are listed below: from shallow to deeper water. b) Seasonal distribution patterns – Some species Target species list have a large geographical range, moving at length along the coast, often in response to 1 Blue groper (Western) changing water temperatures and other environmental conditions. 2 Bald chin groper c) Inter-annual distribution patterns – the 3 King George whiting behaviour and biology of many species may 4 Western rock blackfish vary in response to environmental conditions, 5 McColloughs scaly fin which may vary between years (eg. El nino 6 Horseshoe leatherjacket and La nina events or the strength of ocean currents). In W.A the Leeuwin Current is 7 Western blue devil responsible for the distribution of tropical 8 Red-lipped morwong species to more temperate waters, especially in 9 Western buffalo bream the winter months when the fect is strongest. 10 Western king wrasse d) Habitats and fish diversity – different habitats attract different species of fish (eg. a shallow 11 Red striped cardinal fish inter-tidal rocky reef will have a different array 12 Black headed puller of fish species to a deep sub-tidal rocky reef in 13 Blue-lined hula fish the same area). 14 Western Wirrah e) Environmental conditions – Water visibility 15 Weedy (common) seadragon should be high when monitoring. If sediments are churned up and visibility is minimal there 16 Port Jackson shark is no point in monitoring.

In addition to monitoring target species, there is also an option to develop a species list for your site,

Updated 14/04/03 Page i PART II (A): 6.1 Temperate Fish Species Marine Community Monitoring Manual

HUMAN INFLUENCS EQUIPMENT a) Fish identifications – your level of experience NECESSARY with temperate fish species will influence your • SCUBA equipment; observations and the species list compiled. • underwater paper or slate (refer to Part III b) Monitoring activities – the protocols you section 3.1); employ to monitor will effect the species • Site registration form; observed and therefore your recorded • Data sheet 6.1; observations (eg. lots of activity, splashing and • Information sheet 6.0; and even boat motors will deter some species from a site). • set of five nautical mile grid sheets for WA a) Human activities – dredging, runoff, over (Refer to Part VI); and fishing and pollution may impact an area and • Watch to record the duration of your swim. have an adverse effect on the fish species OPTIONAL present. • GPS unit (Most effective means of determining site position) (Refer to Part III section 2.2). All of these influences will contribute to the species present at the site, at the time you monitor. This FISH IDENTIFICATION highlights the importance of conducting surveys consistently and in the long term, to reduce the • FISH IDENTIFICATION – MARINE LIFE IN WESTERN influence of some of these variables on the outcomes AUSTRALIA: AN IDENTIFICATION GUIDE TO COMMON of your monitoring. MARINE PLANTS AND ANIMALS; AND • PART V : USEFUL REFERENCES. RELEVANCE TO MANAGEMENT ITE SELECTION The information collected by community groups will S contribute to our knowledge of the presence (and This method is applicable to temperate locations abundance) or absence of target species at specific between Kalbarri and Esperence. The selected and localised, coastal locations. A long- term species live within different habitat types, within this monitoring project will enable changes to be geographical range, so it is important that all habitats detected over time and with group’s colleting at your site are included in the fish swim. information from various temperate regions, comparisons can be made around the State. On the Site registration form you can record whether the site is a ‘control’ or ‘impact’ site. It is important to fill in data sheets every time you monitor, even if none of the listed target species are sighted. SITE DESCRIPTION Once a site is established fill in a Site registration form (Part I: ‘Starting Up’) and submit this to LINKS TO OTHER METHOD/S CALM to obtain a Site registration number. This should be recorded, along with the site name, on all & PROGRAM/S Data sheets for the site. This method links in with 3.0 Mapping the seabed, The following details need to be recorded on the Site to help you develop a ‘fish swim’ that takes into registration form: account all habitats at your site. • five nautical mile grid reference; • site name; SUMMARY OF METHODOLOGY • site position in latitude and longitude (degrees, minutes and decimals of a minute); You will conduct a ‘Fish swim’ of between 20 and • Control or impact site; 30 minutes and record the presence (and abundance) or absence of the listed species. The course you • ‘mud’ map, indicating the location of the swim will follow a pre-determined route, to monitoring site and associated habitats within encompass all habitats at the site (including; under AND the draw in the predetermined course of reef ledges, amongst seagrass, around bommies and your ‘Fish swim’; over bare sand). Please refer to the method, 3.0 • water depth; and Mapping the seabed, for information on how to • PART III SECTION 2: SITE DESCRIPTION (ALL SUB- recognise and identify different habitats at your site. SECTIONS). Marine Community Monitoring Manual

c) Inter- annual distribution patterns - try and HOW TO MONITOR monitor the same site over a number of years. REQUIRED OBSERVATIONS – TARGET SPECIES d) Habitats and fish diversity - when you develop The methodology for monitoring temperate fish is your ‘Fish swim’, swim over all habitats very simple, as outlined in the following two points. identified and when returning to the site 1. Fish swim (20 – 30 minutes) maintain the same route each time. As you swim remember to look under ledges for those • Route - develop a pre-determined course to cryptic, shy species. swim, taking into account the different habitats and water depth which characterise your e) Environmental conditions – monitor when selected site. Most importantly, monitoring conditions are favourable (eg. minimal swell should start and end at the same point and and wind chop) and when water visibility is encompass the same habitats each time the site high. is monitored. • Duration - make sure the fish swim lasts the HUMAN INFLUENCES same duration each time you monitor (eg. 15, 20 a) Fish identification – use available resources to or 25 minutes). SWIM SLOWLY and LOOK assist with fish identifications. CLOSELY within and around all habitats (eg. under ledges, amongst seaweed etc.) to increase b) Monitoring activities - try and be consistent in your chances of viewing as many species as your approach to monitoring and your possible. recording methods. For example: minimise activity in the water until you actually start 2. Required observations - Target species: monitoring, and be consistent with your Fish Focus on correctly identifying the listed target Swim (starting point, finishing point and route species. Use the temperate fish information taken). sheet to assist with identifications (Information Sheet 6.0). c) Human activities – Where human impacts are evident, a site can be monitored as an impact Record target fish abundance using the site (likewise a site with no obvious impacts following categories: can be monitored as a control site). a) 1 individual b) 2 to 5 HEN TO MONITOR c) 6 to 10 W d) 11 to 20 Sites should be monitored on a regular basis to e) >20 individuals detect possible seasonal trends and/or natural variability.

OPTIONAL OBSERVATIONS – OTHER SPECIES Please refer back to the How to monitor section and The optional observations are reserved for read the handy hints provided to help decide when to individuals with a keen interest and extensive monitor. knowledge of local fish diversity. The intent is to develop a species list for your site, identifying all fish seen during your timed fish swim. There is no DATA COLLECTION AND need to record abundance. MANAGEMENT Only record species on the data sheet if you have seen them and are 100% certain of correctly The data collected should be entered on to Data identifying the species. sheet 6.1. Data submitted to CALM will be entered into the Marine Community Monitoring Database. Data updates will be available on the MCMP home HANDY HINTS WHEN MONITORING FISH page, comparing information generated within and Handy hints to assist with monitoring fish have been between sites. provided below. The handy hints are provided to minimise some of the variability encountered when Long- term monitoring of temperate fish is monitoring fish, as described on page one. encouraged for each registered site, this will enable NATURAL INFLUENCES comparisons with previous monitoring events and also comparisons with other projects looking at a) Daily fish movements – try and monitor at the temperate fish around the State. same time of day when you monitor the site. b) Seasonal distribution patterns - try and monitor at least once in Spring, Summer, Autumn and Winter. Marine Community Monitoring Manual

ADDITIONAL NOTES Please read the following and refer to the relevant sections: • this method requires observers to use SCUBA diving equipment. Observers should be suitably trained, qualified and use safe diving practices. Prior to participating in monitoring it is ESSENTIAL that observers read the Safety section; • Temperate habitats, especially some reefs, are sensitive and highly susceptible to human impacts (eg. diver and anchor damage). Observers should read the section on being environmentally sensitive; • PART IV SECTION 2.0: SAFETY ISSUES; • PART IV SECTION 3.0: BE ENVIRONMENTALLY SENITIVE WHEN MONITORING; AND • PART I SECTION 3.0 – SELECTING A MONITORING SITE (ALL SUB-SECTIONS). Marine Community Monitoring Manual

PART II (B) DATA AND INFORMATION SHEETS (BIOLOGICAL)

7.0 MANGROVE HEALTH

TABLE OF CONTENTS

7.1 DATA SHEET: MANGROVE HEALTH PAGE 1 7.1 INFORMATION SHEET: MANGROVE HEALTH PAGE 2 AND 3

Page i

health DEO VI

ES I Mangrove

OPTION SPEC II (B): 7.1 OTHER PHOTOGRAPH

PART

61 – 100%

OPY

A % NA

H 31 – 60 A MARI

COVER OF C

s) NNI

% x CE I V A le bo HEALT - 30 % 0% appropriate box)

plicab

e ap th (Tick the NGROVE S OF DEAD E d tick % Page 1

an MA DEAD LEAVES

/ A SPECI NG OS NG VE L VI O Y VI (Fill in T 7.1 S OF LI mmunity Monitoring Manual EES NGR OF LI RA R % O T %

VE OPH NT MA

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

RHIZ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 TREE Marine Co NUMBER MANGR DOMINA

ATA SHEET D

I the

T I

: ) with TIME II B at a site is (PAR * 24 hour clock

1 R *

E 6.

R s CTION BEFORE m

ILS me

d o na for h SE t

NUMB ery time th 6.1 (PART e E DATA SHEET.

NUMBE u are registered

YY tive

H M N

eet o

THIS h

eet ev / 2 r t scrip RATION sh e / f e

e ta SITE DETA

E d lete if yo

/10/0 * a r ation s R GIST MM d STRATIO o

I mp

l e 20

Site registration RE NAM / red. th o ted

/ t y co l

om n OUP OUP r oni pda CONTACT DETAILS AND DATE Officia O PLEASE READ COMPLETING T Fill in m and Inform GR GR * MCMP DATE DD SITE NAME * SITE REG * f

r r r e e g o nt o ea en b n f fo r

om i on h t ble.

t r th , e ld y fo r y W erce rk e see if health bers on . p a nd res and v cut d f op e a b r ( observers g i shou l agree h are visi qua s s in the a ial to hase n by c e num be abl e can rin r tion opy co t h o egory ow a t all s th o

e tag pu e

onitoring. Mangrove t f e they is also you al ct a tr r cat e our n e ver t o be ee using w piece of flagging or % can other tree r e GS ndu Wri er er. Th . g a whe at. A ke y r a Whe e t 30 is tap a ey will n . actual m h , co ed tie e sam m th h ith mark can obs T e in this estim h e end over II (B): 7.1 e w quad n h of n

gs t oup h of e at t o a c h plac

ee e c h to t at gr th n t

g f ou ca c be es t e tree. tag i u o r ve d PART nopy cover of i 2) h o ri u r re visible pact). PLASTIC T sure th ast h o your ers is a tr t rcen e ca , or y e OF in e selected trees m container lid into sm s e on t shoul h progress n ar d m pl a waterpro

e req main bra r g 1 ith o eci e p the im n ca e corn w i of d s a hol hod s

PERCENTAGE CANOPY COVER

y t tags en om th th e y, g e tags g u et l ke tags s n fr h assess t te

d PAGE in ice crea ri dual a d a ple, then ing ( hi r) for five n m ware st vi s m d at you nc e tag h ndi A va har up a pu th attached to a attach tree. T To m surveyors tape mark Thi esti each tagged tree. To assist shoul (away Secon i cove w exam

) ALTH E E E ORA

H NIA NIA ) ) ) OR OR -ROM ICEN ICEN LOSA D V V HIZOP ANGROV ANGROV ANGROV REY REY ARINA ARINA ED TY A A R

G M ( M G M ( M R M ( S WHITE WHITE VE HE stralia C O Au

stern e

Page 2 in e MANGR Lif e

mmunity Monitoring Manual Marin

7.1 m o aphs fr hotogr Marine Co P (

r s s y n o n o rt e e b a l i t u ove oup e r r l p ster ry ch as h tify a e tw b odi e n u u s wat ngrove ngr b llowing en a a e g W n her u m m ees/ occurs as south of rt id TREES

near croc r be a B y l o o e o

t a g i N d t rder. Th n in th s . i le t a the fo nt om While the gre t e e e whi k o ove t occurs ne fauna s n t h n fr r r de a o ri ab t e. g p si d e a e n i n ngrove tree/shrubs. wo or e id b c a NFORMATION SHEET t m a resi m i

her u ngrove onl d G a I b ng i M to ful n gu e the re ri . ri be m f es that not part grey r tal sections of voi IN k o o st m e ed of m a r t e r d as h e N eci r Territory b A i o rub. Refer to . n t p di that so ect es o t u Pa oni rn e d t w u r ha q r e ly n o tificatio eci es. BEWARE OF SALTWATER n o he su WAR p re e m k d sel rth a on en ) an r i d ok a only s ). The re ves are n’t s tree/sh ts

i o TION OF MANGROVE oul ral o e 2 . En r e na es species a of ot A v an st ou a e No g h o a l n ea sna oo Marine fic species sh ri o E u e are k n y 18 s

d ES o r u a y a s f er th stylo g as an o el /10/0 p s h n rticip n A ra at a mm a m to a . M hod and s er i WAR 20 t er m h ea y m If t Ningal a h as Yardie Creek, Ningaloo. ho b ni i t r i e p E kee x u s m ted o ie, out ral e e a m ograph es. cen cal t d izop s h i st co pr m o so B di stead e so t o pda way e IDENTIFIC h Rh Avi n R of West CROCODIL al bo i Al stingrays Ap occur along sheltered c Aust th m ( U ( far s mangrove is t Yar Thi identify speci In typ p

alth e h reach se

o cau ill 7.1 Mangrove ): ce w ”) ngroves t a n p (B a u b r g e m n h stu i Part II 2) OF T I: “Starti 2 R ecessary d n ) (PA D walking through t is un PAGE m r ( th o F as , ea. By on OVIDE r i

R a ood rat n g

st gi an LE P of a

e P

. th ) R s Picket e ALTH ntre t t rm

o a o r ove. nd: e Si (EXAM e b re h h o t a es ( m n m or m o s in the ce o VE HE ed . ing oph s e d rec

O t r at diagram o ngrove we e si um a h rec t ees pne r be in the

t of e Page 3 n E SITE d y h t e H t ca g onitor m ni o s g MANGR a t ge t d arrows Thi e vaci a h e d. h ese trees you are cau e

mmunity Monitoring Manual t y Do not m th dam ng t the re n a i 6.1 i at p by spl o r oc c di t y u re-l o

st earl si detailed s Marine Co cky o on cl r i r THE BOUNDARY OF T et, a To as o

at k

s. k G . rm o par f cket n cket etres) pi pi e i

car h star pic , r v (m ar a y o b st DEFININ ets wa h st ur k e a h h fo een eac t eac e w h t t h at t t tagged trees: e, a pat n , wi i by n star pic pl NFORMATION SHEET a o e d ass be e p e m p I a ne Sea x m fi e ar ains 20 o way h r e

nt de

o a f s a c i h 7 ke t e p of t a t a = wi ures r site co S, t g e si at ees

n h r fe ud m 2 ou t GP t g trees = 13 f r the distance betw d of o m in

ve he beari y /10/0 ot g a dea liv ary ar a ha n f g d i u of o 20 n n ng o i w u und ki er er o ted a b b b bo measuring dra not If y t m e

pda The a) b) c) d) e) Th Num Nu U Marine Community Monitoring Manual

PART II (A) – METHODS (BIOLOGICAL)

7.0 MANGROVE HEALTH

TABLE OF CONTENTS

7.1 MANGROVE HEALTH PAGE TO 1 TO 3

Page i Marine Community Monitoring Manual

7.1 MANGROVE HEALTH

METHOD RATING 1 1

OBJECTIVE To monitor the health of mangrove forests in areas likely to be affected by existing and potential coastal developments. microbes and products of plant decomposition, BACKGROUND support dense populations of resident and migratory Mangroves are a diverse group of largely tropical animals both within the mangrove communities and trees, shrubs, palms and ferns that have adapted for in adjacent habitats. life between the tides on sheltered shores, estuaries and tidal creeks. There are 39 species of mangroves Mangrove communities are impacted by natural in Australia. Australia’s mangroves are of world events such as cyclones, tidal waves or coastal significance and rank third largest in area (11,558 erosion. They are also threatened by a variety of square kilometres) and occur along 22 per cent of human activities such as land filling, dredging, the coastline. deforestation, changes in adjacent agricultural practices, pollution and discharges from power and In Western Australia there are 2,517 sq km of desalination plants. Clearing and reclamation of mangrove forest and 18 mangrove species. mangroves is occurring at around one per cent per Mangrove communities line extensive stretches of annum in the Philippines, Thailand, Malaysia and sheltered shores between Bunbury in the south and Ecuador. If this trend continues, Australia will have the Northern Territory border. Mangroves have the the Indo-Pacific region’s least disturbed mangrove highest diversity in the humid tropics where 16 forests. species are represented. The diversity drops to six species along the more arid Pilbara coast. South of the Pilbara, diversity drops to just one species that RELEVANCE TO MANAGEMENT reaches Bunbury. Most of the mangrove forests in Western Australia are in good condition. Some mangrove forests have The two most common and widespread mangrove been lost as a result of salt farms, ports and road species in Western Australia include the Red works and industrial and urban landfill. Mangrove, Rhizophora stylosa and the Grey or White Mangrove, Avicennia marina. The Red Information collected may be used by managers to mangrove extends from the Northern Territory address the cause of potential declines in mangrove border south to Yardie Creek, adjacent to Ningaloo health. Marine Park. The White mangrove is the only species that occurs south of Yardie Creek. LINKS TO OTHER METHOD/S Mangroves have a high ecological and commercial importance. They are important nurseries and & PROGRAM/S habitats for many species of fish, including many commercially important fish. They are an important The method is linked to: source of nutrients for many species of migratory • METHOD 2.1 WATER QUALITY (TEMPERATURE AND animals (eg. shore birds). Mangroves protect the CLARITY); AND coast from erosion due to storm waves and • METHOD 2.2 WATER TEMPERATURE (TEMPERATURE contribute to shoreline accretion by acting as LOGGERS). sediment traps.

Mangroves make a significant contribution to SUMMARY OF METHODOLOGY estuarine and inshore productivity through energy Select 20 trees, consecutively, along the boundary pathways involving decomposition of leaves and of the mangrove forest. Tag each tree along this branches after they fall onto the microbial rich boundary and estimate the percentage of living sediment below. Food chains, which rely on the leaves on each tree.

Updated 22/04/03 Page 1 PART II (A): 7.1 Mangrove health • five nautical mile grid reference number; EQUIPMENT • site name; NECESSARY • site waypoint (refer to Part III section 2.2); • plastic tags (refer to Information sheet 7.1); • ‘mud’ map indicating the positions of marked • Site registration form; trees (refer to Part III section 2.3); and • Data sheet 7.1; • PART III SECTION 2.0: SITE DESCRIPTION (ALL • Information sheet 7.1; and SUBSECTIONS). • set of five nautical mile grid sheets for WA (refer to Part III section 4.0). HOW TO MONITOR

OPTIONAL ESTABLISHING A MONITORING SITE • GPS unit (Most effective means of determining The following should be carried out when the site is site position) (refer to Part III section 2.2); and visited/monitored for the first time: • aerial photograph/s (refer to Part VI). • establish the boundary of the site to be monitored. Follow the natural tree line and mark the boundary, at various locations, by MANGROVE IDENTIFICATION inserting star pickets. If you have a GPS, take This method requires the identification of two waypoints, or if possible use re-locatable species of mangrove. The following are excellent benchmarks, instead of star pickets, to define sources to assist in identifying mangroves. the boundary (See Information sheet 6.1, for hints on defining the boundary of your site). • INFORMATION SHEET 7.1; AND • indicate the location of the site on the ‘mud’ • PART V: USEFUL REFERENCES. map on the Site registration form. • select 20 mature mangrove trees, consecutively, from along the boundary. SITE SELECTION • assign each living tree a number and attach a Select sites that have significant numbers of mature tag inscribed with an identification number to a mangrove trees. Mangrove forests occur branch. Attach the tag so that it won’t come off predominantly in the north of the State but do but not so tight as to ring-bark the tree; and extend south to Bunbury. When selecting mangrove • indicate the position of the marked trees on the forests try to: mud map on Site Registration Form. • select mangrove forests that may be threatened by existing and/or proposed developments; MONITORING • select trees in the upper reaches of the The following should be carried out during mangrove forests range ie. the furthermost subsequent visits/monitoring of the site: distance from the coast, as these trees are most • record the numbers of dead and living susceptible to changes in environmental mangrove trees along the boundary; conditions; • re-locate each of the marked trees by referring • You will need to select an area with an to the Site registration form; accessible and well defined boundary, as we • record an estimate of the percentage of living do not want to tramp through the middle of the leaves and dead leaves for each tagged tree; mangroves, whist selecting and tagging trees; • record an estimate of the percentage cover of and canopy for each tagged tree (assess canopy • It may be useful to Refer to Part III section 1.1 coverage of other trees in area away from (Aerial photography) to assist with site human activities to assist in this estimation); selection. • INFORMATION SHEET 7.1: PERCENTAGE OF LIVING LEAVES AND LIVING /DEAD TREES; AND SITE DESCRIPTION • INFORMATION SHEET 7.1: TAGGING TREES. Once a monitoring site is established the Site registration form (PART I: “Starting Up”) should OPTIONAL METHODS be completed and submitted to obtain a Site If an camera or video camera is available it is a registration number. This should be recorded, good idea to photograph or video the tagged trees. along with the site name, on all data sheets for that Refer to the information sheet for standard site. methods. If photographs or video footage are taken the details should be recorded on the Data sheet The following details need to be recorded on the 7.1. Site registration form:

Updated 22/04/03 Page 2 PART II (A): 7.1 Mangrove health WHEN TO MONITOR The tagged mangrove trees should be monitored annually.

DATA COLLECTION AND MANAGEMENT The data collected should be entered on to Data sheet 7.1. Data submitted to CALM will be entered in the Marine Community Monitoring Database. Data updates will be available on the MCMP home page, comparing information generated within and between sites.

Long- term monitoring of re-locatable mangroves is encouraged for each registered site, this will enable comparisons with previous monitoring events and also comparisons with other projects looking at mangrove health around the State.

ADDITIONAL NOTES Please read the following and refer to the relevant sections: • this method requires participants to work in mangrove areas. If sites are located in the north of the state, beware of saltwater crocodiles. • this method involves the installation of pickets that can pose a safety hazard and prior to their installation it is essential that observers read the safety section. • PART III SECTION 1.0: AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHY; • PART IV SECTION 2.0 SAFETY ISSUES; AND • PART IV SECTION 3.0: BE ENVIRONMENTALLY SENITIVE WHEN MONITORING.

Updated 22/04/03 Page 3 PART II (A): 7.1 Mangrove health Marine Community Monitoring Program

PART II (B) DATA SHEETS AND INFORMATION SHEETS (BIOLOGICAL)

8.0 MARINE MAMMALS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

8.1 DATA SHEET: MARINE MAMMAL SIGHTINGS PAGE 1 TO 2

Page i 2) II (B): 8.1 Marine mammal sightings mammal Marine 8.1 II (B): OF 1 ART Main data sheet, please turn over to page 2 page over to turn sheet, please Main data P tion, other marine mammals etc.) mammals marine other tion, PAGE ( Additional notes (behaviour, loca (behaviour, notes Additional Page 1 * * MARINE MAMMAL SIGHTINGS NUMBER . NUMBER .

Marine Community Monitoring Manual 8.1 (Tick the applicablebox)

* IF NO GPS ATA SHEET SITE DETAILS D WHICH DATUM (Tick applicable the box) CONTACT DETAILS AND DATE AND CONTACT DETAILS USED / 84 YES / CHART PLEASE READ THIS SECTION BEFORE COMPLETING THE DATA COMPLETING THE BEFORE READ THIS SECTION PLEASE SHEET. Fill indata the sheet that every a time marine mammal is sighted. Refer to the Marine method. the on details for Manual Monitoring Community Marine disturbed way or any in harassed touched, approached, be not should mammals when monitoring. GROUP NAMEOnly* complete if you are registered with the MCMP DATE SITE NAME GROUP REG Only* complete if thebeen site has registered with the MCMP WASHOW THE WAYPOINT DETERMINED WAS DATUM WGS FIVE NAUTICAL MILE GRID REFERENCE REG SITE Letter Number DD / MM / YY Updated 22/04/03 S E : OTHER

S E 2) II (B): 8.1 Marine mammal sightings mammal Marine 8.1 II (B): OF ART : P 2 DUGONG n). For all other categoriesother tickn). For applicable the all PAGE

( S E : NZ FUR SEAL

S E : SEA LION . Page 2 AUST

S E MARINE MAMMAL SIGHTINGS :

Marine Community Monitoring Manual HUMPBACK 8.1

S E : SOUTHERN WRIGHT ATA SHEET

D ) 5 R 15 20 15 O 20

, TO MUD SAND LAND TO 0 LONG 6 / FEEDING PLAYING SEAGRASS SWIMMING CORAL REEF LAT ( LESS THAN (24 hour clock) INDIVIDUALS . GREATER THAN GREATER THAN TIME CATEGORY UNABLE TO DETERMINE UNABLE TO DETERMINE WAYPOINT

EXACT NO

(m) BEHAVIOUR DEPTH TYPE HABITAT Record the (latitude/longitude) waypoint was sighted,where mammal the and of knowof the exact the time number individuals (if box. Habitat typereserveddugong is for observations only. Updated 22/04/03 II (B): 8.1 Marine mammal sightings mammal Marine 8.1 II (B): ART P Page 3

Marine Community Monitoring Manual Updated 22/04/03 Marine Community Monitoring Manual

PART II (A) METHODS (BIOLOGICAL)

8.0 MARINE MAMMALS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

8.1 MARINE MAMMAL SIGHTINGS PAGE 1 TO 4

Page i Marine Community Monitoring Manual

8.1 MARINE MAMMAL SIGHTINGS

METHOD RATING 1

OBJECTIVE To monitor the number and location of marine mammal sightings in Western Australia.

and Ceduna (South Australia). Although numbers are most prolific at Doubtful Island Bay (east of BACKGROUND Israelite Bay) and at Twilight Cove, both in Western Along the Western Australian coast the following Australia. Right whales have also been reported marine mammal species are commonly sighted; along the west coast as far as Perth and they have Humpback and Southern right whales, Australian even been sighted at Shark Bay and off the North sealions and New Zealand fur seals and in more West Cape, although this is rare. tropical waters dugongs may be sighted. Information is provided on these species due to their distribution Humpback whales – Any whale seen swimming throughout inshore areas. However, this method can near the Western Australian coast between June and be applied to all species of marine mammal, that is, November, with an obvious fin on its back and long if you are 100% certain of the species of mammal narrow flippers about one third of the body length, you are have sighted, you can record information for can only be a humpback. Their flippers are their additional species. most distinctive feature, long and oar-like, unlike all other whales that have short, paddle-like flippers. WHALES Humpbacks get their name from the way they Whale watching is a common past time for many ‘hump’ their back when diving. They can grow to 16 coastal dwellers in Western Australia. The annual metres, weigh up to 45 tonnes and live for more than migration of whales along our shores ignites much 50 years. excitement for tourists and locals alike, allowing us to witness, these beautiful creatures in the wild. If Humpbacks feed on small crustaceans called krill in you are lucky enough and close enough, you might the Antarctic during the summer and autumn and be able to hear them ‘singing’ to each other as well. then migrate up the west coast to the tropical waters Possibly communicating to potential mates, of north Western Australia (between Shark Bay and notifying others of food resources in the area, or just north of the Kimberley region), during winter, impending stress and danger. The two most common where they give birth and suckle their young. species of whale encountered along our coast are the Southern right whale and the Humpback whale. DUGONGS Dugongs (Dugong dugong) are slow moving Southern right whales – are bulky and slow herbivorous marine mammals, which inhabit moving, reaching up to 17.5 metres in length and shallow tropical waters feeding exclusively on over 80 tonnes in weight. They are generally seagrasses. The dugong is the only herbivorous completely black, with some white markings on the mammal, which lives in the marine environment. belly or a few white or grey marks on their backs. Adults may reach up to three metres in length and They have no dorsal fin and large white live for over 70 years. Dugongs are distinctive encrustations on the top of the head (called animals, with torpedo-shaped bodies, short flippers, callosities). On individual animals these callosities whale-like flukes and a round face with thick lips form unique patterns allowing individuals to be (adapted for grazing seagrass). identified. Southern right whales feed in colder waters in summer and migrate to warmer waters in Dugongs are the most abundant marine mammal in winter to breed. the northern tropical waters, from Shark Bay in Western Australia and east to Morton Bay in In winter and spring, right whales can be found very Queensland. Conservative estimates put their close inshore along the southern coast of Australia. numbers at 80,000, which is globally significant. They often come to within the surf zone, as if about The two largest populations in the world are in to strand - however this is normal behaviour. Their Torres Strait (24,000) and the Shark Bay World natural range is between Albany (Western Australia) Heritage Property (10,000). Populations of dugongs

Updated 22/04/03 Page 1 PART II (A): 8.1 Marine mammal sightings Marine Community Monitoring Manual also inhabit the North West Cape area and Roebuck Humpback whales - rapid declines in humpback Bay–Cape Leveque in the western Kimberley. numbers between 1935 and 1963 (17,000 to less than 500), resulted in this action and in 1963 In Western Australia dugongs (specifically Shark whaling stations at Point Cloates (Ningaloo), Bay) are an important tourism attraction, with tourist Carnarvon and Albany closed, along with all other operators running tours to view dugongs. They are stations in the Southern Hemisphere. For 10 years an important cultural icon to Indigenous after 1963, humpbacks were not seen along the communities throughout their range, and may be Western Australian coast. In the 1970’s some whales harvested as a traditional food source. were seen around Shark Bay and as a result, aerial surveys were commenced in 1976 to estimate AUSTRALIAN SEA LION humpback numbers. Results of these surveys The male Australian sea lion is dark brown and has a showed increases from the lows of 1963. light coloured mane on the back of the neck (hence the name, lion) and may reach up to 2 metres. Southern right whales - a similar story emerges Females grow up to 1.5 metres in length, are silvery with the southern right whale, with whaling grey to fawn on the dorsal surface and have a prevalent from 1805 onwards. By 1900, it was creamy coloured underside. thought that they were either extinct or exceedingly rare in Australian waters. In the early 1970’s aerial The Australian sea lion is one of the rarest pinnipeds surveys began from Cape Leeuwin to Israelite Bay (including seals and sea lions) in the world. They are (800 km’s of coast) and continued on a regular basis distributed from the Houtman Abrolhos Islands in to the present day. Results show a steady increase in Western Australia to Kangaroo Island in South animal numbers, at about 10% each year and with Australia. Recent estimates put the total population surveys extending into South Australian waters more at about 10,000 to 12,000 individuals. The most information is being gathered about this species. significant breeding colonies are located in South Australia (eg. Kangaroo Island and Spencer Gulf). In More detailed data on abundance and distribution of Western Australia they breed on a total of 27 islands these two species are needed to supplement the data which include the Houtman Abrolhos Islands, collected by management agencies. Tourist central west coast islands (around Jurien Bay) and operators (charter boats) already record their on many islands along the south coast (Esperence). sightings on southern right and humpback whales (location, numbers) while on whale watching tours Carnac Island and other islands around the Perth as a condition of their operating license. metropolitan area are used as haul out (rest) areas for males outside of the breeding seasons on the Jurien DUGONGS Bay islands. Females rarely visit these islands. Over the past century there has been a significant global reduction in dugong numbers. Dugongs are The New Zealand Fur Seal may also be seen along recognised worldwide as a species in need of the west and south coast of Australia. They are quite protection. In Western Australia dugongs are different in appearance to the Australian sea lion: protected under the Wildlife Conservation Act The coat is darker (dark grey brown), and they (1950). As Australian waters contain the largest have a paler under belly. remaining dugong populations in the world, the Adult males have a longer pointed nose, with an effective conservation of these populations is a obvious ‘black tip’. major requirement for the survival of the species NZ fur seal pups are black in colour, while globally. On the southern Great Barrier Reef, Australian sea lions are a chocolate brown. populations may have declined locally by 50 to 80 per cent in the past two decades. In Western Australia the Shark Bay population is thought to be RELEVANCE TO MANAGEMENT secure, however there is little evidence for WHALES populations further north. Australia was a whaling nation until the 1970’s. Following concern in Australia over the dramatic The dugong is a vulnerable species because it has a declines in whale numbers, the Whale Protection Act very low rate of reproduction, taking a long time to 1980 (Commonwealth legislation) was enforced to recover from population declines, and has a prohibit the killing or taking of, or in any way specialised diet. Maximum population growth rates interfering with any whale. In Western Australia are likely to be one to two per cent a year. The long whales are also protected under State legislation and life span and low fecundity of the dugong, combined three species are afforded special protection under with limited data on population numbers make it the Endangered Species Act 1992 (including; difficult to detect changes over short time periods humpback whales, southern right and blue whales). unless they are very large.

Updated 22/04/03 Page 2 PART II (A): 8.1 Marine mammal sightings Marine Community Monitoring Manual

So the impact of harmful effects or conservation • Information sheets 8.0; and measures on the dugong and/ or its habitat may not • Set of five nautical mile grids for WA (refer to be known until well into the future. Major concerns Part III section 4.0). include habitat loss, unsustainable harvesting, incidental catch and damage in fisheries operations, OPTIONAL coastline and offshore development and disturbances • GPS unit (Most effective means of determining and strikes by vessels. site position) (refer to Part III section 2.2). Currently management agencies are estimating dugong numbers through; aerial surveys (every five MAMMAL IDENTIFICATION years) and tourist operators (charter boats), who The following are excellent sources of information record dugong sightings as a condition of their to assist in identifying marine mammals: operating licence. • CD-ROM - MARINE LIFE IN WESTERN AUSTRALIA, AND More information is required on the abundance and distribution of dugongs in Western Australia for • PART IV SECTION 4.0: USEFUL REFERENCES management agencies to be able to determine changes in population numbers and distribution. SITE SELECTION AUSTRALIAN SEA LION This method does not require the selection of The International Union for the Conservation of permanent re-locatable sites. Instead observations Nature (IUCN) lists the Australian sea lion as a rare are made on an opportunistic basis (ie. whenever species and in Western Australia it is listed as a marine mammals are sighted). specially protected species under the Wildlife Conservation Act. From a management perspective there have been very few geographically coordinated SITE DESCRIPTION surveys of the species, which makes it difficult to implement appropriate management strategies to If you are 100% certain of the species of marine protect and conserve the species. Increasing mammal sighted, record the following information pressures on their preferred habitats and breeding on Data Sheet 8.1 colonies, as a result of increasing people pressures, • five nautical mile grid reference; is further cause for concern. • site name; • waypoint (degrees, minutes and decimals of a The more information gathered with regard to the minute); abundance and distribution of these mammals the • water depth; and better. Information collected by community groups • PART III SECTION 2.0: SITE DESCRIPTION (ALL SUB- will complement proper scientific surveys, which SECTIONS). aim to generate a comprehensive data set on the species across their entire distribution range. HOW TO MONITOR Record the following information on the Data sheet: LINKS TO OTHER • species - tick the appropriate column if any of METHODS/PROGRAMS these species are sighted; humpback whale, This method links in with existing programs: southern right whale, dugong, sea lion or New • marine mammal interaction logbooks filled out Zealand fur seal. Any other marine mammal by charter boat operators as a condition of their should be entered in the Other species box. If DCLM licence; and you are 100% certain of the species continue, • DCLM Wildlife Branch – Aerial surveys. otherwise, it is best not to record information about an unknown species (unless you have a photograph or video footage of the sighting to SUMMARY OF METHODOLOGY verify later!); and The location and number of marine mammals are • record the number of mammals sighted, by recorded on Datasheet 8.1. entering the exact number if known or by ticking the appropriate range box if it is too difficult to record an exact number (eg. 20 or EQUIPMENT less individuals or >20 individuals). Difficulty may arise if there is a large group of animals, NECESSARY with lots of activity above and beneath the water • Data sheet 8.1; or if water visibility is particularly bad.

Updated 22/04/03 Page 3 PART II (A): 8.1 Marine mammal sightings Marine Community Monitoring Manual

OPTIONAL OBSERVATIONS The following information can also be recorded on the Data sheet 8.1:

• record the behaviour, by selecting the appropriate box (eg. swimming, feeding etc.); • additional observations for dugong only include recording the dominant benthic habitat (eg. sand, seagrass etc); and • additional comments or observations can be recorded in the ‘Additional notes’ box provided.

WHEN TO MONITOR On an opportunistic basis whenever mammals are sighted, with certainty.

DATA COLLECTION AND DATA MANAGEMENT The data collected should be entered on to Data sheet 8.1. Data submitted to CALM will be entered in the Marine Community Monitoring Database. Data updates will be available on the MCMP home page, along with other marine mammal sighting from around the State.

ADDITIONAL NOTES Please refer to the relevant sections: • PART IV SECTION 2.0: SAFETY ISSUES; AND • PART IV SECTION 3.0: BE ENVIRONMENTALLY SENITIVE WHEN MONITORING.

Updated 22/04/03 Page 4 PART II (A): 8.1 Marine mammal sightings Marine Community Monitoring Manual Marine Community Monitoring Program

PART II (B) DATA AND INFORMATION SHEETS (BIOLOGICAL)

9.0 INTRODUCED MARINE PESTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

9.1 DATA SHEET: INTRODUCED MARINE PESTS PAGE 1 AND 2 9.0 INFORMATION SHEETS: INTRODUCED MARINE PESTS PAGE 3 AND 4

Page i

DEPTH WATER

>50 HIGH

11 - 50 50 - 11 MEDIUM

2) PHOTOGRAPHS STORED AT 0-10 0-10 LOW

4. seastar pacific Northern 6. Green crab crab 6. Green 2. Japanese seaweed Japanese 2. 8. Asian green mussel green 8. Asian PART II (B): 9.0 Introduced marine pests marine 9.0 Introduced (B): PART II

(Tick the applicable box)

IF NO AGE NONE

please name the observed pest and record the number number the record pest and the observed please name

GPS

(Tick the applicable box) WHICH DATUM

REQUIRED OBSERVATIONS REQUIRED OBSERVATIONS OPTIONAL OBSERVATIONS OPTIONAL OBSERVATIONS

caulerpa NO USED LONG DETERMINED

/ 84

SPECIES 1. Aquarium Aquarium 1. 3. Broccoli weed fanworm 5. Giant mussel striped 7. Black

CHART

NAUTICAL YES YES (Tick applicable the box) seen and depth of water (metres). Provisions to record three species from list below. below. list from species three record to Provisions (metres). water of depth seen and HOW WAS THE LAT THE WAS HOW WAS DATUM WGS ABUNDANCE OF PEST OBSERVED WERE PHOTOGRAPHS TAKEN Page 1

* * .* Marine Refer to Number

INTRODUCED MARINE PESTS INTRODUCED MARINE Letter Marine Community Monitoring Program Marine Community

9.1 NM GRID REFERENCE

SITE REGISTRATION NO SITE REGISTRATION : *from Site registration form form Site registration *from

S E

GROUP REGISTRATION NUMBER TIME clock hour 24

ATA SHEET SITE DETAILS SITE DETAILS D for details on the method and how to monitor. monitor. to how and method the on details for

CONTACT DETAILS AND DATE

/ * 5 *

* *

LATITUDE LONGITUDE Information sheet 9.0 for photographs of each listed species. pest of each listed photographs for 9.0 sheet Information

Community Monitoring Manual COMPLETING THE DATA THIS SECTION BEFORE PLEASE READ SHEET. Please fill in the dataeverythat sheet time a site is monitored. Refer to the GROUP NAME MCMP with the registered are if you *Only complete DATE DD / MM / YY SITE NAME * Official or descriptive name WAYPOINT SITE a of decimals and minutes degrees, in * Record places). decimal (3 minute Updated 24/04/03

pests marine d oduce 9.0 Intr (B): PART II Page 2 2) N OF . mmunity Monitoring Program 2 ngs i Site r ght AGE si (P y you n S

Marine Co of a ST s E tical to n/ P o en

i id cat e NE o b

I d e l l h t ou MAP rk sh a MAR p D a m , m d red u UCE o t e m oni OD SITE ‘MUD’ R m a e site, th INT e ar h 1 your ed 9. p of t

a . 3 m m r ET gister o e E r ud’ /04/0

e ‘m v 24 a a ted u h ch o ATASH pda y f D Sket I registration f U

pests marine d oduce

9.0 Intr 2) OF (B): 1

) AGE PART II (P

u/nimpis .

d e ; ct

for 5 ta k , n ii)

i sk; i s s an g d ed a ; p st m an i e e iro.a / di n-l z l on an l in t e a

l a worm b S ensis) cles’ (one d r f d . c b e i r rp d wor d); llan n s jo

f nt u e . nt es a n i e pe a erate; l a ng 2 di

o c pu ; y n i .

ine.cs p d elling al g e; ‘tenta d a sp r r lob o ce t fan d

e w cm rm er , poi Pa spi f s o of d n col y w to rsi f ont ella

rn e

m en s: s: nt e r eltered n de t: t: Gian ow w ud, san ab h ase o to 40 obe spi b cold, tem m lo mm, then becoming separat 5 a joi poi un yello br Tub 9 fans lobes l Sh ita ita (S rt (Asterias amur o ab ab eature eature N F H − − − F H − − − − − − − − http://crimp.ma ( e

nd . n O e ar R l l a w o e. Page 3 I

ed p u S s; h al ; . ; e r r C l e arin F d nas) oac ell; e g pur lou O

ab mussel Y a ; onies pr sh estu n; pad S (cent p , triang er sid

al, shallo co , m E ) m atin y a d T i

d een ng R m d n in INTRODUCED MARINE PESTS i 3c pes c U mmunity Monitoring Program a nus sites; eith with 5 distinct

m ri O an ; e gree r terti sh ; e , v C m e, < i Green cr st); and whe al h i 16 S ct green arci v t

n st (Perna viridis) e e r in d s large col T ll (<8 l gat w es on i o ol C e E s: s: a l ( o E s eltered p or t: astal, lower val in Asian gr rm ow ick stin on i H 9.0 p i 5 Sh u subt co doci Sm carapace sp d no B sm el dul 1 br th fo ita S N ab eature eature IO − − − F H F − Marine Co − − − − − − − − − T A M R FO IN : GRAPHS O HOT P NFORMATION SHEET I

3 /04/0 24 ted pda U

pests marine d oduce

9.0 Intr 2) OF (B): 2

) AGE PART II (P

u/nimpis

iro.a des)

n a ) p oi d r ap g base lia water e apex os ue rl l t li’ sed at r. g alo e on n ;

u i a n ine.cs nt); and xifo he y ib al r cco e t a r xpo ove ner Ca ment s rvi ot ont n e t d symmetrical ’ n o i i , in th c i t

h o d d ; h drib; and cu st ( - p e e not i th; two a ur d erpa rd f ssp rium le ‘bro ; l ed o eac

do ds ds t l d a b u tral m s: k e en h l in o l r t wa r attachm rm on on leng sp ve fronds; c fo Flatten fo up cen fr near m fr and wi fo

(Ca n ing

agi . Aqu y ho Broccoli weed h ’ r su in ch f n i eature s: m en F − − − − m ong an owt ey resem oots u r < 1 gree gr b successi sp ‘r wh th florets http://crimp.ma odi ( eature

(

F − − − − − O , se R

d Page 4 I

e S ib d ) ong; r e ba C a l F h an plant t ; O mid e e Y ades tifid at cm flatten h l metres;

ned S

aweed E ) 3 e. 80 to . T

ke r nna ) ei n R ded i c l o INTRODUCED MARINE PESTS us b e edg i l

U ll mmunity Monitoring Program i t . p mussel ol ture, t h O sho 0 f a a i C s th s t ing 5 phy y rano r s sa in r S strap-like m i o , b a e – 1 to T el r n p d E s s: o m riped E tend erate to tropical; rnail sized; and t ick ward ades e H 9.0 Japanese se p Larg th ex m to bl and whe appea den (sp (Un s: S eltered t: N eature (Mytilo Tem and Sh Finge Black stripes ita IO F Marine Co − − − − T Black s A ab eature M − −

F H − − R FO IN : GRAPHS O HOT P NFORMATION SHEET I

3 /04/0 24 ted pda U Marine Community Monitoring Manual

PART II (A) METHODS (BIOLOGICAL)

9.0 INTRODUCED MARINE PESTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

9.1 INTRODUCED MARINE PESTS PAGE 1 TO 3

Page i Marine Community Monitoring Program

9.1 INTRODUCED MARINE PESTS

METHOD RATING 1 1

OBJECTIVE To monitor the presence or absence of marine pests in high - risk areas of Western Australia, specifically in localities with ports, harbours or anchorage areas.

Eight species have been selected for you to focus BACKGROUND your attention and these are listed below. The introduction of exotic marine pests into Australian waters is recognised as one of Australia’s MARINE PLANTS: major environmental issues. Marine pests can enter 1) Aquarium caulerpa (Caulerpa taxifolia) Australian waters in various ways including; hull 2) Japanese seaweed (Undaria pinnatifida) fouling from international shipping activities and 3) Broccoli weed (Codium fragile ssp recreational yachts and vessels, ballast water tomentosoides) exchange and the aquarium trade. Marine pests have the potential to impact on the biodiversity of our MARINE ANIMALS: marine environment, on fisheries and aquaculture 1) Northern pacific seastar (Asterias amurensis) industries, and on shipping operations. 2) Giant fanworm (Sabella spallanzanii) 3) Green Crab (Carcinus maenas) Foreign species can pose a significant threat to 4) Black striped mussel (Mytilopsis sallei) marine ecosystems because of their potential to out- 5) Asian green mussel (Perna viridis). compete and out-predate native species. If these pests become established they can take over large All listed species exist in temperate and /or areas of marine habitat and seriously upset the temperate/ tropical transitional coastal waters. existing ecological balance of an area. Although the black striped mussel also tends toward more tropical waters. The listed species prefer In response to these threats the Centre for Research marine coastal waters, although their range can on Introduced Marine Pests (CRIMP) was extend into more estuarine environments. established within the Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Institute Research Organisation (CSIRO). The species listed may be found on jetties, around The centre initially formed the focus of a National pylons, buoys and attached to the hulls of vessels, or approach to managing introduced marine pests. on the seabed in various habitats (eg. sandy and Principally the centre was responsible for rocky reef environments and within seagrass developing protocols for conducting port surveys meadows). and also research.

The on-going management of marine pests has RELEVANCE TO MANAGEMENT become the responsibility of other areas of Early detection is crucial in dealing with introduced government, both at a State and Federal level. For marine pests. It provides management agencies with example in Western Australia the Department of the best chance of containing and removing them Fisheries is responsible for management. before they spread and become established.

As part of the MCMP you can ‘keep watch’ for Community monitoring can supplement existing selected marine pests whenever you snorkel or dive monitoring programs. The information collected by and record their presence or absence at selected community groups can be distributed directly to sites. Photographs of the target species selected for management agencies such as CSIRO or the the Marine Community Monitoring Program are Department of Fisheries and so effectively increase available with the Manual (Part II, Information the early detection network. Interestingly, most Sheet 8.0). Facts and information on other marine cases of introduced marine pest sightings in pests can be downloaded from this website Australia have been identified by members of the http://crimp.marine. csiro.au/nimpis.

Updated 24/04/03 Page 1 PART II (A): 9.0 Introduced marine pests public (e.g. fishermen, abalone divers, SCUBA • A laminated version of Information Sheet 8.1 divers etc.). (for use underwater).

The National Introduced Marine Pest Information System (NIMPIS) is an important tool for SPECIES IDENTIFICATION. management agencies, research institutions, The following are excellent sources to assist in consultants and the community. The information identifying the selected marine pest species. system contains species information on various • Part II B: information sheet 9.0; and marine pests and also enables marine pest sightings • http://crimp.marine. csiro.au/nimpis. from around the country to be reported on-line (http://crimp.marine. csiro.au/nimpis). Select sites that are in areas of high shipping/ boating use, such as ports, harbours and mooring LINKS TO OTHER METHOD/S areas. Or, simply conduct surveys at your favourite dive or snorkel site. & PROGRAM/S Prior to monitoring near jetties in harbours, This method links in with existing programs run by: individuals/groups should contact any relevant • CSIRO (National authority). Visit the following management agencies or groups, such as Port website (http://crimp.marine.csiro.au/nimpis) to Authorities, to obtain any necessary permits. obtain additional pest species information and also to report pest sightings by filling out the on-line Marine Pest Reporting Form; and. SITE DESCRIPTION • Department of Fisheries WA (State authority). This method allows sites to be monitored on an Marine pest sightings can also be reported to opportunistic basis, collecting information using Fisheries by contacting 1800 815 507. Data Sheet 9.1. • National black-striped Mussel Task Force. The method also enables sites to be monitored on a regular basis. This requires a Site registration form SUMMARY OF METHODOLOGY (Part 1 section 7.2) to be filled in with the following The focus of your survey may be a man made or information, so that the exact location can be re- natural marine environment. In which case the located and monitored over time: following two survey techniques can be used to • five nautical mile grid reference number; accommodate both: • site name; 1) Conduct a visual inspection of breakwaters, • site position in latitude and longitude (degrees, wharves, jetties and hulls of boats. minutes and decimals of a minute); 2) Conduct regular visual inspections of your • ‘mud’ map indicating the coverage of the visual favourite dive or snorkel site, focussing on the survey; different benthic habitats in the area. For • water depth; and example, amongst the seagrass, bare sand • PART III SECTION 2: SITE DESCRIPTION (ALL SUB- habitats and rocky reef environments. SECTIONS). Whatever survey technique you use, record the presence (and abundance) or absence of any / all HOW TO MONITOR listed species. The following should be carried out at each site: • identify the area to be surveyed and indicate the EQUIPMENT site position and area size on the ‘mud’ map on Data Sheet 9.0; NECESSARY • Using either technique survey the site (eg. along • snorkelling or SCUBA equipment; wharves and breakwaters or around the benthic • underwater slate; habitats) and in deeper water, concentrate your • Data sheet 9.1; search at variable depths. (eg. surface, 3m, 7m • Information sheets 9.0 (2 pages); and and bottom). The selection of depth intervals is • Set of five nautical mile grid sheets for WA dependent on water depth and visibility. There (refer to Part III section 4). should be complete visual coverage of all structures and adjacent seabed. In cases where OPTIONAL wharves have several rows of pylons, the inner • GPS unit (Most effective means of determining pylons should also be surveyed. site position) (refer to Part III section 2.2); and • As you will be working in pairs we suggest one • underwater video camera or underwater camera. person concentrate on plants and one on

Updated 24/04/03 Page 2 PART II (A): 9.0 Introduced marine pests animals. With each person carrying a laminated identification sheet (Information Sheet 9.0), identifications will be easier. • if suspected pests are sighted, indicate the exact location of the sighting on the ‘mud map’ along with any other relevant details; and • record an estimate of how many there are.

OPTIONAL METHODS If a camera or video camera is available, it is a good idea to photograph and/or video the suspected species. Refer to the information sheet for standard methods. If photographs or video footage are taken the details should be recorded on the Data Sheet 9.1.

WHEN TO MONITOR Sites should be monitored at least once a year, or on an opportunistic basis. Make an effort to become familiar with the appearance of each species, or take your laminated identification card out with you on your regular dives.

DATA COLLECTION AND MANAGEMENT The data collected should be entered on Data Sheet 9.0. Data submitted to CALM will be entered in the Marine Community Monitoring Database. Data updates will be available on the MCMP home page, allowing information generated on the distribution and abundance of selected marine pests to be viewed around the State.

ADDITIONAL NOTES Please read the following and refer to the relevant sections: • this method requires participants to use either snorkel or SCUBA diving equipment. Participants should be suitably trained, qualified and take care in this hazardous environment; • when monitoring around jetties and other structures, participants should first get approval from relevant agencies (eg. Port Authority). • PART IV SECTION 2: SAFETY ISSUES; AND • PART IV SECTION 3: BE ENVIRONMENTALLY SENSITIVE WHEN MONITORING.

Updated 24/04/03 Page 3 PART II (A): 9.0 Introduced marine pests Marine Community Monitoring Program

PART II (B) DATA AND INFORMATION SHEETS (SOCIAL)

10.0 LITTER SURVEYS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

10.1 DATA SHEET: LITTER SURVEYS PAGE 1 10.0 INFORMATION SHEET: LITTER SURVEYS PAGE 2

Page i M OR / / LENGTH WEIGHT KG ITEMS NUMBER Part II (B):10.1 Litter Surveys Part II (B):10.1 ROPE OTHER TOTAL FISHING LINE BAIT BUCKET FISHING NETS PLASTIC BAIT BAGS PLASTIC BAIT STRIPS PLASTIC CATCH BAGS M / OR / LENGTH ES MARINE LITTER FROM ACTIVITIES REQUIRED OBSERVATIONS WEIGHT KG ITEMS LITTER SURVEYS NUMBER Page 1 10.1 FOAM PAPER GLASS CLOTH OTHER METAL TOTAL RUBBER PLASTIC BOTTLES ALUMINIUM PLASTIC BAGS OTHER PLASTIC SIX PACK RINGS LITTER FROM TERRESTRIALLITTER FROM ACTIVITI

Marine Community Monitoring Program 2 ATE SHEET for D metres NUMBER . NUMBER . : SITE ID GROUP ID clock hour 24 e that a beach is surveyed. e

SITE DETAILS / Marine Monitoring Community Manual ) CONTACT DETAILS AND DATE AND CONTACT DETAILS W (metres) X (metres) Site registrationform / L ( IDTH ENGTH Refer to the the Refer to details. further PLEASE READ THIS SECTION BEFORE READ THIS SECTION PLEASE COMPLETING THE DATA SHEET. tim data sheet every Fill in the GROUP NAME Only* complete if you are registered with the MCMP. DATEDD / MM / YY SITE NAME * from TIME SIZEAPPROXIMATE SURVEY OF AREA L W AREA Updated 04/07/03 be measured or estimated. be measured Part II (B):10.1 Litter Surveys Part II (B):10.1 COUNTING & WEIGHING LITTER COUNTING & WEIGHING Thebasedsorted litter is then on the type of object and/or its composition. Different types and materials onare listed the data sheet. If litter items are composite based categorised be should it of materials number a of brush, wire handled (eg. plastic material main the on plastic). be to determined be would As the litter is sorted into categories a tally of the in each The category should be kept. of items number sorted and counted litter is then placedgarbage into placed litter is in When the the based on category. bags should sand and from free be should it bag appropriate where possible be reasonably dry. When all the litter be should (categories) bag/s the of each sorted been has weighedusing bathroom scales. If ropefishing or line is collected the should length LITTER SURVEYS may even be able to be able even may anning, particularly when : Select sites where there is 10.0 Page 2 : Organise for the removal of removal the for Organise : ng a beach litter survey. ng a LITTER CATEGORIES LITTER IDENTIFICATION : Make contact with the local council, and with the contact : Make PLANNING A LITTER SURVEY Define collection area collection Define build anknownDefine be area toa of litter. up monitored based on the available resources (eg. surveys, underwater for and participants of number SCUBA qualifications, divers and surface support); group/sLiaise legally with responsible for the area for approval get to order in agencies management groups These the survey. bags provide (eg. provide garbage and assistance collectedremove litter); and of Removal Litter collected litter.

Marine Community Monitoring Program Litter surveys require pre-pl The following points time. first the for out carried organisi suggest tips for • • • objectanydefined as largeris thanLitter a cigarette not collect Do naturally. occur not does that butt driftwood,on etc. Refer to the occurring naturally lists materials. of and types items common for sheet data the The collected sorted litter is first into two main and marine sources.categories,terrestrial litter from Use lists and the common knowledgebut if you are still category. place it in the terrestrial unsure, NFORMATION SHEET I : Participants should that they can assist in that they is toxicunknown, or ey can’t cut through the cut ey can’t Beware of the following: Beware : Avoid collecting: large/heavy SAFETY (eg. broken glass): Participants(eg. (eg. sun and elements): Participants (eg. unknown(eg. in chemicals a : Participants shouldParticipants: wear footwear and Syringes watch for syringes. are found If syringe/s they placed and tongs with up be picked only should container’; ‘sharps a into directly Sharp Objects objects. sharp for watch and footwear wear should Sharp objects should be pickedgloves using and be placed where th should bag, garbage Chemicals for watch should Participants container): If the chemical chemicals. inform the local council so its removal; Environment of their aware and be ‘sun smart’ should rocks); slippery waves, (eg. environment litter items Large items or liftingheavy garbage bags. If it anything heavy,too is note the location and arrangefor their collection; and fauna marine Harmful/toxic potentiallyforwatch dangerous fauna marine can cases fauna In many beach. on the washed up inflict injury evenwhen dead.

The following are safety issues relevant to relevant safety issues The following are conducting litter surveys. • • • • • • Updated 04/07/03 Marine Community Monitoring Program Marine Community Monitoring Manual

PART II (A) METHODS (SOCIAL)

10.0 LITTER SURVEYS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

10.1 LITTER SURVEYS PAGE 1 TO 3

Page i Marine Community Monitoring Manual

10.1 LITTER SURVEYS

METHOD RATING (LAND) 0

(UNDERWATER) 000

OBJECTIVES To monitor trends in the amount, type and origin of litter found in Western Australia at: • selected beaches and / or • underwater environments (collection by SCUBA divers). • litter that originates from coastal fishing industries and includes discarded/lost equipment BACKGROUND (eg. floats, ropes, bait cages) and packaging The quantity of litter that finds its way into the materials (eg bait bands). In Western Australia world’s oceans and is eventually washed up on the major fishing industries include the rock coasts is of growing global concern, likewise the lobster industry of the midwest and trawling amount of litter that accumulates in the underwater industry in the north; and environment. • litter from international and offshore sources, which is transported to and along the Western The most tragic impact of ocean litter is on marine Australian coast by the west-ward drift and the and coastal fauna. Every year countless thousands of southerly flowing Leeuwin current. Countries in marine mammals, turtles and seabirds die from south east Asia (eg. Indonesia) are the major swallowing plastic bags and other objects, or from contributors. becoming trapped in discarded fishing gear. This is becoming a major threat to wildlife in Australia, with some studies estimating that at any one time, RELEVANCE TO MANAGEMENT around 500 seals in Tasmanian waters have ‘collars’ In Australia, and specifically Western Australia, of plastic. there is limited information available on amounts of litter deposited onto beaches and into the ocean. Litter can also have significant social and economic costs. For example, ocean litter washed up on Litter monitoring programs: popular tourist beaches can reduce its aesthetic • improve amenities by removing litter from appeal and cause a potential health hazard if some beaches; items are sharp or contaminated. This could result in • provide information on litter quantity, type and fewer people using the beaches and lead to a loss in origin; tourism revenue. • act as a basis for implementing targeted education and enforcement strategies; and Ocean litter refers to any item that is directly • provide data to determine whether current litter dumped or finds it's way indirectly into the ocean management strategies are successful. (eg. litter discharged by a river). Litter items can range in size from a cigarette stub to the size of a sea container. Litter items are composed of all types of LINKS TO OTHER METHOD/S materials including, metal, plastic, and rubber. & PROGRAM/S The Western Australian coastline is approximately There has been a variety of beach litter monitoring 12,500 kilometres long and is susceptible to litter programs developed in the past, but the majority of from four main sources, which include: these programs are no longer running. • litter originating from beach use in high use areas such as the Perth metropolitan area; • litter washed into the ocean from catchment SUMMARY OF METHODOLOGY areas in the high rainfall areas in the The types, source (fishing/ terrestrial), weight (kg/ south/southwestern parts of the state (eg. Swan 2 2 River); m ) and number (number/ m ) of litter collected

Updated 30/03/03 Page 1 PART II (A): 10.1 Litter surveys Marine Community Monitoring Manual from beaches and /or beneath the water is monitored The following details need to be recorded on the Site annually. registration form: • site name (beach name); • five nautical mile grid reference; EQUIPMENT • site position in latitude and longitude (degrees, NECESSARY minutes and decimals of a minute); • Site registration form; • ‘mud’ map indicating the start and end points of • Data sheet 10.1; the transect; and • Information sheet 10.0; • PART II SECTION I: SITE DESCRIPTION (ALL SUB- • set of five nautical mile grid sheets for WA SECTIONS) (refer to Part III section 4.0); • strong garbage bags or hessian sacks (re- HOW TO MONITOR useable); • scales for weighing litter eg bathroom/kitchen ESTABLISHING A MONITORING SITE scales; The following should be carried out when a site is • fibreglass tape measure (~50m) (refer to Part III first monitored/ visited: section 3.2); and • determine the approximate area (ie. length and • SCUBA equipment – for underwater surveys width) of the litter survey site. This area will be reliant on the resources available (ie. time and SAFETY number of participants) and the physical • leather garden gloves (for each participant); characteristics of the beach (ie. its length and width), or for an underwater site, the area • tongs (used for the collection of dangerous beneath a jetty). The size of this survey area items eg. syringes); and should be standardised for future monitoring • container for syringes (commercial safety events. containers available). • complete the Site registration form; and • record the approximate area of the survey site OPTIONAL (ie. length and width), on Data sheet 10.1. • GPS unit (Most effective means of determining • If you are collecting litter at the same site from site position) (refer to Part III section 2.2). under the water and on land then you can group and weigh the litter together. There is no need to LITTER IDENTIFICATION separate and process them independently.

This method requires participant/s to identify litter COLLECTING LITTER items listed on Data sheet 10.1 that are larger than a Before collecting litter please read the Safety cigarette butt. Section. The following should be carried out during ITE SELECTION subsequent visits: S • re-locate the start of the survey area by using Select sites that are: the information detailed on the Site registration 1. on sandy beaches; form; • easily accessible; and • collect all the litter within the survey area; • known to get a build up of litter. • collected litter should be placed into garbage Avoid rocky beaches and breakwaters as they bags, stockpiled if it is too bulky, or placed into are dangerous to work (slippery) and litter is suitable containers if dangerous (eg. syringe, typically hard to remove as it becomes lodged broken bottle); and between rocks. • when the transect has been completed, bring all 2. at strategic underwater locations eg. popular the litter bags and stockpiled litter back to a fishing spots, harbours, jetties, groynes, sheltered central location that has enough area permanent moorings etc. to sort the litter.

SITE DESCRIPTION PROCESSING LITTER At the central location sort, count and weigh the Once a monitoring site is established the Site litter by the categories listed on Data sheet 10.1. Registration Form should be completed and This can be achieved by: submitted to obtain a Site registration number. This • labelling empty litter bags with each of the should be recorded, along with the site name, on all category names listed on Data sheet 10.1; the Data Sheets for the site. • sorting the litter into the categories. As litter is placed in the appropriate bag, it should be

Updated 30/03/03 Page 2 PART II (A): 10.1 Litter surveys Marine Community Monitoring Manual

counted (record on Data sheet 10.1) and cleaned • when working at the beach always be aware of of excess sand and water; your surroundings, watch for waves and sharp • weighing each of the bags (categories) to the objects. Never work alone; nearest 0.25 kg using bathroom scales. Record • beaches are a sensitive environment susceptible the total weight of each category on Data sheet to erosion caused by human activities; 9.1; • PART IV SECTION 2.0: SAFETY ISSUES; AND • rope, fishing line and net should not be weighed • PART IV SECTION 3: BE ENVIRONMENTALLY but the length should be estimated to the nearest SENSITIVE WHEN MONITORING. metre and recorded; and • disposing of the sorted, counted and weighed litter at an appropriate facility. Remember that some items can be recycled.

TERRESTRIAL FISHING SOURCES SOURCES • aluminium • plastic bait wrappings • glass • plastic catch bags • plastic bottles • plastic bait straps • plastic bags • bait bucket • six-pack rings • fishing net • other plastic • floats • metal • rope • cloth • fishing line • rubber • other (unknown) • foam • other (unknown)

• INFORMATION SHEET 10.1: LITTER CATEGORIES AND SAFETY

WHEN TO MONITOR Monitor beaches at least once a year. Monitoring beaches after winter is more likely to collect sea based litter that has been washed ashore during winter storms. Monitoring after summer months is more likely to collect litter originating from beach users, particularly on heavily visited beaches. Try to monitor twice a year after winter and summer to document these seasonal trends.

DATA COLLECTION AND MANAGEMENT The data collected should be entered on Data Sheet 10.1. Data submitted to CALM will be entered in the Marine Community Monitoring Database. Data updates will be available on the MCMP home page, allowing information generated on the distribution and abundance of marine litter collected, to be viewed around the State.

ADDITIONAL NOTES Please read the following and refer to the relevant sections:

Updated 30/03/03 Page 3 PART II (A): 10.1 Litter surveys Marine Community Monitoring Manual

Updated 30/03/03 Marine Community Monitoring Manual

PART II (B) DATA AND INFORMATION SHEETS (SOCIAL)

11.0 HUMAN USAGE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

11.1 DATA SHEET: BOAT RAMP USAGE PAGE 1 AND 2 11.2 DATA SHEET: RECREATIONAL BOATING SITES PAGE 3 AND 4

Page i NUMBER TRAILERS ) TIME PART II (B): 11.1Usage RampPART II Boat 24 hour clock hour 24 ( 2) ) YY OF / 1 MM / DATE DD ( PAGE ( on 10 occasions, focussing on high usage times of the year (ie. REQUIRED OBSERVATIONS OBSERVERS NAME Page 1 * 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 DATE BOAT RAMP USAGE MONITORING RECORD THE NUMBER OF CARS WITH BOAT TRAILERS *Provisions to monitor same the site public holidays, weekends etc.). 11.1

Marine Community Monitoring Manual .* .* NO . NO . for details for on the ATA SHEET D Letter Number environmentally sensitive. environmentally SITE DETAILS CONTACT DETAILS Marine Community Monitoring Manual Monitoring Community Marine method, safety and being safety and method, PLEASE READ THIS SECTION BEFORE COMPLETING BEFORE READ THIS SECTION PLEASE SHEET. THE DATA thatevery a site is monitored.datasheet time Refer to thein Fill the GROUP NAME Only* complete if you are registered with the MCMP. BOAT RAMP NAME GROUP REG * From the Site registration form. FIVE NAUTICAL MILE GRID REFERENCE REG SITE Updated 30/04/03 HEAVY MOD RAINFALL LIGHT NIL PART II (B): 11.1Usage RampPART II Boat ROUGH 2) OF 2 MOD g day (10 multiple observations). PAGE WATER ( LIGHT CALM ) , SE E , , SW W , , S , NE N , Page 2 ( NW WIND DIRECTION BOAT RAMP USAGE GALE OPTIONAL OBSERVATIONS 11.1

Marine Community Monitoring Manual STRONG WIND MOD ATA SHEET D LIGHT CALM (%) CLOUD COVER *. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 DATE ENVIRONMENTAL PARAMETERS Please tick the applicableprovidebox or the requested information.*REP - Provisions to record information for each monitorin Updated 30/04/03 D ** C B 2) the shaded column only. column shaded the MULTIPLE OBSERVATIONS OF A 1 (ie. A, B, C and D) and record human D) and A, B, C and (ie. ) PAGE ( PART II (B): 11.2PART II Recreational Boating Sites TIME 24 hour clock ( ) onitored record information in record information onitored YY / OBSERVATIONS MM DATE / DD ( coast divide the area into sections into area the coast divide Page 3 NAME OBSERVERS * 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 DATE RECREATIONAL BOATING SITES MONITORING RECORD THE NUMBER OF BOATS OBSERVED AT THE SITE holidays, public (ie. year of the times usage high on focussing occasions, 10 on site same the monitor to Provisions of large stretch For a *. etc.) weekends site/ section is m one only in each section**. If usage Marine Community Monitoring Manual 11.2 for * ATA SHEET * D * SITE DETAILS Letter Number CONTACT DETAILS Marine Monitoring Community Manual details on the method, safety and being and safety method, the on details environmentally sensitive. PLEASE READ THIS SECTION BEFORE READ THIS SECTION PLEASE COMPLETING THE DATA SHEET. datasheet that every a site is monitored. thein time Fill the Refer to . GROUP NAME GROUP REGISTRATION NUMBER Only* complete if you are registered with the MCMP BOAT RAMP NAME * Official or descriptive name NUMBER SITE REGISTRATION * From the Site registration form FIVE NAUTICAL MILE GRID REFERENCE Updated 30/04/03 A / N DIVE ** D . SECTION 2) ANCH OF 2 FISH PAGE ( PART II (B): 11.2PART II Recreational Boating Sites A / N table, Page 1) and then multiplying100. by ), recordboating activities within each section DIVE ** C . SECTION ANCH coast to be surveyed. to be coast FISH Page 4 A / N DIVE OPTIONAL OBSERVATIONS ** to relocate each section of section relocate each to B . = Unknown activities. = Unknown

SECTION RECREATIONAL BOATING SITES ANCH

Marine Community Monitoring Manual N/A ly. If you havedividedly. If you site into yoursections D** (ie. A to

a particular activity by the totalofboats number (Observations Diving, 11.2 FISH Site registration form SCUBA = A / N DIVE DIVE ATA SHEET ** SECTION A D / . ngrefer to the the site SITE = vessel at anchor, = vessel at anchor, ANCH

ANCH FISH *. = fishing,

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 DATE individually. When revisiti When individually. PERCENTAGE OF BOATS ENGAGED IN ACTIVITIES OF BOATS ENGAGED PERCENTAGE in engaged boats of number the dividing by calculated is This FISH are onlyIf you monitoringfill inone the site, shaded section on Updated 30/04/03 PART II (B): 11.2PART II Recreational Boating Sites Page 5

Marine Community Monitoring Manual Updated 30/04/03 Marine Community Monitoring Program

PART II (A) METHODS (SOCIAL)

11.0 HUMAN USAGE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

11.1 BOAT RAMP USAGE PAGE 1 AND 2 11.2 RECREATIONAL BOATING SITES PAGE 3 AND 4

Page i Marine Community Monitoring Manual

11.1 BOAT RAMP USAGE

METHOD RATING 0

OBJECTIVES To monitor boat ramp usage at selected sites in Western Australia as a relative index of patterns and trends of human usage of the marine environment.

boat ramp (eg. coral reef health and fish populations). By looking at the usage data, BACKGROUND managers and scientists can determine the level There are numerous boat ramps along the Western of pressure on the marine environment in the Australian coastline and estuaries. Boat ramps general area; and provide access to the water for recreational and • to determine the current usage and predict future commercial boats launched from trailers. There are usage, and whether specific boat ramps and two basic types of boat ramp - naturally occurring facilities are able to meet current and future access points such as the beach boat ramp at Coral requirements or if they need to be upgraded. Bay, and specifically constructed boat ramps. The types and size of boats that can use the various boat ramps depend on the type of ramp, boat and local LINKS TO OTHER conditions. METHODS/PROGRAMS Western Australia has a large and active boating This method links in with existing programs run by community, with approximately 70,000 registered the Research Division of Fisheries WA. These boats. A high percentage of these boats are launched include regional recreational fishing boat surveys. from trailers. The location of boat ramps determines the main operation areas of many boats with a limited operating range. It is a common practice for SUMMARY OF METHODOLOGY people to transport their boats long distances before Record the number of boat trailers in car parks in the using them (eg. Perth to Coral Bay). vicinity of boat ramps.

The usage of boat ramps is dependent predominantly on its location and the season. In the south west and EQUIPMENT southern regions of the state, peak usage occurs during the summer months, particularly during NECESSARY holidays (eg. school and public). Boat ramps in and • Data Sheet 11.1; around the metropolitan area and at holiday • Information Sheet 11.0; and destinations have the highest level of use. In the • set of five nautical mile grid sheets for WA northern regions of the state, peak usage occurs (refer to Part VI). during the winter months and particularly during holidays (eg. school and public). Boat ramps at OPTIONAL popular holiday destinations also have a high level • GPS unit (Most effective means of determining of usage. site position) (refer to Part III section 2.2).

RELEVANCE TO MANAGEMENT SITE SELECTION Monitoring the number of boats at boat ramps Once a site is established fill in a Site registration around the state can be used to identify trends in form (Part I: ‘Starting Up’) and submit this to the boat ramp usage. This data can be used in two main MCMP to obtain a Site registration number. This ways: should be recorded, along with the site name, on all Data sheets for the site. • to assist in the interpretation of data collected by other monitoring programs in the vicinity of the

Updated 30/03/03 Page 1 PART II (A): 11.1 Boat Ramp Usage Marine Community Monitoring Manual

The following details need to be recorded on the Site registration form: • five nautical mile grid reference; • site name; • site position in latitude and longitude (degrees, minutes and decimals of a minute); • ‘mud’ map, indicating the location of the boat ramp; and • PART III SECTION 2: SITE DESCRIPTION (ALL SUB- SECTIONS).

SITE DESCRIPTION The following information should be recorded on Data sheet 11.1 for each boat ramp: • name of the boat ramp; • five nautical mile grid reference number; and • site position in latitude and longitude (degrees, minutes and decimals of a minute); and • PART III SECTION 2.0: SITE DESCRIPTION (ALL SUB- SECTIONS).

HOW TO MONITOR Record the number of boat trailers in the vicinity of the boat ramp (eg. car parks) on Data sheet 11.1.

OPTIONAL METHODS This optional information records natural conditions, which can affect the level and nature of boat usage: • wind strength; • wind direction; • swell conditions; • rainfall; and • cloud cover, by estimating the percentage of cover.

WHEN TO MONITOR Monitoring should be carried out regularly throughout the year, particularly during peak usage times, including public and school holidays, during the summer months in southern regions and during the winter in the northern regions. Ideally boat ramps should be monitored during mid-morning.

DATA COLLECTION AND DATA MANAGEMENT The data collected should be entered on Data Sheet 11.1. Data submitted to CALM will be entered in the Marine Community Monitoring Database. Data updates will be provided on the MCMP web page, showing trends in boat ramp usage within and between sites around Western Australia.

Updated 30/03/03 Page 2 PART II (A): 11.1 Boat Ramp Usage Marine Community Monitoring Manual

11.2 RECREATIONAL BOATING SITES

METHOD RATING 0

OBJECTIVE To monitor the nature, patterns and trends of boat usage at popular boating sites throughout Western Australia, as a relative index of human usage of the marine environment.

BACKGROUND LINKS TO OTHER METHOD/S Western Australia has a large and active boating community, with approximately 70,000 registered & PROGRAM/S boats. The level usage of boating sites depends on: This method links in with existing programs run by • types of activities that can be carried out in the the Research Division of Fisheries WA, including area (eg. fishing, and SCUBA diving); regional recreational fishing boat surveys. • environmental conditions in the area (eg. sea and weather conditions); • accessibility to an area (ie. proximity to boat SUMMARY OF METHODOLOGY ramp/harbour); Count the number boats at popular boating sites. • the time of the year (eg. in the southern regions of the state, peak times occur during the summer while in the northern region, peak times EQUIPMENT occur during the winter, in particular during NECESSARY holidays). • Site registration form (refer to Part I “Starting Up”, section 7.2); RELEVANCE TO MANAGEMENT • Data sheet 11.2; and • set of five nautical mile grid sheets for WA Monitoring the level and nature of boat usage at (refer to Part VI). popular boating sites provides data that can be used by management agencies to: OPTIONAL • establish relevant monitoring programs, • GPS unit (Most effective means of determining educational strategies and other management site position) (refer to Part III section 2.4). mechanisms; • assist in the interpretation of data from monitoring programs in the vicinity of popular SITE SELECTION boating sites. If a program monitoring the health of coral reefs at popular dive site discovered a Select sites that are popular boating sites such as: downward trend in coral health, then it could be • Anchorages; possible that boating activities such as • fishing sites; anchoring could be a contributing factor; • SCUBA diving sites; • assist in the development or revision of • island locations; and management plans; • PART I ‘STARTING UP’ SECTION 3 (ALL SUBSECTIONS). • determine whether current and predicted usage warrants the installation of facilities such as moorings to minimise impacts and satisfy the SITE DESCRIPTION needs of boat users. Once a site is established the Site registration form needs to be completed and submitted to the MCMP to obtain a Site registration number. The Site registration number should be recorded on all data sheets for that site.

Updated 16/06/03 Page 3

PART II (A): 11.2 Recreational Boating Sites Marine Community Monitoring Manual

The following details will need to be recorded on the WHEN TO MONITOR Site registration form: Monitoring should occur during peak usage times, • five nautical mile grid reference number; which include weekends, public/ school holidays • site name (official or descriptive name); and during the summer and autumn months in the • site position in latitude and longitude (degrees, southern region of the state and during the winter in minutes and decimals of a minute); the northern regions of the state. • ‘mud’ map indicating the location of the site; and • PART III SECTION 2.0: SITE DESCRIPTION (ALL SUB- DATA COLLECTION AND DATA SECTIONS) MANAGEMENT The data collected should be entered on Data Sheet HOW TO MONITOR 11.2. Data submitted to CALM will be entered in the The following should be recorded: Marine Community Monitoring Database. Data • the number of boats at the site; and updates will be available on the MCMP home page, • the percentage of boats engaged in selected allowing information generated to be compared activities (ie. fishing, anchoring and diving). within and between sites around Western Australia.

The data sheets has options for multiple observations (see below), if you are only monitoring one site, record information in the shaded columns on Data sheet 11.2 and leave the other columns blank.

OPTIONAL METHODS

MULTIPLE OBSERVATIONS If the site you are interested in monitoring is quite large with numerous features, which attract different human activities, it would be beneficial to divide the site into sections. For example, you could divide a 1 km section of coast into 5 sections and record human activities in each section separately or have one person monitor each section.

To define sections, use relocatable benchmarks (ie. a carpark, the intersection of a road opposite the beach, a headland or rocky outcrop) and number the sections. When you re-monitor it is important to use these benchmarks to re-locate each section of beach.

This information will provide additional information on human usage patterns within the defined area and may assist management with decisions on where to put in a mooring or where to focus additional surveillance.

ENVIRONMENTAL PARAMETERS This optional information records natural conditions, which potentially affect the level and nature of boat usage: • wind strength; • wind direction; • swell conditions; • rainfall; and • cloud cover, by estimating the percentage of cover.

Updated 16/06/03 Page 4

PART II (A): 11.2 Recreational Boating Sites Marine Community Monitoring Manual

Updated 16/06/03 Page 5

PART II (A): 11.2 Recreational Boating Sites Marine Community Monitoring Program

PART III

MANUAL – ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Marine Community Monitoring Program

PART III: TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHY PAGE 1 TO 5 1.1 .BACKGROUND INFORMATION ON AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHY 1.2 ACCESSING THE DOLA WEBSITE AND VIEWING IMAGES 1.3USING ER-VIEWER TO OPEN YOUR IMAGE

2.0 SITE DESCRIPTIONS PAGE 5 TO 8 2.1 THE FIVE NAUTICAL MILE GRID SYSTEM 2.2 SITE POSITION (WAYPOINT) 2.3 ‘MUD MAPS’

3.0 SITE DESCRIPTIONS PAGE 8 TO 13 3.1 WATERPROOF PARER OR UNDERWATER SLATES 3.2 TAPE MEASURES 3.3 COMPASS 3.4 TIDE CHARTS 3.5 NAUTICAL CHARTS 3.6 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VIDEO 3.7 TRANSECT LINES 3.8 SECCHI DISC 3.9 THERMOMETERS 3.10 TEMPERATURE LOGGERS 3.11 DEBENHAM LEVELS

Page i Marine Community Monitoring Program

1.0 AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHY The use of aerial photographs to assist with monitoring the marine environment is beneficial for the following reasons:

• to assist with site selection; • to define the boundaries of different habitats eg. seagrass meadows, rocky reef and bare sand areas; and • to assist with drawing site maps or ‘mud’ maps.

There are various methods for obtaining aerial photographs. The following information outlines one method, which utilises the Department of Land Administration (DOLA) website and SkyView WA. SkyView WA displays digital aerial and satellite imagery for purchase on-line. Using SkyView you can find your area of interest on a map, view the imagery and then purchase the image on-line, all at the click of a button.

There are three important considerations when accessing aerial photographs of the West Australian coastline:

1. not all coastal areas in Western Australia are covered by the flight paths used to obtain the images; 2. images are classified as high or low resolution. You can use whatever is available but obviously the higher resolution is better quality; and 3. image quality depends on various factors. Most importantly, if the photograph was taken on a very windy, stormy day then the marine habitats beneath the surface may not be visible form the air, or will be distorted and therefore of little use. Only use photographs if the images are clear and include the benthic habitats beneath the surface.

SkyView WA is currently available using only Internet Explorer Version 5+ for Windows 95, 98 and 2000. For more information about this service the reader is directed to the website where additional information can be obtained (eg. Frequently Asked Questions, FAQ’s and Handyhints fact sheets).

1.1 BACKGROUND INFORMATION ON AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHY After clicking on Aerial Photography, two options are available:

• Skyview WA and • Information on aerial photography

The reader is directed to follow Step 1 through to Step 5 of the prompts below (Section 1.2.1). Please read the ‘information on aerial photography’ provided, before commencing to Skyview WA. The pages provide information on the types of images obtained, the various flight paths taken around Western Australia and other general information.

Once you have navigated around these pages and read the information continue to the next stage (Skyview WA) to search and view images.

1.2 ACCESSING THE DOLA WEBSITE AND VIEWING IMAGES

1.2.1 EXAMPLE: ROTTNEST ISLAND We will use the Rottnest Island mosaic (DOLA map: Rottnest Island 2002) and target Porpoise Bay for the purpose of the following exercise. The exercise you are about to do, will guide you through the process of viewing and obtaining images of Rottnest Island from the DOLA website (Figure 1 to Figure 4). The exercise will demonstrate how to:

• navigate about the DOLA website; • use the zoom tool to select areas of interest from the initial mosaic; • purchase an ECW format image (on CD-ROM) of the area you are interested in; and • view the ECW format image on ER Viewer (free software provided with the image).

Please refer to Figure 1 to Figure 4 on the following pages. You will observe from the images that the water clarity, on the particular day the photographs were taken, is quite high. This enables features (or

Page 1 Marine Community Monitoring Program

habitats) to be visible through the water. For example the darkened patches may represent seagrass or possibly low relief reef platform and the lighter areas may represent predominantly bare sand habitat.

For the purpose of this exercise you are interested in monitoring the habitat surrounding a sandy spit at the southern end of Porpoise Bay. Using Internet Explorer you will view images identical to those contained in the following exercise (Figure 1 to 4). Follow the prompts below, allowing a total of 40 minutes for the exercise (some images may take time to download).

Go to: www.dola.wa.gov.au 4Arrows indicate prompts to follow as you navigate around the site.

1. 4Products and Services 2. 4Aerial photography 3. 4Land On Line (red icon) 4. 4Skyview WA 5. 4“GO” (blue icon) 6. At this point you may be asked to install the ‘Image Webserver ECW plug in for Internet Explorer’. Follow the prompts, install the plug-in and proceed as directed. 7. 4Proceed 8. Tabs on the bottom of the window show High and Low image resolution options. Remain in the High resolution window. 9. 4High resolution 10. The Right hand window lists locations with high resolution aerial photographs. By clicking on the file logo (to the right of the window) you can access any of these images 11. 4Scroll down to Rottnest Island 2002 12. There are ‘tabs’ to view a Map or Image. window. 13. Remain in Map 14. The tool bar on the top left hand side of the window allows the user to navigate about the image. Use the Zoom rectangle icon to select the area you wish to enlarge. 15. Select the same area depicted in Figure 1 and zoom in to Porpoise Bay (the image has been fully downloaded onto your screen when the bar at the bottom stops scrolling). 16. Repeat this process as you zoom in further (refer to Figure 2). 17. Again, repeat this process as you zoom in further (refer to Figure 3). 18. END – you should have an image identical to Figure 4 on your screen. 19. The image area, visible on your screen (eg. Figure 4) can be purchased by clicking on the “BUY” icon. This is only an exercise. Proceed with the following steps once you have identified the site you are interested in. 20. Select ECW image from the drop down window (not JPG) and follow the prompts to finalise purchase. Please read Section 1.2.2 for more information on what image format to use and why (JPG or ECW image). 21. As an example this purchase of Purpoise Bay (RI) will cost you about $20 and for this you will receive a CD-ROM with the following information: a) The ECW format image you requested. b) Free software (ER Viewer) to open and view the image. c) A metadata file with all relevant information about the image.

1.3 USING ER-VIEWER TO OPEN YOUR ECW IMAGE You can purchase a JPG image (not geo-referenced images) and download it straight to your computer (not recommended). Or you can order an ECW image (geo-referenced images), which will be delivered to you as a CD-ROM disk. ECW stands for enhanced compressed wavelets. The remainder of the exercise applies only to ECW format images.

It will take about two weeks to receive your CD-ROM. When received commence as follows:

Updated 9/05/03 Page 2 PART III: Manual – Additional Information Marine Community Monitoring Program

1) Install the ER-VIEWER software by clicking on the Program File and following the prompts. 2) Once installed open your image in ER-VIEWER. 3) The benefits of purchasing an ECW image over a JPEG image become evident when using ER- VIEWER to view your site. Two of these benefits are listed below: a) You can use the ‘Ruler’ tool to measure the distance (metres) between two points on the photograph (image). b) You can pinpoint and obtain a waypoint for any feature on your image (format: Eastings and Northings). For example, if you place your cursor on a particular point the Eastings and Northings can be viewed in the bottom right of the window. As you move your cursor these change accordingly.

Please note that when you eventually purchase the ECW image, the resolution will be far better than the images provided in this exercise (Figure 1 to Figure 4).

Now that you are familiar with the site you can search the site and view aerial photographs of locations you are interested in. If available these ECW images will assist you with site selection by defining the boundaries of different habitats (eg. seagrass meadows, rocky reef and bare sand areas) and assisting you in drawing a habitat map.

Figure 1: DOLA map, Rottnest Island 2002. The square encompasses Porpoise Bay (as seen on http://www.landonline.com.au/skyviewwa).

Updated 9/05/03 Page 3 PART III: Manual – Additional Information Marine Community Monitoring Program

Figure 2: Porpoise Bay. The square encompasses the southern area of Porpoise Bay we are interested in.

Figure 3: Southern Porpoise Bay. Showing the sandy headland. The square represents the potential monitoring site.

Updated 9/05/03 Page 4 PART III: Manual – Additional Information Marine Community Monitoring Program

Figure 4: Purpoise Bay - the potential monitoring site Note the detail in the water, representing the different habitats present at the site (eg. seagrass, bare sand, rocky reef).

2.0 SITE DESCRIPTIONS

2.1 THE FIVE NAUTICAL MILE GRID SYSTEM Fisheries WA developed a simple grid system for recreational fisheries data. Each grid is assigned a reference, with a letter and a number. The letter is read off the horizontal axis and the number of the vertical axis.

The Marine Community Monitoring Program has adopted this five nautical mile grid system. The grid system provides a useful tool: To enable monitoring and recording of information at sensitive sites, without having to divulge the exact waypoint. For example; you can record the grid reference number on your Site Registration Form instead of the waypoint to prevent recreational fisherman or others from visiting a site where you may be regularly recording large numbers of potato cod. To enable information to be stored and transferred to a GIS database in the future. The grid system can be found in the Appendices section (PART III).

2.2 SITE POSITION (WAYPOINT) The location of the monitoring site should be recorded in latitude and longitude using the format: degrees, minutes and decimals of a minute (to three decimal places). Where possible the datum ‘WGS84’ should be used, or if an alternative datum is used it should be noted on the relevant Data sheets. The recording of a site position, or waypoint, is useful for re-locating permanent sites or for defining benchmarks (eg. the start of a transect line). The Site Registration Form and Data Sheets have provisions to record waypoints.

The waypoint can be determined using either of two standard methods which are detailed below.

USING A GPS UNIT TO DETERMINE SITE POSITION (LATITUDE & LONGITUDE) A Global Positioning System (GPS) unit is the most effective and accurate method of determining a site position (Figure 1). GPS units operate by tracking and using satellites to determine their position to

Updated 9/05/03 Page 5 PART III: Manual – Additional Information Marine Community Monitoring Program

within ± ~20 meters (error can vary). The price of GPS units has dropped in recent years due to their popularity, so basic units cost around $300.

GPS units are listed as an optional item on the Method Sheets. Despite their optional tag it is strongly recommended that participants use a GPS unit for their monitoring work. If a GPS unit is not available, then refer the following for alternative methods of determining the site position in latitude and longitude.

Basic GPS units like the Garmin 12 are simple to use and come with a comprehensive instruction manual to guide you on operations and functions.

Figure 1. A typical Global Positioning System (GPS) unit: Garmin 12

ALTERNATIVE METHODS TO DETERMINE THE WAYPOINT If a GPS unit is not available a waypoint can be determined by plotting the site position on a nautical chart and reading the latitude and longitude off the chart axes. Latitude and longitude read off the chart is in the format of degrees, minutes and seconds and needs to converted to the format degrees, minutes and decimals of a minute prior to being recorded on the Site Registration Form and or Data Sheet.

The box below details the conversion.

CONVERTING DEGREE, MINUTES, AND SECONDS TO DEGREES, MINUTES, AND DECIMAL OF A MINUTE • The degrees and minutes stay the same • Divide the seconds by 60 and add it to the minutes.

EXAMPLE:

• position in degree, minutes and seconds is 33º 19’ 25”; • divide the seconds by 60 giving the answer to three decimal places ( ie 25/60 = 0.417); • add the answer to the minutes ( ie 0.417 + 19 = 19.417); and • combine the answer with the original degrees, which gives the site position in degrees minutes and decimals of a minute ie 33º 19.417

PLOTTING THE SITE POSITION ON A NAUTICAL CHART Plotting a site position on a nautical chart can be carried out in two ways using distinctive landmarks, visible from the site and marked on the nautical chart. Landmarks can include navigational structures/aids such as pylons, distinctive structures such as radio masts and distinctive landforms such as headlands.

If a monitoring site is located on or adjacent to a distinctive feature, that is marked on the chart. Then the site position can be plotted onto the chart using the distinctive feature as a guide. For example, if a monitoring site is located on a navigation marker, then the site can be plotted onto a chart, as navigational markers are marked on charts.

If there is doubt about the site position, or there are no close distinctive features, then the site position should be plotted using a minium of three sightings/ bearings. A sighting/ bearing refers to the compass bearing (direction) of a distinctive feature, as observed from the site. The compass bearing is recorded and the process repeated twice more using different features.

The three compass bearings are then plotted on a nautical chart, using the map’s compass rosette to determine the compass bearings. The bearing is transferred from the rosette to the general location of the site using a parallel ruler (Figure 2). A line is drawn along this bearing. This is repeated for the other two bearings. The site position is the point at which the three lines intersect. However in most cases the three lines will not intersect but will form a triangle. In this situation the site position lies within the triangle. If

Updated 9/05/03 Page 6 PART III: Manual – Additional Information Marine Community Monitoring Program

the triangle is large, the bearings should be re-taken and plotted until the lines intercept or the triangle is small. An example has been provided on the following page (Figure 3).

Figure 2. Parallel ruler on a nautical chart

1 3

Figure 3 This figure is a portion of an Australian Hydrographic Office digital chart (not to be used for navigation) for the Port of Dampier. The monitoring site marked on the chart is located on a reef and marked as a small circle on the chart. The site position can be plotted on the chart using two methods: • the site is located on a distinctive feature (small reef) that is marked on the chart, so using this feature the site can be plotted directly and accurately on the chart; or • the site can also be plotted on the chart by taking three sightings (bearing) of distinct features. Bearing 1:middle of Haycock Island on a bearing of 265°. Bearing 2: headland of West Intercourse Island on a bearing of 225°. Bearing 3: headland on West Mid Intercourse Island on a bearing of 145°. These bearings were plotted on the chart and the point at which they intersect is the site location. When the site has been plotted, the latitude and longitude can be determined by using the scale on the axes of the chart. In this case the latitude is 20°40.00’ S and the longitude 116°38.75’. Refer to Box 5 for converting this latitude and longitude to the format, degrees, minutes, and decimals of a minute.

2.3 ‘MUD’ MAPS A ‘mud’ map is a hand-drawn map of the monitoring site, drawn from an underwater and above-water perspective. ‘Mud’ maps provide a medium for recording any additional information on the site location. ‘Mud’ maps should be drawn on the Site Registration Form or Data Sheet. These maps are a key reference for the re-location of monitoring sites and therefore need to be as detailed and accurate as possible. The information that should be recorded on ‘mud’ maps’ include:

• position and size of distinctive features (regardless of whether they are marked on a nautical chart); • an indication of north such as a ‘north arrow’; • estimated distance/s between distinctive feature/s; • anchorage areas when the site is visited; • distinctive benthic habitat/s (seagrass, reef etc.);

Updated 9/05/03 Page 7 PART III: Manual – Additional Information Marine Community Monitoring Program

• compass bearing/s of distinctive features; and • the position of what is being monitored • the location of replicate sites with benchmarks for each, described and drawn on the mud map.

An example of a mud map that you may draw is provided on the following page (Figure 3).

Ship wreck Navigation Porites Marker Porites bommie bommie 2 Channel 1 REEF Porites REEF bommie 3

SAND SEAGRASS

500m ANCHORAGE 500m

330° BOAT RAMP

LAND LIGHT HOUSE

Figure 3 The above figure is an example of a ‘mud’ map you might draw for a monitoring site. There is considerable detail drawn on the map, which will assist in the re-location of the site.

3.0 STANDARD EQUIPMENT USED IN MONITORING This section describes some of the standard equipment/ materials that are commonly used in monitoring. The section provides information on where equipment can be purchased or how to make your own.

3.1 WATERPROOF PAPER OR UNDERWATER SLATES

3.1.1 WATERPROOF PAPER Waterproof paper is also very useful for monitoring. There are various companies that sell waterproof paper. We suggest using ‘Celcast’ paper, which is a photocopier / laser and inkjet paper product (www.celcast.com.au). One supplier is Docuprint W.A. Pty. Ltd. ([email protected]). This option can be expensive as an A4 sheet works out at $1 each. The advantages of this paper are that: you can photocopy the Datasheet directly onto the paper and scribe on it underwater using a sharp pencil. The sheet can then be re-used again, as the pencil writing can be rubbed off. you can use any hard surface to attach the paper. We suggest a plastic bread-board (that does not float, if it does float you can weight it down). The bread-board provides a cheap and effective surface to write on and the paper can be easily attached with rubber bands, clips or tape. The paper is very strong and will not tear underwater. The benefit of underwater paper over a slate, is that you can photocopy (or draw) the Datasheet onto the waterproof paper and simply fill in the boxes as you monitor. The information can then be erased and the paper re-used at the next monitoring date.

3.1.2 UNDERWATER SLATES Underwater slates are used by SCUBA divers for scribing underwater. The typical underwater slate is constructed of rigid white plastic, which can be written on using a waterproof pencil. The pencil is attached to the slate using a piece of rubber tubing. Slates come in a variety of sizes ranging from palm sized up to A4 size. The ideal size for monitoring is the larger A4 size. Underwater slates can be purchased from most dive stores.

Updated 9/05/03 Page 8 PART III: Manual – Additional Information Marine Community Monitoring Program

3.2 TAPE MEASURES Tape measures are a commonly used tool in monitoring and are used for measuring objects, defining transects, and in site description. The best type of tape measure to use a fibreglass tape in a plastic case, with a winding mechanism (Figure 4). These tapes lack metal parts, so have a longer lifespan in the marine environment. Fibreglass tapes come in a variety of lengths, up to 100 meters in length. Fibreglass tapes are easily abraded and can snap, so they have to be used with care.

A cheaper alternative to tape measures is a pre-measured length of non-stretch rope cord that is marked with a suitable metric scale. The marks can be applied to the rope using a waterproof marking pen. Lines may need to be re-marked after use as the marks do rub off or fade.

Figure 4. Fibreglass Tape

3.3 COMPASS A compass (magnetic) is an essential tool used in monitoring. Compasses are used for site description and re-location, and for the alignment of transects and fixed photography. Compasses are also an essential safety/navigation aid on boats. It is essential that all monitoring participants know how to use a compass for taking bearings, and know to keep compasses away from metallic objects when taking bearings.

Compasses are available most dive stores, camping stores, boating stores. It is best to get a waterproof compass.

3.4 TIDE CHARTS Tide charts are used to provide an accurate prediction of the regular tidal cycles. Tide charts should be referred to when monitoring in intertidal and shallow areas. Tide charts can be purchased from stores (eg. dive). Daily tide charts are also usually listed in newspapers. Some methods such as those measuring beach width require that monitoring is carried out at low tide.

3.5 NAUTICAL CHARTS Nautical charts are an essential tool used in monitoring and are a key safety item for all boat users. If a GPS is not available, then a chart can be used to determine a site’s latitude and longitude (2.2 Site position). Western Australian nautical charts are produced and distributed by the Department of Transport.

3.6 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VIDEO Photographs and video provide excellent tools for monitoring and documenting sites. Some of the methods in the manual refer to the optional use of cameras and video (terrestrial and underwater). If you have a suitable underwater housing, many land cameras are suitable for taking underwater footage. Alternatively there are specialist underwater cameras on the market.

In recent times the digital camera and video have become popular, and with prices dropping, they are becoming more affordable. Most digital cameras and videos do have compatible underwater housings. The advantages of digital cameras are that you can: 1. photograph your benchmarks and other identifying features to assist with re-locating sites. 2. photograph marine species for later identification. 3. download and print images cheaply, quickly and immediately for use. 4. have a permanent record of your monitoring program, which can be stored on your computer with ease.

Updated 9/05/03 Page 9 PART III: Manual – Additional Information Marine Community Monitoring Program

5. Images can be sent to experts to assist with quick identifications or used to show the community what you are doing (eg. on a website). Remember a picture means a thousand words!

3.7 TRANSECT LINES Transect lines are a standard sampling tool used in monitoring and are used to monitor a measured length of the seabed: The transect should be laid down on the seabed:

1. in a straight line and 2. following the natural contours of the seabed.

The length of a transect line varies, depending on what is being monitored. We will be using a 30 metre transect for community monitoring. The basic transect line consists of a length of rope or a tape measure that is laid out over the substrate.

Observations along transects are carried out while in the field. It is also possible to video along the transect line. This footage can be viewed at a later time. Transect lines can encompass a greater area, referred to as belt transects, these may include, for example, an area 5 metres either side of the transect line. This would require more detailed collection of information and will not be used for community monitoring.

For community monitoring we will use intercept transects (for example, method 3.2 Monitoring the seabed). This involves recording information along the transect line, so that only the habitat immediately beneath the transect line, or an organism (or group of organisms having at least one touching the transect line) is recorded.

TRANSECT LINE CONSTRUCTION Transect lines are basically a length of line/ rope cut to a specified length. The cheapest type of transect line can be made from non-stretch rope or cord that is cut to the length of the transect (eg. 30 meters). Transect lines are best made out of high visibility colours (yellow, white, etc.) of approximately 14 mm diameter (thin rope tangles more easily). The rope/line used should be dense enough so that it sinks (instead of floating). If the transect line is too buoyant or is being used in areas of high water movement, it may be necessary to add weights. Small lead weights can be attached at points along the transect (eg. every one to two meters).

A scale needs to be clearly marked along the length of the transect line, at least every 50 cm. This is important, so that at any given point along the transect line you know exactly how far from the benchmark you are.

To assist in the deployment, retrieval and storage of transect lines, it is recommended using a reel. Reels reduce tangles when deploying and retrieving the rope. When the rope is be retrieved, care must be taken not to damage the benthic fauna and flora as the line may become entangled around objects on the seabed.

Alternatively, a fibre glass tape measure can be used instead of a rope transect line. The advantages to using a tape measure is that it is compact and already has scale (useful in line intercept and point intercept transects). The disadvantages include the expense of tapes, lifespan, and buoyancy. The best tapes to use are the fibreglass tapes, which can be purchased in lengths up to 100 meters.

3.8 SECCHI DISK Secchi disks are a standard tool used in the measurement of water clarity. Secchi disks are easy to built and easy to use.

3.8.1 CONSTRUCTION OF A SECCHI DISK Secchi disks are a simple piece of equipment that can be easily made at home. The secchi disk is used in Method 2.1 Water clarity and temperature. They can be purchased from a supplier, but are expensive. The following materials are required to construct a secchi disk.

Materials: • a small square of marine ply; • one stainless steel eye bolt;

Updated 9/05/03 Page 10 PART III: Manual – Additional Information Marine Community Monitoring Program

• one divers lead weight; • one 30m length of cord (non-stretch); • black and white paint; and • one black water proof marker.

The following steps should be carried out: • draw a circle with a diameter of 20 cm on the marine ply; • using a saw cut out the circle; • divide the circle into alternating quarters with black and white paint (see diagram); • drill a hole through the centre of the disk so that the stainless steel eye bolt can be passed through; • drill a hole through the centre of the lead divers weight; • thread the bolt through the disk and divers weight. Tighten the nuts so that the weight is firm attached to the bottom of the disk; • take the cord and mark 0.5m increments along its length using a black waterproof marker; and • attach one end of the cord to the eye of the bolt.

Figure 5. Secchi disk 3.9 THERMOMETER There are a variety of glass thermometers on the market. Thermometers are required for Method 2.1 Water clarity and temperature. When selecting a thermometer select: • thermometers that use spirits instead of mecury. If the thermometer breaks there is no release of mercury into the environment; • thermometers that have an accuracy of ± 0.1 ºC; and • if possible a thermometer in a plastic cage for protection.

3.10 TEMPERATURE LOGGERS There are a variety of temperature loggers on the market that all remotely measure water temperature at regular intervals and store the measurements. The loggers vary in cost and in ease of use.

TIDBIT TEMPERATURE LOGGER The Tidbit logger is one of the most suitable loggers for community monitoring. The tidbit logger package consists of: • Tidbit logger (Figure 6), a small waterproof unit that records water temperature; • Optic Base Station (Figure 7), used to connect the logger to a computer for launching, readout and graphing the temperature data collected; and • Optic Shuttle,(Figure 8) used for collecting data from loggers and for restarting loggers underwater. The shuttle can hold information from 17 full Tidbit Loggers. • (Each piece is sold separately).

Figure 6. Figure 7 Figure 8

Updated 9/05/03 Page 11 PART III: Manual – Additional Information Marine Community Monitoring Program

The features of the Tidbit Logger include: • relatively low cost at around $300 for the logger (excluding Optic Base Station, Optic Shuttle and software); • maintenance free; • small sealed one piece unit that can’t be flooded; • waterproof to 300m; • battery with a lifespan of up to five years; • high accuracy and doesn’t require calibration; • up-load and down-load data using infra-red, even underwater; • easy to initialise; and • user-friendly windows based software that permits graphing and exporting data to Excel.

Refer to Information sheets for details on temperature loggers and their use. More detailed information can be obtained from the documentation that comes with each unit.

PURCHASING A TEMPERATURE LOGGER. Community groups can purchase any type of temperature logger that they feel comfortable using. Groups that wish to purchase the Tidbit logger should contact Industrial Pyrometers (Aust.) Pty..Ltd.on (08) 9352 3688 (Adelaide) or via the web at www.indpyro.com.au. They can be purchased from WA suppliers but at a much higher price, hence we do not recommend this. If purchasing a Tidbit Logger, it is not necessary to purchase the Optic Base Station or the Optic Shuttle. These two pieces of equipment cost approximately $700 and are available for loan from the Marine Community Monitoring Program, by contacting CALM. These are only required when launching and down loading the data from the Tidbit Logger, which is done approximately every three months.

3.11 WHAT IS A DEBENHAM LEVEL (BEACH PROFILES) A Debenham level is a simple piece of equipment used to measure beach profiles. Ideally three people are required to take measurements. The Marine Conservation Branch (DCLM, Fremantle) will loan a Debenham Level to community groups, to assist in making your own. To make your own Debenham level, please refer to the instructions on the next page.

Updated 9/05/03 Page 12 PART III: Manual – Additional Information

c i rod ons ast e h e pl h t f connecti se of t ba ese de o h e si

h ditional Information at the .

d it g t T2 cm to – A on ed c elbow. T and i al t e e out 5 b a ect T1 plasti cabl ° e sam h T2 conn at least) e 90 ith to th w Do t . – of – w w

o (30 m d PART III: Manual b n reely), leaving Rod Elbo f h e

e el h w o eac o fl e t ove t st y e u b d ab e ties u l m r h t e just Cab Food Field tape measure level wat eac h h h om f r e o h d g f t n n i e as – water = Approx. 1m art ht

g one st i

2 Tube (cm) o t ect Length T e. low. o l f n e t n o b

h liab 1 t not C

g . n re s ( h e t u e ely p i g g e l n e e t h

l e Fi bl n g t relativ i

lik on on e the e ca k b al h mmunity Monitoring Program o t o

(T2) ld

l g ns n rkings o ld ou i a cm 0 m

usi uat 8 ) d d o l shou – r

e . e l (cm aduations along ng the grad an r h th

Marine Co m t lev adi Bottle water leve o

m 1 c re t ) (T1) a cm g

g leng h eter). Plastic sh Page 13 w en n n m e st 0cm bi a a dra i u tre in 12 t r e f , mark 1 d f e

AM LEVEL n g s assist with e Deb tle m ces, mm d to rul tin es o th

d a e

, d tion – 1 bot ec a NH ro pi ter Star pi g) e o the . n an leted h o w tal (15 p of t w elbow. g t pe

m ED o f t e t to o on n h w to rod i 1 cm gradu ro t

e base al es in to en co en dowlin coloured wa 2 ct -p ng r th t T r e bi od e Wh u n nne t u o litre) wo from se. of R a . - 2 m o c (2 – from bottle – from elbo h (or g tubing mark

(t g a wat n e b

ght i n i ttle ngt w b the (T1) (T2) Starting e

be. MAKE A DEBE bo bo r -t at th l th. – e l

03 e k . Usi / r g e O t n se of 5 c n i e a i ng 0 and tu r leng astic tu wat l d bi ast ess steel rod Fill bottle (¾ full) with u 2 m . ttle l be d 9/

EQUIPMENT NEED PUTTING IT ALL TOGETHER

pl e e

t d ° h l of t a astic Tubing astic Tubing t l l u d t ttle, starti Plastic Clear p Stain 90 P P from the b along the Plastic Bottle length the bo u o HOW T h h h h C sho free b Up Marine Community Monitoring Manual

PART IV

GENERAL INFORMATION Marine Community Monitoring Manual

PART IV: TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 HISTORY OF THE PROGRAMME PAGE 1 TO 4 1.1 INTRODUCTION 1.2 EVOLUTION OF THE MANUAL 1.3 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS 1.4 BUILDING PARTNERSHIPS: COMMUNITY, MANAGERS AND SCIENTISTS 1.5 MANAGEMENT OF OUR MARINE ENVIRONMENT (STATUTORY AND NON-STATUTORY)

2.0 SAFETY ISSUES PAGE 5 TO 8 2.1 IMPORTANT 2.2 TEAM APPROACH TO SAFETY 2.3 GENERAL SAFETY RULES 2.4 GENERAL SAFETY KIT 2.5 DANGEROUS OBJECTS 2.6 BOATING 2.7 SCUBA DIVING AND SNORKELLING 2.8 TOXIC AND HARMFUL MARINE LIFE

3.0 BE ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY WHEN MONITORING PAGE 8 TO 9 3.1 LOOK BUT DON’T TOUCH 3.2 BE AWARE OF LOCAL REGULATIONS 3.3 BOATING 3.4 INSTALLATION OF TAGS AND OTHER STRUCTURES 3.5 COASTAL AREAS 3.6 SCUBA DIVING AND SNORKELLING

Page i Marine Community Monitoring Manual

1.0 HISTORY OF THE PROGRAM

1.1 INTRODUCTION The main aim of the Marine Community Monitoring Program (MCMP) is to develop a partnership between managers, scientists and the community. Through this partnership we can all share information, which collectively will provide an early warning system for detecting change in the marine environment. The MCMP provides the tools for the community to participate directly in monitoring and managing the health of our marine and coastal environment. Most monitoring methods are easy to use and fun to do, however for the more adventurous there are more complex methods to participate in. The data collected by the community will complement the monitoring data collected by Government agencies and scientists. Together these data will be used by management agencies and local communities to help manage human impacts on our local marine environment.

The MCMP has been developed in stages to overcome three fundamental obstacles to successful community involvement in marine management, these include:

STAGE I (COMPLETED 1999) Obstacle: Difficulty in positive identification of all but the most common marine flora and fauna. Strategy: Develop an easy-to-use CD-ROM marine identification guide. The CD-ROM ‘Marine life in Western Australia’ was developed in 1988 and identifies about 400 of the most common marine fauna and flora from Western Australia’s coastal waters.

STAGE II - THE MANUAL: FIRST EDITION (COMPLETED 2000) Obstacle: Limited scientific training and experience in data collection and difficulty in maintaining community enthusiasm without feedback. Strategy: Develop a manual of user-friendly monitoring methods to enable community involvement in marine monitoring initiatives and to develop a database to facilitate data collection and feedback. The first edition of the manual was completed in 2000, following consultation with scientists, management agencies and community groups. The database was developed to accommodate data collection for a number of the methods.

STAGE III – THE MANUAL: SECOND EDITION (COMPLETED 2003) Obstacle: The methods and accompanying datasheets were developed for the manual however, members of the community had still not tested these methods. Community feedback was considered instrumental to the success of the manual and program prior to the program being officially launched. Strategy: To employ a project officer to trial methods with selected community groups, with the intention of improving the MCMP and manual. Changes to the manual focussed on simplifying methods and data sheets for collecting information; developing additional written resources to assist community groups and developing new methods in response to community interests and management objectives.

1.2 EVOLUTION OF THE MANUAL The Marine Community Monitoring Manual was developed under the direction of a Steering Committee with representatives from the Department of Conservation and Land Management (CALM), Australian Marine Conservation Society (AMCS) (WA), and Coastwest / Coastcare.

FIRST EDITION The first edition was compiled following a workshop conducted in Perth in May 1999. The workshop was attended by 52 people, from various community groups, scientific organisations and management agencies

The objectives of the workshop were: • to identify a suite of activities that are both of interest to the community and important in the conservation and management of the marine environment; • to develop user-friendly methods for gathering and managing data; and

Updated 30/04/03 Page 1 PART IV: Additional Information (Program History and Safety) Marine Community Monitoring Manual

• to identify locations for monitoring programs in accordance with existing management plans and reserve proposals, plus community interests and educational and industry requirements.

The major outcomes of the workshop included: • the overwhelming support for community participation in marine monitoring and the program. • the agreement by both community groups and management agencies over the need to monitor: • the health of marine habitats including: • coral reefs • temperate reefs • seagrass meadows • mangroves • water quality • fish and shell stocks • health of coastal areas • indigenous sea tucker • general effects of pollution • introduced pests and • human usage- Following the workshop two Project Officers (Tim Grubba, CALM and Julie Murdoch, AMCS WA Branch) were employed to draw on outcomes of the workshop and to develop simple but structured monitoring methods. The methods would form the foundations of an easy to use Manual, that could empower the public to collect information on the health of their local marine environment, of use to management agencies.

SECOND EDITION Between 2000 and 2001, 200 copies of the manual was distributed to various organisations and in 2002 another Project Officer, was employed to work directly with community groups around Western Australia to trial and test the methods in the manual. With constructive feedback from these community groups, changes to the manual were identified. This second edition of the Manual reflects these changes. The changes implemented have included rationalising existing methods, developing new methods and developing additional written resource material to reflect community interests in marine monitoring and marine management requirements.

1.3 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The Marine Community Monitoring Manual (Second Edition) was prepared by Karen Wheeler (CALM Project Officer) under the direction of the Marine Community Monitoring Program Joint Steering Committee. The following steering committee members oversaw the Manual revisions: Nick D’Adamo, CALM Martin Heller, Coastwest/ Coastcare Nick Dunlop, Australian Marine Conservation Society, WA Branch Tim Grubba, CALM The Joint Steering Committee would like to extend a special thanks to everyone that provided valuable input through the development of the Marine Community Monitoring Manuals:

Bunbury Grammar School Chris Gibbs University of WA Ian Elliot John Septimus Roe Anglican Community Carleen Edwards Ann Brearley School Department of Minerals and Energy Graham Coby Euan Harvey Marion Cambridge Dolphin Discovery Centre Fleur O’Neil CSIRO Chad Hewitt WA Tourism Commission Claire Savage Alan Pearse Scotch College Wayne Ramsay Julia Phillips North Albany Senior High School Jim Kneale Caroline Sutton Fremantle TAFE (Maritime College) Hugh Finn Charles Jacoby Trigg Island Surf Club Harriet Patterson Bremer Bay Dive Club Craig Lebens

Updated 30/04/03 Page 2 PART IV: Additional Information (Program History and Safety) Marine Community Monitoring Manual

SCUBA II Sjaak Lemmens Aust. Trust for Conservation Ken Beasley Volunteers Duncraig Primary School Trish Gilbert Friends of South Beach Jennifer Allaz

UWA Underwater Club Cathy Jordan Charter Boat Owners and Rick Reid Operators Association Helen Kirby Ningaloo Ecology Cruises Richard Wain

Gary Williams Department of Environmental Craig Manning Protection Cottesloe Marine Protection Group Barbara Dobson Margo O’Byrne Ken Macintyre RecFishWest Frank Prokop Fremantle Sailing Club Hugh Richardson WA Museum Jane Fromont Friends of Lancelin Island Nick Dunlop Louisette Marsh Dave Mitchell Shirley Slack-Smith

Di Jones Ningaloo Action Group Suzi Wild Chemistry Centre Andrew McTaggart Friends of Marmion Marine Park Linda Arnold TAFE (Kimberley) Beau Bibby Vicki Gouteff Coastal Facilitators Jason Smith Cape Conservation Group Susie Scott Nicci Tsernjavski Yallingup Land Cons District Committee Patrick Gillett Ben Davy Coastal Park Management Committee, Micklo Corpus Jamie Allnut Rubibi (Broome). Franz Hoogland Water and Rivers Commission Petrina Raitt Richard Hunter Grant Vanverhelder

Sharon Griffiths Department of Conservation and Chris Simpson land Management AMCS, WA Branch Dennis Berros Nick D’Adamo Nick Dunlop Ray Bailey Doug Myers

TAFE Ian Reynolds David Gough Caroline Williams Yallingup Land Cons District Committee Patrick Gillett Gooitzen Van Der Meer Nick Gales Fisheries Western Australia Jenny Shaw Clare Martin Grant Pearson

Cecila Brodwick WA Surf Riders, Carnarvon Justin Bauer Neil Sumners TAFE (Fremantle Maritime Hugh Finn College) Peta Williamson Others Wendy Payne Andrew Cribb Tony Rouphael Jackie Chapel Dave Gordon Rae Burrows Geoff Bastyn

1.4 BUILDING PARTNERSHIPS: COMMUNITY, MANAGERS & SCIENTISTS The over riding motivation behind the program is the need to develop partnerships between the community, managers and scientists. To protect and conserve our unique marine and coastal environments we must all work together. In this partnership, the community brings to the MCMP: • local knowledge; • expertise;

Updated 30/04/03 Page 3 PART IV: Additional Information (Program History and Safety) Marine Community Monitoring Manual

• energy and commitment; • resources; and • access to almost all our coastal waters.

Managers and scientists will continue to implement complementary monitoring programs and will also provide to the MCMP: • training; • scientific expertise; • support and advice; • feedback on the data; and • data interpretation and management decisions.

If we all work together, it is possible we will maintain a healthy marine and coastal environment for future generations. This partnership will be successful if as many interested individuals and community groups as possible become involved in the Marine Community Monitoring Program.

1.5 MANAGEMENT OF OUR MARINE ENVIRONMENT Managing the marine environment of Western Australia is undertaken through state and national legislation and international agreements which Australia is a signatory. The following statutory and non-statutory mechanisms are used in Western Australia currently to manage the marine and coastal environment.

MANAGEMENT MECHANISMS STATUTORY Marine protected areas - The Department of Conservation and Land Management (CALM) manages marine protected areas for the conservation of marine plants and animals. Wildlife conservation regulations - CALM administers the regulations that protect native plants and animals outside the reserve system and develops specific wildlife management programs for species needing special protection (eg. sealions, whale sharks). Environmental impact assessments and pollution control licensing - Developments that have a significant potential to impact on the marine environment are assessed by the Environmental Protection Authority (EPA) / Department of Environment (DofE). Waste discharge to the marine environment is regulated by DEP regulations. Environmental protection policies (EPPs) - EPPs are developed and implemented by the EPA/DEP to manage human impact on water quality. Fishing regulations - Fisheries WA is responsible for the management and regulation of recreational and commercial fishing and aquaculture and pearling. Fish Habitat Protection Areas can also be created to protect fish habitats. Shipping and boating regulations - The Department of Transport is responsible for maritime safety and for combating marine oil spills.

NON-STATUTORY Research - Government departments and universities undertake research to gain a better understanding of the inter-relationships between the physical, chemical, geological, biological and social components of the marine environment. Education - Marine education programs are generally undertaken by Government agencies and non- government organisations. Public participation - This is generally undertaken by Government departments and community groups.

Note: The Waters and Rivers Commission are also involved in management of some estuarine environments.

The above mechanisms are in place in some form or other in most countries around the world, yet many of these countries have been unable to prevent continuing degradation of their marine environments. Much of the degradation has resulted simply from increased human usage often with limited knowledge and understanding that it is actually happening until it is too late (ie few, if any, monitoring programs). To avoid a repetition of these problems occurring in WA, it is important that we are all involved in monitoring our marine environment so that we can understand the implications of our activities and take action.

Updated 30/04/03 Page 4 PART IV: Additional Information (Program History and Safety) Marine Community Monitoring Manual

2.0 SAFETY ISSUES

2.1 IMPORTANT (PLEASE READ) "It is a condition of participation that the participant acknowledges and assumes all risks associated with monitoring and holds the Executive Director, his employees, servants and agents free from any and all liability, causes of action, debt, claims and demands of every kind and nature whatsoever which may arise out of or in connection with participation in monitoring."

THE IMPORTANCE OF SAFETY WHEN MONITORING CANNOT BE STRESSED ENOUGH. This manual reinforces the issue of safety throughout with constant references to this section.

It should be remembered that safety is the primary responsibility of individuals who should always: • be aware of their surroundings; • know their limitations; • have the appropriate personal safety items; • have appropriate training; • know the team’s contingency plans; and • use their common sense.

INDIVIDUALS/GROUPS USING SCUBA FOR MONITORING SHOULD READ SECTION 2.7

2.2 TEAM APPROACH TO SAFETY Individuals and groups participating in monitoring should always discuss safety issues. The safest monitoring practices should be used and contingency plans developed in the event of an emergency. Individuals and groups should carry adequate safety equipment and first aid supplies while in the field.

Participants should evaluate conditions (weather/sea) at the monitoring site prior to monitoring and as monitoring is carried out. This evaluation should take into account the participants capabilities and equipment. If there is concern or uncertainty about conditions then it is better to play it safe and postpone monitoring until conditions improve.

2.3 GENERAL SAFETY RULES The following are some general safety tips (rules) that should be adhered to: • never carry out monitoring by yourself. Try to work on a ‘buddy-system’ for both land and water based monitoring; • always have an extra person to act has a lookout when monitoring in the water (snorkelling /SCUBA) and land (intertidal); • wear the appropriate protective clothing, such as protective footwear when on beaches or intertidal areas; • don’t handle or harass fauna. Many species are toxic, venomous or can inflict injury; • don’t swim in the sea at night, unless experienced and suitably equipped (lights etc.); • be careful of currents when swimming or snorkelling. Swim into the current. Don’t swim when currents are strong; • act cautiously in small boats and observe all necessary safety precautions; • inform the designated safety person in the event of any injury. Make sure all coral cuts and scratches are cleaned up and treated promptly; • sunburn and heat exhaustion are health hazards. “SLIP on a shirt; SLOP on some cream; SLAP on a hat”. Make sure you drink extra water before any monitoring activities.

Updated 30/04/03 Page 5 PART IV: Additional Information (Program History and Safety) Marine Community Monitoring Manual

2.4 GENERAL SAFETY KIT It is strongly recommended that all monitoring teams put together a complete safety kit that includes: • a set contingency plan in the event of an emergency; • a suitably stocked first aid kit; • communication equipment (eg. marine CB or mobile phone); • suitably qualified first aid officer; and • oxygen revival kit (for SCUBA and if there is someone trained to use the kit).

2.5 DANGEROUS OBJECTS Monitoring can expose participants to dangerous materials particularly during litter surveys. Participants should always wear safety equipment such as sturdy enclosed shoes and gardening gloves.

Sharp objects (shards of metal, glass) can be encountered during litter surveys. These items should be handled carefully using gloves. Care should be taken when these items are placed in garbage bags so that they don’t cut through the bag and cut the person carrying the bag.

Syringes (needles) are becoming a common item found on beaches. Needles should only be stored in approved containers (‘Sharps” container). Needles should never be picked up, even with gloves on, but should be picked up using tongs and placed directly into the container. One person should be allocated the task of carrying the container and collecting any needles spotted by others in the group.

If toxic or unknown chemicals are found, they should be left where they are found. The location should be noted and the team leader informed. The team leader should alert relevant local agencies, which are responsible for the removal and disposal of the chemicals.

Participants may come across discarded fishing line during underwater surveys. The safest method for collecting line underwater is to find the end and wind the line onto a object (eg stick). Always have a knife available to cut the line free. Always be careful of hooks.

2.6 BOATING It is highly recommended that participants involved in boating activities obtain a copy of the “Official Western Australian Boating Guide” (free of charge). The guide is an excellent resource developed by the Department of Transport (Marine Safety). Copies are available through the department (DOT) and it is highly recommend that you obtain and read all information provided, prior to commencing your monitoring program.

The ocean deserves your greatest respect at all times. Even experienced boaters can occasionally find themselves in series difficulties. However, if you plan your trip well and take care to observe standard safety precautions, you will minimise the chances of any problems occurring.

2.7 SCUBA DIVING AND SNORKELLING It is highly recommended that participants involved with SCUBA diving activities obtain a copy of “Diver below: Diving in Western Australia” (free of charge). The book is an excellent resource developed by the Department of Transport (Marine Safety). The book is available through the department (DOT) and it is highly recommended that you obtain a copy and read it. Information is provided relating too: diving safety, dive vessels and general information on the marine environment including protocols for diving in Marine Parks. http://www.transport.wa.gov.au

Updated 30/04/03 Page 6 PART IV: Additional Information (Program History and Safety) Marine Community Monitoring Manual

SCUBA diving, like many recreation pursuits, can be dangerous and has claimed lives. Divers should never be complacent about safe diving practices. Never dive on SCUBA if you have not completed an accredited course.

The following checklist will ensure safe diving practices are maintained:

• Check your equipment to ensure it is in good working order and suitable for the proposed dive (ie. suitable exposure suit) • A compass and a knife are standard safety items for any dive, although a Safety Sausage (inflatable orange tube, visible by boats in the distance) and a Chemical Light (which glows in the dark when activated) are also highly recommended for recreational divers. • Prepare a Tool kit with extra equipment (ie. spare mask and fin straps and O – rings). • Prepare a First aid kit. • Check the weather forecast and be flexible to accommodate a change in plans, if conditions are not favourable. • Always use a dive flag whether diving from a boat or shore. • Always dive with a buddy and always remain visible to each other. • Use a safety line with a buoy attached if diving from a boat. • Inform a friend of your dive, dive site and your estimated time of return. • Plan your dive: a) establish entry and exit points. b) establish a course to follow (taking into account currents and other potential hazards). c) agree on a maximum depth and dive time. d) agree on the minimum air pressure to return to the surface (ie. no less than 50 bar). e) agree on what to do if separated (ie. search patterns and protocols). • Plan emergency procedures if a problem should arise and make sure you have emergency contact numbers on-hand (see below). • All of the above are especially important if you have not dived for a while or are new to a dive site.

CONTACT NUMBERS In the event of decompression sickness call Fremantle Hospital at Alma Street in Fremantle, which coordinates the treatment of all cases of civilian diving accidents. Call (08) 9431 3333 and immediately state that the call is about a diving related injury.

To report a boating accident or to initiate a search, call Water Police Communications on (08) 9442 8600 or Transport Marine Safety on (08) 9239 2272.

These emergency numbers can be contacted via Perth Radio call sign VIP on VHF16 or by using VHF Seaphone.

2.8 TOXIC AND HARMFUL MARINE LIFE Many marine animals use venom or toxins for catching prey or defending themselves. Some of these may cause mild stings or rashes if contact is made with human skin. Only a few species have venoms or toxins potent enough to cause serious harm to people, and these are not often encountered. However, it is best to be aware of any problems they can cause and avoid coming into contact with them.

• Blue-ringed octopuses and some species of fish-eating coneshells are among the most dangerous. Blue- ringed octopuses live in reef flats and in tidal pools and can be recognised by their brilliant blue rings when disturbed. Be cautious if handling dead shells and when exploring underwater crevices or caves. Coneshells are conical and cylindrical in shape. They bury themselves in sand by day, and emerge at night to search for small fish, snails or worms. You should avoid picking up live coneshells. • Certain fish, such as catfish (cobblers) and stingrays, have venomous spines and can cause painful injuries. Use common sense around these creatures, as well as toadfish, pufferfish, boxfish and porcupine fish. Although they may appear to be slow-moving docile, they are capable of inflicting serious bites if handled. • Stonefish are found around the top two-thirds of the Australian coast. They inhabit coastal reefs and shallow mudflats and usually lie partially buried on the sea floor. If people tread on this animal the sharp venomous

Updated 30/04/03 Page 7 PART IV: Additional Information (Program History and Safety) Marine Community Monitoring Manual

spines can pierce their feet causing severe pain and tissue damage. Always wear strong footwear (not thongs) when walking in shallows. Shoes will also provide protection from razor shells which inhabit the shallows of northern Australia. • Sea-snakes are also found in marine areas, and some species are extremely venomous. They are quite curious and may approach, but if you don’t touch them they should leave you alone. Bristleworms (ringed or segemented worms up to 20 centimetres long) often lie under rocks or corals. Their bites may cause injury. So can the bristles, if they penetrate the skin. Be vary if turning over rocks or corals. • Sharks are also common inhabitants of coastal waters and some species are dangerous. As with other potentially dangerous fish, don’t be tempted to touch them, as they may defend themselves by biting. • Fire coral is found on the sand around reefs and fireweed can be found growing on reefs in tropical or temperate / tropical areas. These marine animals can cause a burning sensation. Wearing gloves and protective suits will avoid stings from accidentally brushing against them. Most marine animals should not pose a problem unless harassed or inadvertently touched or trodden upon. Fortunately, most injuries can be avoided by simple common sense and behaving cautiously around any animal you are unsure about.

3.0 BE ENVIRONMENTALLY SENSITIVE WHEN MONITORING

3.1 LOOK BUT DON’T TOUCH Always take the ‘look but don’t touch’ approach when diving. It should not be necessary to touch or handle any marine fauna or flora. The simple act of touching a marine creature can affect it (eg. when a coral is touched, mucus can be removed from its surface). Another good reason for not touching or handling is that many types of marine fauna are toxic or can inflict painful injuries.

The methods included in this manual are non-destructive sampling techniques ie. sampling is undertaken by observation and counts but not collections.

3.2 BE AWARE OF LOCAL REGULATIONS Participants involved in monitoring are not immune to existing laws and regulations. In most cases these laws and regulations are in place to protect the environment or ensure the safety of the community. It is necessary to liaise with relevant management groups prior to and during monitoring.

3.3 BOATING Boating activities have the potential to impact greatly on marine habitats. Participants using boats during monitoring should ensure that they follow environmentally sensitive boating practices. • ensure adequate water depth to avoid damage to benthic habitats due to keel or propeller contact; • ensure that anchors and/or chain do not impact on sensitive benthic habitats (eg. corals and seagrass). Where possible always anchor in sand, not on reef or in seagrass meadows. If there is no suitable anchorage site, consider not anchoring; and • don’t allow waste to enter the water.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF TAGS AND OTHER STRUCTURES Some methods describe the use and installation of marker/tags, and star pickets. Where possible keep the use of tags and especially star pickets to a minium. When installing tags or star pickets take care not cause any local damage. This includes not hammering star pickets in living organisms.

3.5 COASTAL AREAS Coastal environments are fragile. When monitoring along beaches and dunes, keep off stabilising dune vegetation and be careful to not cause any erosion. Where possible, use existing pathways to reach your

Updated 30/04/03 Page 8 PART IV: Additional Information (Program History and Safety) Marine Community Monitoring Manual destinations. Do not enter rehabilitation areas and check with local groups in the area if you have any queries. Avoid walking on any fragile species (eg. corals) in intertidal areas and if you move any rocks, ensure they are replaced in their original position.

3.6 SCUBA AND SNORKELLING Participants should ensure that they carry out ‘best diver practices’ which include the following: • Maintain neutral buoyancy through out the dive. • Secure all gauges so they do not drag across the reef. • Beware of your fins when kicking. Some corals are extremely delicate and easily broken. • Don’t touch any marine life, for your safety and also for legal reasons. Marine animals are protected under various Acts of State and National legislation (eg. The Wildlife Conservation Act, Notice for marine mammal closed season - prohibits the disturbance or touching of all marine mammals). • Don’t use bottom structures as hand holds. • Don’t stand up in shallow water where there are sensitive benthic habitats (eg. corals).

Updated 30/04/03 Page 9 PART IV: Additional Information (Program History and Safety) Marine Community Monitoring Program

PART V

USEFUL REFERENCES Marine Community Monitoring Program

PART V: TABLE OF CONTENTS

BIOLOGICAL REFERENCES PAGE 1 TO 10 • CORAL REEFS • SEAGRASSES • MANGROVE HEALTH • ALGAL BLOOMS • INTRODUCED MARINE PESTS • MARINE FISH • MARINE MAMMALS • SEABIRDS

SOCIAL REFERENCES PAGE 10 • LITTER

GENERAL REFERENCES PAGE 10 TO 13

Page i Marine Community Monitoring Program

USEFUL REFERENCES BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT CORAL REEFS NUMBER 1 TITLE: Climate change, coral bleaching and the future of the world’s coral reefs TYPE: Report USEFULNESS: && WHERE TO FIND: AUTHOR: Hoegh-Guldberg, O DATE: 1999 PUBLISHER: Greenpeace

NUMBER 2 TITLE: Crown-of-thorns starfish and coral surveys using the manta tow and SCUBA search techniques TYPE: Standard Operational Procedure (Number 1/1996) USEFULNESS: &&& WHERE TO FIND: Australian Institute of Marine Science (AIMS) AUTHOR: Bass, D.K. & Miller, I.R. DATE: 1996 PUBLISHER: Australian Institute of Marine Science (AIMS), Townsville, Queensland

NUMBER 3 TITLE: Crown-of-thorns starfish Survey TYPE: Survey Form USEFULNESS: && WHERE TO FIND: Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Authority, Townsville, Queensland AUTHOR: DATE: PUBLISHER: Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Authority, Townsville, Queensland

NUMBER 4 TITLE: Crown-of-thorns starfish on the Great Barrier Reef TYPE: Internet pages USEFULNESS: && WHERE TO FIND: http://www.aims.gov.au/monmap/cotspage/cotspage.html AUTHOR: Australian Institute of Marine Science (AIMS) DATE: 1999 PUBLISHER: Australian Institute of Marine Science (AIMS), Townsville, Queensland

NUMBER 5 TITLE: Destruction of corals and other reef animals by coral spawn slicks on Ningaloo Reef, Western Australia TYPE: Journal: Scientific Paper USEFULNESS: && WHERE TO FIND: Marine Conservation Branch, Department of Conservation and Land Management AUTHOR: Simpson, C.J., Cary, J. L. and Masini, R.J DATE: 1993 PUBLISHER: Coral Reefs (1993) 12: 185-191

Updated 05/06/03 Page 1 PART V: Useful References Marine Community Monitoring Manual

NUMBER 6 TITLE: Developing reliable coral reef monitoring programs for marine tourism operators and community volunteers TYPE: Technical Report (Number 24) USEFULNESS: && WHERE TO FIND: CRC Reef Research Centre, Queensland AUTHOR: Musso, B. & Inglis, G. DATE: 1998 PUBLISHER: CRC Reef Research Centre, Queensland

NUMBER 7 TITLE: Ecology of the Muricid Gastropod Drupella cornus (Röding, 1798) and its significance as corallivore on Ningaloo Reef, Western Australia TYPE: Masters Thesis USEFULNESS: &&&& WHERE TO FIND: The University of Western Australia AUTHOR: Forde, M. DATE: 1994 PUBLISHER: Department of Zoology, University of Western Australia

NUMBER 8 TITLE: Indo-Pacific Coral Reef Field Guide TYPE: Field Guide USEFULNESS: &&&& WHERE TO FIND: Western Australian Museum Book Store AUTHOR: Allen. G.R., and Steene, R. DATE: 1996 PUBLISHER: Tropical Reef Research, Western Australia.

NUMBER 9 TITLE: ReefBase: A global database on coral reefs and their resources, Version 3.0 TYPE: User Guide USEFULNESS: & WHERE TO FIND: [email protected] ICLARM, Philippines. AUTHOR: McManus, J.W. & Vergara, S.G (eds) DATE: 1998 PUBLISHER: International Centre for Living Aquatic Resources Management (ICLARM)

NUMBER 10 TITLE: Status of Drupella cornus outbreak at Ningaloo Reef TYPE: Final report for Australian Nature Conservation Agency USEFULNESS: &&&& WHERE TO FIND: AUTHOR: Osborne, S. and Williams, R. DATE: 1995 PUBLISHER: Australian Nature Conservation Agency

Updated 05/06/03 Page 2 PART V: Useful References Marine Community Monitoring Manual

SEAGRASSES NUMBER 11 TITLE: Albany Harbours Environmental Study, 1988-1989. Bulletin 412 TYPE: Bulletin USEFULNESS: && WHERE TO FIND: Contact publisher (may be out of print) AUTHOR: Environmental Protection Authority DATE: 1990 PUBLISHER: Environmental Protection Agency, Western Australia.

NUMBER 12 TITLE: Seagrasses of Australia TYPE: Australia: State of the Environment Technical Paper Series (Estuaries and the Sea), USEFULNESS: &&&& WHERE TO FIND: AUTHOR: Kirkman, H. DATE: 1997 PUBLISHER: Department of the Environment, Canberra

MANGROVE HEALTH NUMBER 13 TITLE: Mangrove ecosystems in Australia – structure, function and management TYPE: USEFULNESS: &&&& WHERE TO FIND: AUTHOR: Clough BF. (ed) DATE: 1982 PUBLISHER: AIMS/ANU Press, Canberra

NUMBER 14 TITLE: Mangroves in Focus. TYPE: Students Manual USEFULNESS: && WHERE TO FIND: Contact publisher AUTHOR: Claridge, D., and Burnett, J. DATE: 1993 PUBLISHER: Wet Paper Marine Education, Queensland

ALGAL BLOOMS NUMBER 15 TITLE: A red tide of Trichodesmium in coastal waters of Western Australia TYPE: Journal USEFULNESS: & WHERE TO FIND: AUTHOR: Smith, G.G DATE: 1972 PUBLISHER: The Western Australian Naturalist, Vol 12, No. 4 August 17, 1972

Updated 05/06/03 Page 3 PART V: Useful References Marine Community Monitoring Manual

NUMBER 16 TITLE: Review of literature concerning blue-green algae of the genus Trichodesmium TYPE: Bulletin 197 USEFULNESS: && WHERE TO FIND: Out of print AUTHOR: Creagh, S. DATE: 1985 PUBLISHER: Department of Conservation and the Environment, Perth, Western Australia

INTRODUCED MARINE PESTS

NUMBER 17 TITLE: A guide to the introduced marine species in Australian waters TYPE: Technical Report (No. 5) (Binder of information sheets) USEFULNESS: &&& WHERE TO FIND: Centre for Research on Introduced Marine Pests (CRIMP), CSIRO Marine Laboratories, Hobart, Tasmania. AUTHOR: Furlani, D.M. DATE: 1996 PUBLISHER: Centre for Research on Introduced Marine Pests (CRIMP), CSIRO Marine Laboratories, Hobart, Tasmania.

MARINE FISH (TROPICAL AND TEMPERATE) NUMBER 18 TITLE: A manual for monitoring coral reefs with indicator species: Butterflyfishes as indicators of change on Indo-Pacific reefs TYPE: Report USEFULNESS: & WHERE TO FIND: AUTHOR: Crosby, M.P. & Reese, E.S. DATE: 1996 PUBLISHER: Office of Ocean and Coastal Resource Management, National Oceanic and atmospheric Administration, Silver Spring, MD.

NUMBER 19 TITLE: A stationary visual census technique for quantitatively assessing community structure of coral reef fishes (Technical Report NMFS No 41) TYPE: Technical Report USEFULNESS: & WHERE TO FIND: Contact publisher AUTHOR: Bohnsack J, Bannerot S. DATE: 1986 PUBLISHER: NOAA

NUMBER 20 TITLE: Cod Hole Survey TYPE: Reporting Form USEFULNESS: & WHERE TO FIND: AUTHOR: Lizard Island and research Station and Lizard Island Charters DATE: PUBLISHER: Lizard Island and research Station and Lizard Island Charters

Updated 05/06/03 Page 4 PART V: Useful References Marine Community Monitoring Manual

NUMBER 21 TITLE: Coral Reef Symposium – Jan 26-27. Two Visually Based Methods for Monitoring Coral Reef Fishes TYPE: Scientific Paper USEFULNESS: & WHERE TO FIND: http://www.epa.gov/OWOW/oceans/coral/bohnsack.html AUTHOR: Bohnsack, J.A DATE: 1995 PUBLISHER: Miami Laboratory, Southeast Fisheries Science Center National Marine Fisheries Service Miami, Florida, USA

NUMBER 22 TITLE: Dragon Search TYPE: Brochure USEFULNESS: &&&& WHERE TO FIND: Australian Marine Conservation Society, Perth, Western Australia AUTHOR: Australian Marine Conservation Society, Perth, Western Australia DATE: PUBLISHER: Australian Marine Conservation Society, Perth, Western Australia

NUMBER 23 TITLE: Estimating total abundance of large temperate-reef fish using visual strip- transects TYPE: Journal USEFULNESS: & WHERE TO FIND: University Library AUTHOR: McCormick, M.I & Choat, J.H DATE: 1987 PUBLISHER: Marine Biology, 96, 469-478

NUMBER 24 TITLE: Fisheries Western Australia, Annual Report 1997/1998 TYPE: Annual report USEFULNESS: & WHERE TO FIND: Fisheries Western Australia AUTHOR: Fisheries Western Australia DATE: 1998 PUBLISHER: Fisheries Western Australia

NUMBER 25 TITLE: Fisheries Western Australia, State of the Fisheries Report 1997/1998 TYPE: Annual report USEFULNESS: & WHERE TO FIND: Fisheries Western Australia AUTHOR: Fisheries Western Australia DATE: 1998 PUBLISHER: Fisheries Western Australia

Updated 05/06/03 Page 5 PART V: Useful References Marine Community Monitoring Manual

NUMBER 26 TITLE: Grant’s Fishes of Australia TYPE: Guide USEFULNESS: &&&& WHERE TO FIND: Book stores AUTHOR: Grant, E. DATE: 1987 PUBLISHER: EM Grant Pty Limited, Publishers, Queensland

NUMBER 27 TITLE: Manual for assessing fish stocks on Pacific coral reefs TYPE: Manual USEFULNESS: & WHERE TO FIND: Department of Primary Industries, Brisbane, Queensland AUTHOR: Samoilys, M. (ed) DATE: 1997 PUBLISHER: Department of Primary Industries, Brisbane, Queensland.

NUMBER 28 TITLE: Sea Fishes of Southern Australia: Complete field guide of anglers and divers TYPE: Field Guide USEFULNESS: &&&& WHERE TO FIND: Western Australian Museum Book store or local book store AUTHOR: Hutchins, B. Swainston, R. DATE: 1996 PUBLISHER: Swainston Publishing, Western Australia

NUMBER 29 TITLE: Surveying Coral Reef Fishes: A manual for data collection, processing and interpretation of fish survey information for the tropical Northwest Atlantic TYPE: Manual USEFULNESS: & WHERE TO FIND: REEF AUTHOR: Schmitt, E.F., Feeley, D.W., and Sealey, K.M (eds) DATE: 1998 PUBLISHER: Reef Environmental Education Foundation (REEF) and The Nature Conservancy, Florida

NUMBER 30 TITLE: The Marine and Estuarine Fishes of South-western Australia. A Field Guide for Anglers and Divers TYPE: Field Guide USEFULNESS: &&&& WHERE TO FIND: Western Australian Museum Bookshop AUTHOR: Hutchins. B, and Thompson, M. DATE: 1983 PUBLISHER: Western Australian Museum

Updated 05/06/03 Page 6 PART V: Useful References Marine Community Monitoring Manual

NUMBER 31 TITLE: The Marine Fishes of North-Western Australia: A guide for anglers and divers TYPE: Field Guide USEFULNESS: &&&& WHERE TO FIND: Western Australian Museum book store or local book stores AUTHOR: Allen, G.R. and Swainston, R. DATE: 1988 PUBLISHER: Western Australian Museum, Western Australia

NUMBER 32 TITLE: Two visually based methods for monitoring coral reef fishes TYPE: Web document (Coral Reef Symposium – January 26-27, 1995) USEFULNESS: & WHERE TO FIND: http://www.epa.gov/OWOW/oceans/coral/bohnsack.html AUTHOR: Bohnsack, J.A DATE: 1995 PUBLISHER: Coral Reef Symposium – January 26-27, 1995

NUMBER 33 TITLE: Visual census surveys of reef fish. Long-term monitoring of the Great Barrier Reef. TYPE: Standard operational procedure Number 3 USEFULNESS: &&&& WHERE TO FIND: AIMS AUTHOR: Halford, AR, and Thompson, AA. DATE: 1994 PUBLISHER: Australian Institute of Marine Science (AIMS)

MARINE MAMMALS NUMBER 34 TITLE: Bush Books: Whales & Dolphins of Western Australia TYPE: Field Guide USEFULNESS: &&& WHERE TO FIND: WA Naturally (CALM Store) AUTHOR: Thomson, C. DATE: PUBLISHER: Department of Conservation and Land Management (CALM), Western Australia

NUMBER 35 TITLE: Eyewitness Handbooks: Whales Dolphins and Porpoises TYPE: Field Guide USEFULNESS: && WHERE TO FIND: Contact publisher, or local book stores AUTHOR: Carwardine, M. DATE: 1996 PUBLISHER: Dorling Kindersley, London, England

Updated 05/06/03 Page 7 PART V: Useful References Marine Community Monitoring Manual

NUMBER 36 TITLE: The Sierra Club Handbook of Seals and Sirenians TYPE: Field Guide USEFULNESS: &&& WHERE TO FIND: Contact publisher or local book store AUTHOR: Reeve, R. and Leatherwoord, S. DATE: 1992 PUBLISHER: Sierra Club Books, San Francisco, USA

NUMBER 37 TITLE: The Sierra Club Handbook of Whales and Dolphins TYPE: Field Guide USEFULNESS: &&& WHERE TO FIND: Contact publisher or local book store AUTHOR: Leatherwood, S. and Reeves, R. DATE: 1983 PUBLISHER: Sierra Club Books, San Francisco, USA

NUMBER 38 TITLE: Watching Whales TYPE: Brochure USEFULNESS: &&& WHERE TO FIND: Department of Conservation and Land Management (CALM) AUTHOR: Department of Conservation and Land Management (CALM). DATE: PUBLISHER: Department of Conservation and Land Management (CALM), Western Australia.

NUMBER 39 TITLE: Whales and Dolphins (Identification Guide) TYPE: Identification Sheet USEFULNESS: &&&& WHERE TO FIND: Environment Australia, Department of the Environment and Heritage AUTHOR: Environment Australia, Department of the Environment and Heritage DATE: 1999 PUBLISHER: Environment Australia, Department of the Environment and Heritage

NUMBER 40 TITLE: Whale watching log TYPE: Log book USEFULNESS: & WHERE TO FIND: Department of Conservation and Land Management (CALM). AUTHOR: Department of Conservation and Land Management (CALM). DATE: PUBLISHER: Department of Conservation and Land Management(CALM) Western Australia.

Updated 05/06/03 Page 8 PART V: Useful References Marine Community Monitoring Manual

NUMBER 41 TITLE: Whale Watching Guide TYPE: Brochure USEFULNESS: && WHERE TO FIND: Australian Nature Conservation Agency, Canberra AUTHOR: Australian Nature Conservation Agency, Canberra DATE: 1996 PUBLISHER: Australian Nature Conservation Agency, Canberra

SEA BIRDS NUMBER 42 TITLE: A Field Guide to the Birds of Australia TYPE: Field Guide USEFULNESS: &&& WHERE TO FIND: Book stores AUTHOR: Pizzey, G. DATE: 1986 PUBLISHER: Collins, Sydney

NUMBER 43 TITLE: Birds of Cape Range National Park and Ningaloo Marine Park: A check list for bird watchers TYPE: Booklet USEFULNESS: &&& WHERE TO FIND: Department of Conservation and Land Management, Exmouth, Western Australia AUTHOR: Department of Conservation and Land Management, Exmouth, Western Australia DATE: 1997 PUBLISHER: Department of Conservation and Land Management, Exmouth, Western Australia

NUMBER 44 TITLE: Handbook of Western Australian Birds (Volume 1) Non-Passerines (Emu to Dollarbird) TYPE: Book USEFULNESS: && WHERE TO FIND: Western Australian Museum AUTHOR: Johnstone, R.E. & Storr, G.M DATE: 1998 PUBLISHER: Western Australian Museum

SOCIAL ENVIRONMENT LITTER NUMBER 45 TITLE: Southern Metropolitan Coastal Waters Study (1991-1994). Final Report. Report 17 TYPE: Report USEFULNESS: & WHERE TO FIND: Out of print AUTHOR: Department of Environmental Protection DATE: 1991 PUBLISHER: Department of Environmental Protection, Western Australia

Updated 05/06/03 Page 9 PART V: Useful References Marine Community Monitoring Manual

NUMBER 46 TITLE: The State of the Marine Environment Report for Australia. Technical Annex: 2 Pollution TYPE: Report USEFULNESS: && WHERE TO FIND: Contact publisher AUTHOR: Zann, L.P. and Sutton, D. (eds) DATE: 1995 PUBLISHER: Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Authority, Queensland

GENERAL

NUMBER 47 TITLE: The Marine Life of Ningaloo Marine Park and Coral Bay TYPE: Guide book USEFULNESS: &&& WHERE TO FIND: WA Naturally (CALM Store), or book stores AUTHOR: Storrie, A. Morrison, S DATE: 1998 PUBLISHER: Department of Conservation and Land Management (CALM), Western Australia

NUMBER 48 TITLE: A critical assessment of data derived from Coral Cay Conservation volunteers TYPE: Journal USEFULNESS: & WHERE TO FIND: University Library AUTHOR: Mumby, P.J., Harborne, A.R., Raines, P.S., & Ridley, J.M DATE: 1995 PUBLISHER: Bulletin of Marine Science, vol 56, No. 3

NUMBER 49 TITLE: Australian Marine Life the plants and animals of temperate waters TYPE: USEFULNESS: &&&& WHERE TO FIND: AUTHOR: Edgar, G.J. DATE: 1997 PUBLISHER: Reed Books, Victoria.

NUMBER 50 TITLE: Developing Reliable Coral Reef Monitoring Programs for Marine Tourism Operators and Community Volunteers (Tech Report No. 24) TYPE: Technical Report USEFULNESS: && WHERE TO FIND: Contact publisher AUTHOR: Musso, B. and Inglis, G. DATE: 1998 PUBLISHER: CRC Reef Research Centre

Updated 05/06/03 Page 10 PART V: Useful References Marine Community Monitoring Manual

NUMBER 51 TITLE: Field Activities for Coastal and Marine Environments TYPE: Manual USEFULNESS: &&&& WHERE TO FIND: Marine Education Society of Australasia AUTHOR: Oliver, J. (ed) DATE: 1995 PUBLISHER: Marine Education Society of Australasia (MESA)

NUMBER 52 TITLE: Intertidal algal species diversity and the effect of pollution. TYPE: Aust. J. mar. Freshwater. Res., 23: 73-84 USEFULNESS: & WHERE TO FIND: University Library AUTHOR: Borowitzka MA. DATE: 1972 PUBLISHER: Australian Journal of Marine and Freshwater Research

NUMBER 53 TITLE: Marine Environment: Student Manual TYPE: Students Manual USEFULNESS: && WHERE TO FIND: Contact publisher AUTHOR: Moffatt, B. DATE: 1997 PUBLISHER: Wet Paper Marine Education, Queensland

NUMBER 54 TITLE: Marine Studies: A course for Senior Students TYPE: Students Manual USEFULNESS: && WHERE TO FIND: Contact publisher AUTHOR: Moffatt, B. DATE: 1997 PUBLISHER: Wet Paper Marine Education, Queensland

NUMBER 55 TITLE: Methods in intertidal ecology. A very basic guide TYPE: USEFULNESS: && WHERE TO FIND: AUTHOR: Borowitzka MA, Lethbridge RC. DATE: 1998 PUBLISHER: School of Biological & Environmental Sciences, Murdoch University, Perth, Western Australia

Updated 05/06/03 Page 11 PART V: Useful References Marine Community Monitoring Manual

NUMBER 56 TITLE: Our Sea, Our Future: Major findings of the State of the Marine Environment Report for Australia TYPE: Report USEFULNESS: && WHERE TO FIND: Contact publisher AUTHOR: Zann, L.P. (complied) DATE: 1995 PUBLISHER: Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Authority, Queensland

NUMBER 57 TITLE: Project Reef-Ed: Great Barrier Reef Educational Activities TYPE: Activities Manual USEFULNESS: &&&& WHERE TO FIND: Contact publisher AUTHOR: Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Authority DATE: 1988 PUBLISHER: Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Authority

NUMBER 58 TITLE: State of the Environment Report TYPE: Report USEFULNESS: & WHERE TO FIND: Contact publisher AUTHOR: Environmental Protection Authority, Department of Conservation and Land Management (CALM), and Department of Land Administration DATE: 1992 PUBLISHER: Government of Western Australia

NUMBER 59 TITLE: State of the Environment Report TYPE: Report USEFULNESS: & WHERE TO FIND: Contact publisher AUTHOR: State of the Environment Reference Group DATE: 1998 PUBLISHER: Government of Western Australia

NUMBER 60 TITLE: Studying Temperate Marine Environments TYPE: Hand Book USEFULNESS: &&&& WHERE TO FIND: AUTHOR: Kingsford, M, and Battershill, C. (eds) DATE: 1998? PUBLISHER: Canterbury University Press

Updated 05/06/03 Page 12 PART V: Useful References Marine Community Monitoring Manual

NUMBER 61 nd TITLE: Survey Manual for tropical marine resources 2 edition TYPE: Manual USEFULNESS: && WHERE TO FIND: Australian Institute of Marine Science (AIMS), Townsville, Queensland AUTHOR: Williams, S. Wilkinson, C. & Baker, V. (eds) DATE: 1997 PUBLISHER: Australian Institute of Marine Science (AIMS), Townsville, Queensland

NUMBER 62 TITLE: The State of the Marine Environment Report for Australia. Technical Annex: 1: The Marine Environment TYPE: Report USEFULNESS: && WHERE TO FIND: Contact publisher AUTHOR: Zann, L.P. and Kailoloa, P. (eds) DATE: 1995 PUBLISHER: Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Authority, Queensland

NUMBER 63 TITLE: Three recent initiatives for monitoring of Australian coasts by the community TYPE: Journal USEFULNESS: & WHERE TO FIND: University Library AUTHOR: Jacoby, C., Manning, C., Fritz, S., & Rose, L. DATE: 1997 PUBLISHER: Ocean and Coastal Management, Vol 36, Nos 1-3, pp. 205-226

Updated 05/06/03 Page 13 PART V: Useful References Marine Community Monitoring Program

PART VI

APPENDICES

PART VI: TABLE OF CONTENTS

APPENDICES: FIVE NAUTICAL MILE GRID REFERENCE SHEETS FOR WESTERN AUSTRALIA MAP 1 TO 11

Updated 9/05/03 PART VI: Appendices Marine Community Monitoring Program

APPENDICES

FIVE NAUTICAL MILE See Map 1 GRID REFERENCE SHEETS FOR WA See Map 2

See Map 3

See Map 4

See Map 5

See Map 6

See Map 7

See Map 11

See Map 10 See Map 8 See Map 9

Updated 9/05/03 PART VI: Appendices PART VI: Appendices -12 -13 -14 -15 -16 29 9 29 8 29 7 29 6 29 5 29 4 29 3 29 2 29 1 29 0 28 9 28 8 28 7 28 6 28 5 28 4 28 3 28 2 28 1 28 0 27 9 27 8 27 7 27 6 27 5 27 4 27 3 27 2 27 1 27 0 26 9 26 8 26 7 129 129 # Lake Argyle # 128 128 Wyndham GW GX GY GZ HA HB HC HD HE HF HG HH HI HJ HK HL HM HN HO HP HQ HR HS HT 127 127 126 126

Marine Community Monitoring Program 125 125 FM FN FP FQ F M F N29 9 F O FP29 8 F Q29 F 7 R FS29 6 F T F29 U 5 F V29 4 FW F X29 3 F Y GZ29 2 GA29 1 GB GC29 0 GD GE28 9 GF GG28 8 GH28 GI 7 GJ28 6 GK GL28 5 GM GN28 4 GO GP28 3 GQ28 2 GR GS28 1 GT GU28 0 GV 27 9 27 8 27 7 27 6 27 5 27 4 27 3 27 2 27 1 27 0 26 9 26 8 26 7 26 6 26 5 26 4 26 3 26 2 26 1 26 0 25 9 25 8 25 7 25 6 25 5 25 4 124 124 -12 -13 -14 -15 -16

Map 1 Updated 9/05/03 Marine Community Monitoring Program

121 122 123 124 125

-13 -13 EC ED EE EF EG EH EI EJ EK EL EM EN EO EP EQ ER ES ET EU EV EW EX EY FZ FA FB FC FD FE FF FG FH FI FJ FK FL FM FN FO FP FQ FR FS FT FU FV FW FX 287 287 286 286 285 285 284 284 283 283 282 282 281 281 280 280 279 279 278 278 -14 277 277 -14 276 276 275 275 274 274 273 273 272 272 271 271 270 270 269 269 268 268 267 267 266 266 265 -15 -15 264 263 262 261 260 259 258 257 256 255 254 253 -16 -16 252 251 250 249 248 One Arm Point 247 # 246 245 244 243 242 -17 241 -17 240 239 238 237 # 236 Derby 235 234 233 232 231 230 Broome ECEDEEEFEGEH EI EJ EK EL EM EN EO EP # -18 -18

121 122 123 124 125 Map 2

Updated 9/05/03 PART VI: Appendices PART VI: Appendices -17 -18 -19 -20 123 123 Broome # 122 122 Bidyadanga # 121 121 120 120

Marine Community Monitoring Program 119 119 CS CT239 CU CV238 CW CX237 CY DZ236 DA DB235 DC234 DD DE233 DF DG232 DH DI231 DJ230 DK DL229 DM DN228 DO DP227 DQ DR226 DS DT225 DU DV224 DW223 DX DY222 EZ EA221 EB EC220 ED219 EE EF218 EG EH217 EI EJ216 EK215 EL EM214 EN EO213 EP EQ 212 211 210 209 208 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 118 118 -17 -18 -19 -20

Map 3 Updated 9/05/03 PART VI: Appendices -19 -20 -21 -22 119 119 21 5 21 4 21 3 21 2 21 1 21 0 20 9 20 8 20 7 20 6 20 5 20 4 118 118 # Wickham 117 117 # Ka rratha # Dampier 116 116

Marine Community Monitoring Program Onslow # 115 115 AW AX21 5 AY BZ21 4 BA21 BB 3 BC21 2 BD BE21 1 BF21 0 BG BH20 9 BI20 8 BJ BK20 7 BL BM20 6 BN20 5 BO BP20 4 BQ BR20 3 BS20 BT 2 BU20 1 BV BW20 0 BX19 BY 9 CZ19 8 CA CB19 7 CC19 CD 6 CE19 5 CF CG19 4 CH CI19 3 CJ19 2 CK CL19 1 CM19 0 CN CO18 9 CP CQ18 8 CR CS18 7 CT18 6 CU CV18 5 CW CX18 4 CY18 DZ 3 DA DB DC DD 114 114 -19 -20 -21 -22 Map 4 Updated 9/05/03 Marine Community Monitoring Program

111 112 113 114 115

-21 -21 M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AI AJ AK AL AM AN AO AP AQ AR AS AT AU AV AW AX AY BZ BA BB BC BD BE BF BG BH 191 191 190 190 189 189 188 188 187 186 186 185 185 184 183 182 # 181 Exmouth -22 -22 180 179 178 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 -23 169 -23 168 167 # 166 Coral Bay 165 164 163 162 161 160 159 158 -24 157 -24 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 149 148 147 146 # -25 145 Carnarvon -25 144 143 142 141 140 139 138 137 136 135 Denham 134 # -26 M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AI AJ AM AN AO AP AT AV AW AX -26

111 112 113 114 115

Map 5

Updated 9/05/03 PART VI: Appendices Marine Community Monitoring Program

111 112 113 114 115

Carnarvon # -25 -25 M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AI AJ AK AL AM AN AO AP AQ AR 14 3 14 2 14 1

14 0 13 9 13 8 13 7 13 6 13 5 Denham 13 4 # -26 13 3 -26 13 2 13 1 13 0 12 9 12 8 12 7 12 6 12 5 12 4 12 3 12 2 -27 12 1 -27 12 0 11 9 11 8 11 7 11 6 11 5 11 4 Ka lbarri 11 3 # 11 2 11 1 11 0 -28 10 9 -28 10 8 10 7 10 6 10 5 10 4 10 3 10 2 10 1 Geraldton 10 0 # 99 98 -29 97 -29 96 95 94 Dongara # 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 -30 M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AI AJ AK AL AM AN AO AP AQ AR AS AT AU AV AW AX AY BZ BA BB BC BD BE BF BG BH# -30 Leeman

111 112 113 114 115 Map 6

Updated 9/05/03 PART VI: Appendices Marine Community Monitoring Program

112 113 114 115

-29 -29 Y Z AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AI AJ AK AL AM AN AO AP AQ AR AS AT AU AV AW AX AY BZ BA BB BC BD BE 95 Dongara 94 # 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 # Leeman -30 -30 84 # Green Head 83 82 Jurien 81 # 80 79 # Cervantes 78 77 76 75 Wedge Island # 74 Lancelin -31 73 # -31 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 Marmion # 62 61 -32 -32 60 Fremantle# 59 58 57 # 56 Rockingham 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 -33 -33 48 Myalup # 47 46 45 Bunbury # 44 43 42 # 41 Dunsborough # 40 Busselton 39 38 # Gracetown Y Z AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AI AJ AK AL AM AN AO AP AQ AR AS AT AU AV AW AX AY BZ BA BB BC BD BE BF BG -34 -34

Augusta #

112 113 114 115 Map 7

Updated 9/05/03 PART VI: Appendices PART VI: Appendices -33 -34 -35 -36 -37 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 117 117 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 # Walpole 116 116 Bunbury # Busselton # Augusta # # Gracetown # 115 115 Dunsborough 114 114

Marine Community Monitoring Program 113 113 Y Z AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AI AJ AK AL AM AN AO AP AQ AR AS AT AU AV AW AX AY BZ BA BB BC BD BE BF BG BH BI BJ BK BL BM BN BO BP Y Z AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AI AJ AK AL AM AN AO AP AQ AR AS AT AU AV AW AX AY BZ BA BB BC BD BE BF BG BH BI BJ BK BL BM BN BO BP BQ BR BS BT BU BV BW BX BY CZ CA CB CC CD CE CF 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 47 46 45 44 43 42 40 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 41 39 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 112 112 -33 -34 -35 -36 -37 Map 8 Updated 9/05/03 PART VI: Appendices -34 -35 -36 -37 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 121 121 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 DY DX DW DT DS DR Hopetown # 120 120 DP DO DN DU DM DL EA EB DK DV DJ EZ # DI DG DQ Bremer Bay DF DE 119 119 DD DH DC DB DA DZ CY CX CW CV CU CT CS 118 118 CR # Albany Marine Community Monitoring Program CQ CP CN CM CL CK # Denmark CJ CI CH CO CG 117 117 CF CE CD Walpole # CC CB CA CZ BW BV BX BY 2 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 10 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 BU 116 116 -34 -35 -36 -37 Map 9 Updated 9/05/03 PART VI: Appendices -33 -34 -35 -36 125 125 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 124 124 123 123 122 122

Marine Community Monitoring Program # Esperance 121 121 DR DS DT DU DV DW DX DY EZ EA EB EC ED EE EF EG EH EI EJ EK EL EM EN EO EP EQ ER ES ET EU EV EW EX EY FZ FA FB FC FD FE FF FG FH FI FJ FK FL FM FN FO FP FQ FR FS FT FU FV FW # Hopetown 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 120 120 -33 -34 -35 -36

Map 10 Updated 9/05/03 PART VI: Appendices -32 -33 -34 -35 129 129 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 # Eucla 128 128 GW GX GY GZ HA HB HC HD HE HF HG HH HI HJ HK HL HM HN HO HP HQ HR HS HT 127 127 Eyre # 126 126

Marine Community Monitoring Program 125 125 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 FM FN FO FP FQ FR FS FT FU FV FW FX FY GZ GA GB GC GD GE GF GG GH GI GJ GK GL GM GN GO GP GQ GR GS GT GU GV 124 124 -32 -33 -34 -35

Map 11 Updated 9/05/03 Marine Community Monitoring Program

Updated 9/05/03 PART VI: Appendices